A1r A1v

The
Little Horns
Doom & Downfall:

Or a
Scripture-Prophesie
of
King James, and King Charles,
and of this present Parliament,
unfolded.

Wherein it appeares, that the late Tragedies
that have bin acted upon the Scene of
these three Nations: and particularly, the
late Kings doom and death, was so long
ago, as by Daniel pred-eclared.

And
What the issue of all will be, is also discovered;
which followes in the second Part.

By M. Cary, a servant of Jesus Christ.

Amos 3.7,8. “Surely the Lord God will do nothing but he revealeth his
secrets unto his servants the Prophets: The Lion
hath roared, who will not feare? the Lord God hath
spoken, who can but Prophesie?”

London, Printed for the Author, and are to be sold
at the sign of the Black-spread-Eagle, at the West
end of Pauls, 16511651.

A2r

A new 483
And More Exact Mappe

or,
Description
of

New Jerusalems Glory when Jesus
Christ
and his Saints with him shall reign on
earth a Thousand years, and possess all Kingdoms.

Wherein
Is discovered the glorious estate into which
the Church shall be then put both in respect of
externall and internall glory, and the time when.

And also,
What hath been done these eight yeares last
past, and what is now a doing, and what shall be
done within a few years now following in
order to this great work.

Wherein also
That great Question, whether it be lawfull
for Saints to make use of the materiall Sword in the
ruining of the enemies of Christ, and whether
it be the mind of Christ to have it so, is at large debated
and resolved in the Affirmative from
clear Scriptures, and all others answered.

By M. Cary, a servant of Jesus Christ.

Rev. 22 6, 7. “And he said unto me, These sayings are faithfull and true,
and the Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his Angell to
shew unto his Servants the thing which must shortly be
done. Behold, I come quickly.”

London, 1651-04-17Aprill 17.
Printed by W. H. and are to be sold at the sign of the
Black-spread-Eagle at the West end of Pauls. 16511651.

A2v A3r

To
The Vertuous, Heroicall, and
Honourable Ladies,
The Lady Elizabeth Cromwel,
The Lady Bridget Ireton, and
The Lady Margaret Role.

May it please your Ladiships,

Being presesed in spirit
to divulge this
insuing discourse,
the maine scope
whereof, being to make this
present age more sensible of the
late past, and present footsteps A3 of A3v
of God in the world, in order to
the setting up of the kingdom of
our Lord Jesus; and the making
of all dominions to serve
and obey him.

And observing, how that among
the many pious, precious,
prudent, and sage Matrons, and
holy women, with which this
Common-wealth is adorned; as
with so many precious jewels,
and choice gemmes, (which
God having here and there placed
in it, doe set out the glory
and lustre of the
Nation) This Nation
so farre excels in
glory, and happinesse
all other Nations,
because of
of those numbers
of precious Saints
that are in it; and
for severall other
respects: As it
made a Reverend
See Mr. Tho. Goodwins
Sermon, preached
before the Parliament
in 1645-02Feb. 1645. which
is in print, and intituled,
The great Interest
of States and
Kingdomes.
which in
many other respects is
worthy the serious
view of the best saints.
Divine of this
Nation, thus to
expresse himselfe
concerning it:
That if wee had
stood at Gods elbow,
when he bounded
out the Nations,
and appointed
the times, and seasons,
that men
should live in; wee
should not have
known, in what nation,
or kingdome,
or age wee should
have chosen to
have lived in, rather
then in this
kingdom, for whom
God hath done such
great things: unlesse
when Jesus
Christ
himselfe was
alive, and the Apostles
in those primitive
times; unlesse
in Judea it self,
where all the Apostles
were together.
God
hath selected
and chosen out
your Ladiships, and A4r
and placed you
in some of the
highest places of
honour (according
to your
present capacities)
in the three
Nations; wherein
you have
more then ordinary
opportunities
to honour
him.

And observing
withall,
how that as God
hath placed you
in the stations
wherein you A4 are A4v
are; so hee hath
fitted you for
them: the tendency
of your
aimes, studies,
and endeavours,
(as it is well
knowne) being
to the exaltation
(as far as lies in
you) of that great
King of Saints,
the Lord Jesus;
whom you love
in sincerity, and
for the setting
up of whose glorious
Kingdome in the perfection
of it, you longingly waite: which A5r
which frame of spirit in you,
hath not been of yesterday only,
but for many yeeres together
hath shined conspicuously, and
gloriously in you all; demonstrating
to all Saints, that indwelling
presence of the holy
spirit which is within you.

I have therefore chosen, (being
of your own sex) to dedicate
these Treatises to your Ladiships,
(whom I honour because
God hath honoured) and under
your favourable aspects, to publish
them to the world; being
assured both,

First, of your ingenuous, and
gracious acceptation hereof;
seeing that these treatises tend to the A5v
the quickning, and refreshing
of the hearts, of those which
waite for, and expect the comming,
and the kingdome of our
Lord Jesus Christ: Knowing
that every thing of this nature,
from how weak an instrument
soever it be, (so it bee with the
plaine, and cleer demonstrations
of the holy Scripture, and
the holy spirit) is very acceptable
unto you, who are in that
waiting and expecting posture.

And also secondly, of your
owning, and defending, and
maintaining all the truths, which
are therein laid down; as far as
they shall appear, in the energie,
and evidence of the holy spiritrit A6r
unto you, who have already
so plenarily (compared with
many other Saints of these present
times) received of that spirit.

And now right honourable;
that as your God hath graciously
loaded you both with internall
and externall glory; under
which he keepes you in a sweet,
meek, and humble frame, which
crownes all the favours which
he hath conferred upon you; so
that you may more and more abound,
in every grace, and blessing
of the Lord, enjoying yet
more full, spirituall, and sweet
communion and fellowship
with the Father, and with his Sonne A6v
Sonne Jesus Christ, through the
spirit; that as transplendent stars
you may shine gloriously, in the
severall spheares wherein God
hath set you, or shall set you;
while in this world, untill you
are advanced unto that beatificke
vision, which is to bee injoyed,
among the glorified
Saints, and Angels, with Jesus
Christ
in another world, shall
be the prayer of,

My Ladies,

Your Ladiships devoted
unfeignedly, to serve you
in the Lord,

Mary Rande.

A7r

To the Reader.

Courteous Reader,

I had written the first of these
Treatises, intituled, The little
Horns doom and downfall
, above
seven yeeres since, but
have bin with-held from publishing
of it untill now, (for
ends best known unto divine Majesty; but
(it may so guesse,) it may bee, it was because
that men would then generally have been
more uncapable of receiving of such things,
then now they are, because now these things
are fulfilled; and prophesies are then best understood,
when they are fulfilled.) But now,
am I so pressed to publish both this first Treatise,
and this other which
I have but lately written, Having finished it but
since the beginning of
the moneth of 1651-08August,
this present yeer, 16511651.

upon this 27 verse of this
seventh of Daniel, as that
I cannot, I dare not,
with-hold neither of them from publike view A7v
view any longer; but by publishing of them
in print, I shall expose them to the publike
view of all men, as far as in me lies.

And having so done, shall leave it to the
eternall Jehovah to make it effectuall, to
those ends to which he hath appointed it,
which may bee First, to convince those
of their folly, that persist in waies contradictory
to, (or crossing of) his present designes,
to the disturbing of their own soules,
(though they cannot hinder his worke, for
who can let it?) for if hee do not convince
them, none can: Or,

Secondly, it may be to confirm others; for
there are some that are already so far inlightned
in their understandings, about the present
proceedings of God in the world, as
they do in some competent measure, already
discerne the footsteps of God, in these great
present providences; and doe discerne also
what his designes are in these things.

Who yet are not fully perswaded, that the
Saints suffering times are expired, and that
the “time, times, and halfe a time,” is come
to a period; who possibly may hereby bee
further enlightned, and satisfied, and further
encouraged to rejoyce in God, and in his present
proceedings in the World.

And A8r

And now first, if any shal sleight these things,
because hereby is discovered any delusions,
in which they are; or any folly, in the waies
they have taken; wherein they doe any way
support the enemies, and oppose the very reall
servants of God; or for any other by-end
whatsoever: let them know, that their so
doing, shall not trouble me at all, if it hurt
not them.

And secondly, if any shall hereby receive
any light, or any refreshment, let them
blesse the Lord for it, from whom alone it
came: for I am a very weake, and unworthy
instrument, and have not done this
worke by any strength of my owne, but have
been often made sensible, that I could doe
no more herein, (wherein any light, or truth
could appeare) of my selfe, then a pensill, or
pen can do, when no hand guides it: being
daily made sensible of my owne insufficiency
to do any thing, as of my selfe; that
to use the Apostles expression, and to speak
it feelingly, (for I finde it daily true) I must
professe, “I am not sufficient to thinke a good
thought, but my sufficiency is of God,”
to
whom be glory, and honour, and praise for
evermore, Amen.

I have onely one thing more, which I judge A8v
judge necessary to acquaint the reader with,
and that is this: In my former book, which
I published in 1648-04April, 1648, I subscribed my
name Cary, for that was then my name;
for which reason I have thought good, to
subscribe the same name in the title page of
this Book also; that the reader may not bee
put to any doubt, by finding different names
in the Titles; (since I have in this Book, so
often referred the Reader to that,) but let
the Reader know, That (having since changed
my name) I am now known by the
name of,

Mary Rande.

a1r

They that have any
knowledge of my
self, how worthless
a worm I am; do also
know how unfit I am either
to write Books, or to judge of
others writings: yet owing respect
to this Author, I could not
deny a word, being desired to
read and say something.

And this I must say (though a not a1v
not concurring in all things
touching the personal
Which I ever
accounted a harmless
Errour, if an
Errour.
reign,
that this Author
hath these things commendable
in the ensuing Treatise.

First, That she hath taught
her sexe that there are more
ways then one to avoid idleness
(the devils cushion)
on which so many sit and
sleep their last. They that will
not use the Distaff, may improve
a Pen.

Secondly, A holy, modest,
and painfull spirit, runs
through her endeavours; which
I desire may not be slighted
by any, nor thrown by: for good a2r
good wine may be found in
this Cluster: in this dress you
shall neither see naked Brests,
black Patches, nor long
Trains; but an heart breathing
after the coming of Christ, and
the comfort of Saints.

Thirdly, Scriptures cleerly
opened, and properly applied;
yea, so well, that you might
easily think she plow’d with
anothers Heifer, were not the
contrary well known.

Upon the whole matter, I
believe that it will be acceptable
to all those that desire to
see Christ as he is; who will
not be offended at this Treatise,
or rather the Spouses a2 wish a2v
wish and longing, “Make haste,
my beloved, and be thou like
a young roe, or a hart, upon
the mountains of Spices,”
Cant.
8.ult.

Two of this sexe I have
met with, very famous
for more then their mother-
tongue, and for that we
call Learning, yet living.
The one an unhappie branch
of that Tree which is cut
off, and pulling up by
the roots; of whom I owe
much. The other of deserved
note in Utrecht, the glory
of her sexe in Holland.
But this my Country-woman speaks a3r
speaks the best Language;
yea, I will adde: Other
“daughters have done vertuously,
but thou surmountest
them,”
Prov. 31. 29.

More would I say; but
my feeble thoughts or words
will adde but little to her
labours. Doubtless she had
good help from above in
her travel for this birth:
I will bequeath her Solomons
last words of his good
houswife.

“Favour is deceitful, and
beauty is vain: but a woman
that feareth the Lord,
shee shall be praised. Give
her of the fruit of her hands, a3 and a3v
and let her own works praise
her in the gates,”
Prov. 31.
30, 31.

Hugh Peters.

Touch- a4r

Touching this Treatise the
Judgement of H. Jessey.

Seeing “Blessed is he that readeth,
and they that hear the words of This
Prophecy
, and that keep the
the things that are written therein,”
Rev.
1. 3.
it must meeds have a tendency to
Blessedness, to help others in the understanding
thereof. The giver of any
Talent or Talents this way, requires
the improvement thereof to our utmost
for outr “Lords advantage,” Matt. 25.

I have been frequently greatly refreshed
in my spirits, for above twenty
yeers, with the consideration of
the Glorious State and
Priviledges of the New Jerusalem
that shall be on earth,
and the certainty thereof, foretold
by the Prophets and Apostles; whose a4 pro- a4v
prophecies to this purpose being cited
in this book, are therein, with much cleerness,
familiarly explained.

And for the application here of the
little Horn, to the late King; and of the
time of the slaying of the Witnesses, to
16451645; and the Jews conversion, to 16561656
and Christ’s kingdom’s being in its compleat
glory
, to 17011701; the grounds here
laid down deserve to be well weighed,
and time will make the Truth evident.

And whereas both here, and in the
Authors former book on Rev. 11. (called
the Resurrection of the
Witnesses) their
slaying is said
to be past, and they are said to be “risen
again,”
and henceforth no more to be
slain, nor to be under Babels power
or yoke; to this I may say with Jeremiah
in another case, Amen; though
yet I know some others, acquainted
with much of the Lords minde, that
do judge that “the slaying of the Witnesses
in not yet past, but to come shortly;”
(some a5r
(some of them judge before the yeer
16541654.) to which I say,

First, If this latter judgement shall
prove to be the truth, it were best to
know the worst before it overtake us
unawares. And

Secondly, I account that this worst
(if it shall prove to be future) shall
prove but a short time of travel,
[three days and a half space] of the
woman with childe, that had for a long
time been in much sorrow and pains;
and then being delivered, she rejoyceth,
and forgetteth all her pangs and
former sorrows, Joh. 16.

Of these Great Changes
in all the World, now at hand; of
the Pouring out of four Vials;
and of the slaying and rising of
the Witnesses
, and of the conversion of
the Jews
probably before 16581658, and
of the Scriptures order in
these proceedings, before the conversion of
the Jews, and thence until the thousand
yeers of Christs reign begin,
and a5v
and of marvelous things therein and
afterwards
; I had made a Collection
from the Book of the Revelation, and
from Daniel, and other Scriptures;
which was appointed to be printed
before my Store-house of cases of Conscience
was printed in 16501650. but some
reasons have hitherunto moved me
to forbear the publishing thereof: but
those reasons appear to me now an insufficient
groumd to forbear longer,
having afresh considered that pregnant
Motive from Rev. 1. 3. before recited,
and the sweetness of the precious
things to come
, foretold herein, as well
as therein, which should urge us not ot
be wanting to help others, as far as
in us is, to the sweet and comfortable
knowledge of the “wonderful great
things that our God is about to do for his
people shortly”
; as he himself saith,
“Behold I come quickly,” [or speedily:]
Amen. Even so Come Lord Jesus,,

Saith the soul of his
servant,

H.J.

a6r

Reader,

It may so be, That thou art one of those,
who are willing to “follow the Lamb, whither
soever he goeth”
; and rejoycest in spirit,
that the King of Saints doth begin to be terrible
to the Kings of the Earth. Now, if thou
staggerest not through unbelief,” as those exceeding
great and precious promises which are
recorded in the Scriptures of Truth, concernin
the fifth kingdom; thou shalt in due time,
behold, with a mixture of joy and wonder,
those other grand Mutations, and extraordinary
Revolutions, which are even at the door,
and ready to break in upon the Princes and
upon the People of the whole earth.

Indeed, many wise men after the flesh have
been (and now are) much offended, that a
company of illiterate men, and silly women,
should pretend to any skill in dark prophecies,
and to a foresight of future events, which the
most learned Rabbies, and the most knowing
Politicians have not presumed to hope for. But (after a6v
(after they who are thus offended have perused
those Scriptures mentioned in the margint) Psal. 119. 98,
99, 100.

they shall do well to observe the
fruits of that Faith and fore-sight
which dwelt in the hearts and in the minds of
the old godly Nonconformists in Queen Elizabeths,
and King James his days; there having
been many hundreds of those silly and illiterate
ones (so called) of whom it may be
said at this day, that they were wiser then their
enemies, wiser then their teachers, wiser then
the Ancients, ( Psa. 119. 98. 99. 100.) where
may be seen the proper reason of this their wisdom.
For, are not those things come to pass,
which they foresaw, and foretold, concerning
that fatal Catastrophe which hath now befallen
the Prelates and their adherents? whereas
the generality of the Ministers and people of the
Land, had very little acquiaintance with the
minde of God in those particulars. And surely
that eminent instance of the Teachings of the
Spirit, and that full assurance of Faith bestowed
upon those Saints which like Caleb and Joshua
followed the Lord fully, may suggest such
a thought as this, That there may be now in
this juncture of time, some neglected, despised
reproached Ones, both men and women, who
clearly understand and perceive many precious truths a7r
truths (concerning the golden Image, the
fourth Beast, the seven Vials, the seventh
Trumpet
, the New Jerusalem, the binding of
Satan
, the pouring out of the Spirit, the glorious
advance of knowledge and Grace
, the
universal Gospel-peace, the power and dominion
of the Saints
&c.) which not onely the
world generally, but many of the Saints themselves
look upon as well-composed Fables, and
as the Visions of their own hearts who are the
teachers of them.

The ensuing Discourse, treating of some of
those things (being a Gentlewomans thoughts
put into form and order by her self) was
brought to me to peruse, with this desire added,
That (if I judged it meet) I would prefix a
few words, to signifie my judgement concerning
the usefulness thereof.

Two things there are which to me favor very
well, and I believe will take the hearts of divers
Christians. The one is the Collection and
Collation of so many of those precious promises
which concern the times yet to come, and
the presenting them to the Readers view, (in
words at length, and) not in figures, as the
manner of many is.

The other is, her vigilant care to insert here
and there, as occasion is offered, such necessary cautions a7v
cautions as tend to the wiping off of those unjust
aspersions which Hierom and others would
cast upon the Millenaries, as they are called.
For in the Book thou wilt finde her pleading
for the advance of holiness, in the midst of all
that happiness which is prepared for the Saints
in that thousand yeers.

As for her thoughts concerning the “little
Horn”
, thou wilt say (when thou readest) they
are new and singular; therefore, be thou the
more careful, and, if thou canst serve the Saints
with a more probable Exposition, and see the
Apology in the 45 and 46 pages.

“Many are running too and fro, and knowledge
is increasing,”
Dan. 12. 4. But together
therewith, the Lord be pleased, for the Lords
sake, to advance the power of godliness, zeal
for the truth, and the delight of the Saints in
Communion with the Father and his Son Jesus
Christ
, and one with another. Do thou,
Reader, say Amen beleevingly, with

Thy servant for the
Lords sake,

Christopher Feake.

a8r

Errata.

  • Page 1. l. 5 deledelete “another” .
  • p. 4. l. 14. for “Monarchs”, r.
    Monarchies.
  • p. 5. l. 3. for “Monarch”, r. Monarchy.
  • p.
    72. l. 12. for “a virgin”, r. O virgin.
  • p. 75. l. 2, and 4. for
    “Monarchs”, r. Monarchies.
  • ead.eadem for “Monarch”, r. Monarchy.

  • p. 160. l. 11. for “jot”, r. iota.
  • p. 161. l. 10. for “wal”, r. walk.

  • p. 170. for “of Gospel”, r. of the Gospel.
  • p. 184. l. 6. deledelete
    “that” .
  • p. 199. l. 16. for “both Jews”, r. both of the Jews.
  • p. 213.
    l. 3. for “then to be their”, r. then as to their.
  • p. 259. l. 7. for
    “how shall Saints”, r. how Saints shall.
  • p. 282283. l. 1. for
    “and will”, r. and they will.
  • ead.eadem l 21. for “heart more”, r.
    heart will more.
  • p. 294284. l. 2. for “take”, r. execute.
  • p. 287.
    l. 1. for “external”, r. eternal.
  • p. 138338. l. antepenult. for
    “your”, r. you.
a8v
Imprimatur. Joseph Caryl.
B1r

The
Little Hornes
Doom and Downfall

Dan. 7. 24, 25, 26, 27. “And another, another shall rise after them which shall be
divers from the first, and shall subdue three Kings.
And he shall speak great words against the most high, and
think to change Times and Laws, and they shall be given
into his hand, untill a time, and times, and the dividing
of time.
But the Judgement shall sit, and they shall take away his
Dominion, to consume, and to destroy it unto the end.
And the Kingdom, and Dominion, and the greatnesse of
the Kingdome under the whole heaven, shall be given
unto the people of the Saints of the most High, whose
Kingdome is an everlasting Kingdom, and all Dominions
shall serve and obey him.”

The Coherence of these verses
with the former part of this
Chapter being observed, the
meaning of them will the more
clearely appeare, which is briefly thus.

The Prophet Daniel in the first yeare of B Belshazzar, B1v 2
Belshazzar had a Dream, and Visions, wherin
the all-disposer of all things was pleased
to reveale unto him (not for his sake only, but
for ours also) many things which were to
come to passe in a very long time after: some
of which things are not yet, but shall be fulfilled
in their season.

The sum of the Vision is this: The Prophet
saw foure great beasts rise one after
another, being divers one from another; and
the first was like a Lion, the second like a
Beare, the third like a Leopard, and the fourth
beast was such a Monster, as he compares it
to no beast, being unlike any beast that could
be named; and its said to be exceeding
dreadful, and terrible, having ten hornes, and
among these hornes there came up another
little horne, before whom three were pluckt
up, and in this horne were eyes like the eyes
of a man, and a mouth speaking great things.
And at last the Prophet in his Vision saw a
finall end of all these beasts, and all their
Power, and Dominion taken from them, and
saw the Lord Jesus Christ (there stiled, “The
Son of man”
) set up to be the only Monarch
of all the World.

The Prophet having seen this Vision: and
it being dark, and mysterious to him, he was troubled, B2r 3
troubled, and desired to know the truth of it,
whereupon the interpretation of the Vision
was given to him, as it is at the 16 verse, and
so on. And it was declared to him, that the
foure great beasts, were foure Kings that
should arise out of the earth; and when the
Prophet desired more particularly to know
what the meaning of the fourth beast was,
which was so different from the rest, and so
exceeding dreadfull, and what was the meaning
of the ten Hornes which were in his
Head, and of the other Horne which came
up, before whom three fell. It was revealed
to him that the fourth beast should be the
fourth Kingdome upon the earth, which should
be different from all Kingdomes, and should
devour the whole Earth, and should tread it
down, and break it in peeces; and that the
ten Hornes should be ten Kings which
should arise out of it, and that the other
Horne which came up, before whom three
fell, was another King, which should arise
after the ten Kings, which should be divers
from the first, and should subdue three
Kings, &c.

Now that this Prophesie hath been accomplished,
exactly, clearly and fully, in the
former part of it, viz. in the rising of the B2 foure B2v 4
foure Universall Monarchs, which have
acted their parts in the world, since the time
that the Prophet Daniel saw this Vision;

The first being the Babylonian which was
then in being.

The second the Persian which succeeded
the Babylonian.

The third the Grecian which succeeded
the Persian; And

The fourth which was the worst, the most
dreadfull, and terrible, and the last of the
foure, was the Roman which succeeded the
Grecian.

I say, that in these foure Monarchs, this
Prophesie hath been in that part of it fulfilled,
is very cleare, and acknowledged by all that
acknowledge any thing.

And moreover, in that since the breaking
of the great power of the Roman Monarchy,
there hath risen ten Kings out of it,
which have been the Hornes, which the
beast hath made use of to push the Saints,
those Kings being subject to the Roman
Beast, which was first Emperiall, and afterward
Papal, that Roman Beast, whether Emperiall,
or Papall, having alwaies had when
least the number of ten Kings subjected to it,
Spain, France, England, Scotland, Ireland, and Denmarke, B3r 5
Denmark, being a part of that number. In this
also is that part of this Prophesie fulfilled,
which saies, that the fourth Monarch should
have ten Hornes, or ten Kings: and this is very
plaine and undeniable, and confest by all
that have explained this Prophesie.

And thus having observed the Coherence,
I shall by divine assistance, proceed to explaine
the remaining part of this Prophesie,
which is contained in these foure verses.

“And another shall arise after them, and he
shall be divers from the first, and he shall
subdue three Kings.”

Having observed how the former part of
of this Prophesie hath been already clearly
fulfilled, and that the ten Hornes were ten
Kings, belonging to the Roman Monarch;
and this part of this verse telling us that another
King should arise after the other ten
Kings, which should be divers from the rest,
and should subdue three Kings. And comparing
this with the eighth verse, to which this
verse hath reference, where Daniel saies
that he considered the ten Hornes, and behold
there came up among them another little
Horne, before whom there were three of
the first hornes pluckt up by the roots or
before whom three fell, as in the 20 verse: B3 the B3v 6
The result of all will be this, that this King,
mentioned in this verse, is the late King that
reigned over England, Scotland and Ireland,
and that appeares thus. The King mentioned
in this verse is said to be among the ten horns,
or Kings, or to be of them, and have three
hornes, or Kings pluckt up by the roots before
him, (ver. 8.) or to have three of the
ten Kings fall before hee comes up; and
this one to succeed three, (verse 20.)

Now this directly was the condition of
the late King; he came up in the roome of
three of the hornes, and reigned over three
of the Kingdoms That Kingdom may
be said to bee, and is indeed
subjected to the Roman
Beast (the Pope,)
when the King or those in
authority in the Kingdom
gives liberty to Prelates,
or to any of the Clergymen
(as they are called)
to exercise any unwarrantable
power over the consciences
of Saints; and
to binde Saints to worship
God in that way and
method which they prescribe,
s and no other way
but so, (which God abhors,
Esa. 29. 13. Matth.
15. 9.
) Exercising Lordship
over the consciences
of Saints: and this is
that for which Rome is
called Babylon, because
it proved in this respect
a house of bondage to ethe
Saints. And thus England
Scotland and Ireland,
were subjected to
the Roman Beast, the Pope,
untill the late Kings power
was taken from him:
and even so was England
as well as the other
Kingdomes subjected to
the Beast, even in Queen
Elizabeths
daies; for
though shee was in many
respects a vertuous
Queen; yet herein shee
failed, in suffering Bishops
to Lord it over the
consciences of Saints, and
therein was England
one of the hornes, even
then as it hath bin ever
since, untill of late yeers.
subjected
to the Roman
Beast: and before
him three Hornes
were pluckt up by the
roots: for Elizabeth
of England, and This was he that
caused the combustions in
Ireland in Queen Elizabeths
time, and was
wholly overcome at that time.

Hugh Baron of Dungannon
and Earle of
Tir-Oen
, whose predecessors
claimed the
Kingdome of Ireland;
and James of Scotland,
were all three fallen:
and the late King was he B4r 7
he that came in the
roome of these three,
and entirely possessed
the Kingdomes of all
three. So that this part
of this Prophesie is exactly
fulfilled in that
King, and not in any other
of the Kings; nor
in any other person can
these things be said to
be so exactly fulfilled
as in him. So that if
the Spirit of God here
had no further described
this little horne, it
would have been evident
that this Prophesie
had been fulfilled in
this King; these three
Kingdomes being thus
subjected to one King
or Prince, that formerly
were governed by
three; “before whom
three were plucked up,
&c.”
But it is made
more apparent, that B4 that B4v 8
this Prophesie was fulfilled in him, by that
further description, which the Spirit of God
in this Scripture gives, of the dispositions,
actions and end, or death of this King; which
we have as it followes.

Vers. 25. “And hee shall speak great words against the
most High, and shall wear out the Saints of
the most High, &c.”

Our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, John
15.
tels his Disciples, that whosoever despised
them, despised him, and whosoever
despised him, despised him that sent him:
Whereby its clear, that that person that
speaks great words against the Saints of the
most High, doth therein speak great words
against the most High. That this King did
speak great words against the Saints of the
most High; threatning the ruine and destruction
of all Puritans, and Roundheads as hee
termed the saints of God, is so well known,
as there needs nothing to be further spoken
to make it appear; nor need I mention the
the persons which long before the wars,
which meerely for their being servants of
God, were persecuted, imprisoned, fined, bani- B5r 9
banished, and otherwise threatned: and as
he spake great words against the most High
in his saints; so hee spake great words against
the Lawes and Ordinances of God,
prohibiting of them, requiring godly and
faithfull Ministers to refrain from the worshipping
of God, from publike praying, and
preaching the Word of God, upon the
first day of the Week: Whereas many a
poor soul might have been converted to, and
confirmed int the waies of God in those ordinances;
but hee constrained (as it were)
the people of the Kingdom to a prophane &
loose life, to dishonour God, by inviting and
requiring of them to practice prophane and
wicked sports upon that day, which was
appointed for a holy worshipping of God:
Whereas many poore soules needed rather
to have been encouraged, and call’d upon
to have more frequently attended upon the
Ordinances of God, for they perished for
want of knowledge. And as he thus spake
great words against the ordinances of the
most High, so he nourished and supported
many wicked and abominable Priests,
(when many holy and faithfull Ministers
of Christ were rejected) who did most
profanely abuse the Scriptures, and despise the B5v 10
the very spirit of God, and that publikely;
of which sort there were many among those
Centuries of scandalous Ministers, that were
in the beginning of this Parliament sequestred
for their delinquencies.

Thus in that this King spake great words
against the saints, and ordinances, and spirit
of God, and had pleasure in such as so did;
he therein did as here is said of him, speake
great words against the most high.

“And shall wear out the Saints of the most
High.”

Was it not long before the sitting of this
Parliament given out by this King, that hee
would not leave untill hee had left no more
Puritans in England, then there were Protestants
in Rome? and is it not generally
known what meanes and waies were used
to wear them out, and to make them weary
of living in the Kingdom? insomuch as many
godly and faithfull people being weary of
the impositions upon their consciences, of
those things which were evill, and the prohibitions
of them, from that which was
good, (as their meetings to call upon the
name of the Lord, and to confer one with another
of the things of God, and the repetitions
of Sermons,) did being thus wearied,ed, B6r 11
leave their native Kingdom, though in
all outward respects to their great disadvantage;
and those that remained how did
they groan under their burthens, and complain
to heaven day and night, against the insufferable
and wearying proceedings of that
unworthy King? Thus did hee wear out the
Saints of the most high.

“And shall think to change times and lawes,
and they shall be given into his hand untill,
&c.”

Therein also, he is more exactly characterized
and described: for it is well known,
that hee did think, and intend to change
times, and lawes, he thought to have made
sad times for all circumspect and holy Christians,
whom he called Puritans; and times
of joy, and rejoycing for all popish and prophane
persons. And hee thought to have
changed those Lawes, which had been by
preceeding Princes made for the priviledges
of the people, in civil, and spirituall respects;
and to have imposed lawes destructive to
the peoples freedom and liberty, and to have
ruled all by his own will, and made the people
slaves thereunto.

“And they shall bee given into his hand untill,
&c.”

As B6v 12

As hee thought to change Lawes, and
times, so he did; they were given into his
hand for a while, he had times and lawes in
his hand to change them at his pleasure, and
he thought to have done so alwaies: And
to this end, consulted with wicked Bishops,
Popish Lords, and profane Judges; and to
this end also he raised Armies, first against
the Scots, and afterward against all well-affected
people in Ireland, and also in England.
Thus this Horn that came up in the room of
three, did in all things answer this description
of him, which is given in these 24 and 25
verses, and hee comes in no tlittle short of
it.

There is but one thing more spoken of
him in this Chapter, whereby he is any further
described then as in these three verses;
and that is in the 21 verse, which I will here
take in before I proceed to what followes:
It is in these words.

“And I beheld and the same horne made war
with the Saints, and prevailed against
them untill, &c.”

And herein also did this Horne or King,
most exactly act according to this which the
Spirit of God by Daniel, so long since predeclared
of him: For he did make War againstgainst B7r 13
the Saints, and that in such a manner,
as no King, Prince, or Potentate ever yet
did: For no History can declare, nor in
any age, or time can it be said, that ever armies
were raised more properly to fight against,
and to make war with the Saints, as
being Saints, then these late Armies raised
by him, and by authority from him have
been. Many combustions have been in the
World, and many wars in this and severall
other Kingdoms; but was ever the quarrell
so exactly against the Saints, and saintship in any
War as in this? For it was against Saints in
a more especiall manner that this horn made
War, and they under the notions of Puritans,
Roundheads, and Sectaries: So that
where ever his Armies came, their greatest
hatred and malice was against such as they
so termed. And in Ireland, all such as had
but the name of Protestants, were most cruelly
and barbarously dealt withall, that they
might be sure to cut off all Puritans, as the
most reall Saints were then termed: Thus
he made War with the Saints.

“And I beheld, and the same Horne made
war with the Saints, and prevailed
against them untill, &c.”

As it is true of him that he made war with the B7v 14
the Saints; so it is true also that he prevailed
against them for a time: so that many
faithfull Saints, whose memories are still
precious among those that remaine, lost their
lives in that War, and he continued for a
time, mightily prevailing against them, both
in Ireland, and also in England, and had once
got such strength, both in Garrisons, and in
the Field, when Oxford, Bristol, Exeter, and
almost all considerable places in this Kingdome,
both West, and North were in his
hand: I say, he had then got such strength,
as it was neere to be, (if it were not) put to
the vote in Parliament, whether all should
be delivered to his mercy or not; (whereby
it appeares that he had prevailed far.) Thus
in all the particulars already mentioned, was
this Prophesie fulfilled in him. But to
proceed.

“And they shall be given into his hand, untill
a time, and times, and the dividing of
time.”

This expression “of a time, and times, and
the dividing of time,”
is in it selfe a riddle
hard to be understood; but it is the more
easie to unfold, because it is againe used in
the New Testament, in another Prophesie
of the same ten Horned Beast, that is here spoken B8r 15
spoken of in this Chapter: for there this
expression, which is here in Daniel so hard to
be understood, is more plainely explained.
It is in the twelfth Chapter of the Revelation,
at the fourteenth verse, where it is said,
“That the woman fled into the Wilderness from
the persecution of the Dragon, where she was
nourished for a time, times, and halfe a time”
;
and in the sixth verse of that Chapter where
there is another mention of the womans
flying into the Wilderness, where she was
to be fed or nourished; it is said to be for
“a thousand two hundred, and sixty daies.” Now
what the meaning of these two expressions,
which are used to express one and the same
time, is, doth more clearely appeare in the
11 and 13 Chapters of that Prophesie. In
the 11 Chapter at the 13 verse, it is said, “That
the holy City,”
(that is the Church and people
of God;) should be trodden under foot of
the Gentiles, forty and two months”
; and at
the 3 verse, that “the witnesses should prophecy
in sackcloath, a thousand two hundred and
and sixty daies”
; which is one and the same
period of time with that in the 12 Chapter:
for a thousand two hundred and sixty daies,
accounting 30 dayes to a moneth, is just 42
Moneths, and fourty two Moneths, accountinging B8v 1916
twelve months to the yeare, is three
years and a halfe, so that these three,

  • 1 A time, times, and half a time.
  • 2 Forty two Moneths.
  • 3 A thousand two hundred and sixty
    daies

These three are but various expressions
of one and the same thing.

Now in the 13 Chapter, at the 5 verse,
there is againe mention made of this one
thousand two hundred and sixty daies, for
there it is said, that the beast that had ten
Hornes, that was to persecute the Saints,
was to continue “a thousand two hundred and
sixty daies,”
that is, so long as in the 11, and
12 Chapters the Church was said to be given
up to the Gentiles, and to be persecuted
and trodden under foot. Now by this
one thousand two hundred and sixty daies, is
to be understood so many yeares, Ezek. 4.
5 6
Dan.12.
11, 12.

as it is usuall in the Prophets to
put a day for a yeare. So that when
the one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeares, in which the
Romish beast, (of whom that
Prophesie speakes) was to continue prevailing
against the Saints, did expire, then the “One thousand two hundred and sixty
yeares.”
Or, Forty C1r 17 “Fourty two moneths,” or “Time, times, and half a time”:
(For so it is variously exprest) “of the
Saints suffering persecution,”
did expire
also.

So that this then is the meaning of this
expression in Daniel; “And they shall be given
into his hand, untill a time, and times, and
the dividing of times.”

That is, they shall be given into his hand, untill
the end of the one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeers, in which the Romish Beast
was to be permitted to persecute the Church
or Saints of God, and to overcome them, and
tread them under foot.

So that, so long, this horne was to go on
speaking great words against the most High,
and wearying out the Saints; and indeavouring
to change times and lawes, and to have
them given into his hand, even untill that
time was to be expired.

Now that this one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeers, in which the Romish
Beast was to be permitted to persecute the
Church, and to tread it under foot, is very
neer come to a period: Is As Brightman, and
Cotton, and Archer,
and others.

the concurent judgement
of all the learned, and godlyC ly C1v 18
men that have written, and publisht any
thing of it: and also the judgement of many
private, faithfull, and precious Christians
in these times.

But that it is not onely very near, but is already
See the Resurrection
the witnesses
,
published in 16481648
.
fully expired, I have
already in another Treatise,
upon another subject, cleerly
declared: there laying down my grounds
for it, to which I shall now only adde this
ground, which this Scripture in hand presents,
which is this.

The Holy Ghost here declares, that this
horn should continue, untill a time, times,
and the dividing of time; so that when this
Kings power of wearing out the Saints, and
changing times, and lawes, and making war
against the Saints is taken away: then is the
time, times, and half a time, or fourty two
moneths, or one thousand two hundred and
sixty daies come to a period. For he was to
continue untill then.

But this Kings power to wear out the
Saints, and to change lawes, and times, and
to make war against the Saints is taken away.
Therefore the time, times, and dividing
of time, or one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeeres is come to a period.

Object. C2r 19

Object. But it may bee objected, that
though this Kings power be taken away;
yet the Pope, the Beast, remains, and the rest
of the horns remain; how then is the one
thousand two hundred and sixty yeeres of
the continuance of the Beast expired?

I answer, that this period of time is expired,
is clear from the former ground; For
the Holy Ghost speaketh expstesly, that this
horn should continue “untill a time, times, and
the dividing of time”
: which is to bee understood
(as is evident in the Revelation) of
that period of time, of one thousand two
hundred and sixty yeeres there mentioned:
and in as much as it is said thuat the horne
must continue untill then; The meaning
must needs be untill that time is expired, otherwise
there can bee no sense in it: For
if the horn should continue but untill one
thousand two hundred and twenty, or one
thousand two hundred and thirty, or any other
term of time, that comes short of this
one thousand two hundred and sixty yeeres;
then it could not be said to continue, and to
have power given into his hand, to changechange
lawes and make War, &c. Untill a time,
times, and the dividing of time, or one thousand
two hundred and sixty yeeres, for one C2 thou- C2v 20
thousand two hundred and twenty, or thirty,
is not one thousand two hundred and sixty.

But since it is said that the horn should
have power to change lawes, and make
War, &c. uuntill one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeeres, or a time, times, and the dividing
of time; it must necessarily follow,
that when that power was taken from the
horn, that then the one thousand two hundred
and sixty yeers, or time, times, and dividing
of times, was come to an end.

But more particularly, to answer the objection:
Whereas it was objected that the
Beast, and some of his hornes do still remain
undestroyed, and therefore it is questioned
how the one thousand two hundred and sixty
yeeres can be to bee said to come to a period?

I answer that it may very well bee, that
the one thousand two hundred and sixty
yeeres are expired, though the Beast and
some of his hornes do yet remain; For the
Holy Ghost saies not that the continuance
of the Beast should bee but fourty two
moneths, or one thousand two hundred and
sixty yeeres; but saies this, that the Beast
should no longer make War against the Saints, C3r 21
Saints, so as to overcome them, and should
no longer tread the holy City under foot; for
so the Text runs, Rev. 11. 2. “And the holy
City shall they tread under foot fourty and
two moneths”
; and Rev. 13. 5. Where (speaking
of the Beast) the Holy Ghost saies thus
of him: “And there was given to him a mouth
speaking great things, and blasphemies, and
power was given to him to make war fourty
and two moneths, even to make war with the
Saints, and to overcome them,”
ver. 7.

So that the fourty and two moneths are
then expired, when the holy City can be no
no longer said to be trodden under foot; and
when the Beast doth no longer overcome,
in his making War with the Saints; but
they overcome him, as hee hath overcome
them.

And now if it do appear that it is already
so come to passe, that God hath lifted up the
heads of his people, and that they are no longer
And this no man can
or durst deny, but the
man that wilfully
shuts his eyes against
the truth of it.
trodden under-foot,
nor overcome by the Beast
nor his adherents, but that
they overcome the Beast,
in all those that defend his quarrell. Then
certainly
, these fourty and two
moneths are already expired, although the C3 Beast C3v 22
Beast and some of the hornes are not yet fully
overcome.

But now it doth appeare, and is evident
to the eyes of all the Christians all the world
over, who have had their eyes upon the late
wonderfull and strange passages of providence
in England, that God hath lifted up
the heads of his Saints, and his Church,
those whom the beast, and his adherents the
Popish, and prophane party in England,
Scotland, and Ireland most opposed, and hated,
even such as were most faithfull, and
most circumspect in their way, and who
most desired to worship God in his Ordinances
in their purity, such as they tearmed
Roundheads, Puritans, Independents, Presbyterians,
Anabaptists, Sectaries, Precisians,
and what not? These the Pope made
war against, and thought to have alwaies
trodden under foot; But God hath owned
them, and heard their prayers, and delivered
them from the persecution of the Beast,
and given to them power to overcome and
bring down the Beast, so that for this sixe
yeares time, they have never been overcome
in any battle, but ever since, they have
wonderfully overcome the beast, and his adherents,
both in England, Scotland, and Ireland,land, C4r 23
to the admiration of all that heare of it:
And this they have done, whither their outward
strength were little or much, and ever
since have they enjoyed freedome, and liberty
to worship God, according to the rules
of the Gospell without opposition, or molestation,
whereby it is (I say) evident, that
that limited time, even that forty two
moneths of the Saints suffereing persecution,
and being trodden under foot is expired;
although the beast and some of the other
Hornes do yet remaine; so that henceforth
the Saints shall be overcommers, untill great
Babylon be ruined. So much for answer to
that Objection, and for the Exposition of
the 24 and 25 verses.

Only here remember, that the only Argument
which we have in this place to prove
that the 1260 yeares of the Saints suffering
persecution under the beast (which is also
exprest by a time, times, and dividing of
time) is now expired, is this: Because the
little Horne is destroyed, which the Spirit of
God in this Prophesie said should continue
untill then. And that now we see it made
good that the Saints bow down their backs
to the beast no longer, but are enlarged, and
delivered, and begin to reward her as she C4 hath C4v 24
hath done unto them. I proceed.

Verse 26. “But the Judgement sahll sit, and they shall
take away his Dominion, to consume, and
to destroy itunto the end.”

There being in the preceding verses a declaration
of the horrible things which this
Horne should do against the Saints, as to
change Times and Laws, and to weare out
the Saints, and to make war against them:
In this verse we have a comforting and refreshing
word for those wearied, and persecuted
ones, that were so greatly afflicted,
and that is brought in with this word, “But,”
a word usuall in all cases, as when any thing
is bad, or sad, its usually declared to be so
and so, “But”, we use to say, this or that mitigates
it, or this or that is a comfort against
it: So here, God having appointed a time
for his people to suffer in, tels them, that so
and so it shall be, that this little Horne shall
make war against them, &c. But for their
comfort against that affliction, he tels them
that “the judgement shall sit, and shall take
away his Dominion, to consume and to destroy
it unto the end.”

That C5r 25

That which is first to be done in the expositions
of this verse, is to explaine what is
meant by the sitting of the judgement, which
both with plainenesse and brevity I shall endeavour
to do.

To this end, I shall compare all the passages
in this Chapter which have relation to it,
together with this verse: lest being not
compared with each other they be mistaken.

The first is in the 9. 10, 11. verses of this
Chapter, where Daniel speaking briefly of
this Vision, and the manner how he saw it;
before the more cleare interpretation was
given to him, he speakes of this Judgement
thus: “That the Ancient of daies came, whose
garment was white as snow, &c. and the judgment
was set”
; And further he saies, that the
Judgement being set, that then “because of
the voice of the great words which the Horne
spake the beast was slaine, and his body destroyed,
&c.”

Againe, in the 21, 22. verses, where Daniel
desires further to know the meaning of
what he saw before, he speakes thus of it.
“I beheld, and the same Horne made war with
the Saints, and prevailed against them untill
the Ancient of daies came, and judgement was C5v 26
was given unto the Saints of the most High,
and the time came that the Saints possessed the
Kingdome.”

And in the 26 verse after it had been said
that the Horne should do so and so, as in the
two former verses, its here said, that “the
judgement should sit, and should take away his
Dominion, to consume, and to destroy it unto
the end.”

Now these passages being compared together,
the result of them all will be clearely
thus.

First, That because this little Horne
should speake great words against the most
High, and think to change Times, and Laws,
and weare out the Saints of the most High,
and make war against them, that therefore
the most high should appeare for to own
and deliver his own people.

And secondly, that a certaine number of
Saints should be convened together, and
have a spirit of Judgement by the most High
given unto them, and power and authority
whereby they should take away the Dominion
of this Horne, to consume, and to destroy
it unto the end.

This in briefe is the sense of these verses,
which I shall more fully illustrate thus.

I C6r 27

I say first that because this little horne
should speake great words, &c. That therefore
the most high should appear for to own,
and deliver his own people. Now by this
appearing of the most high is meant, First his appearing in Secondly his appearing
for
his people.

First I say that by the appearing, or comming
of the most High, spoken of in this
Chapter, is meant his appearing in, and among
his people, and this shall by and by be
made evident: for though at the first view
of the 9, 10, 11. verses, it might seem to bee
a description of that visible, and glorious appearance
of the most high at the great day of
Judgement: For thus it runs, “I beheld till
the Thrones were cast down, and the Ancient
of daies did set, whose garment was white
as snow, and the fair of his head like the pure
wool, his Throne like the fiery flame, and his
wheels as burning fire, a fiery stream issued
and came forth from before him, thousand
thousands ministred unto him, and then thousand
times ten thousand stood before him: the
Judgement was set, and the bookes were opened.ned. C6v 28
I beheld then because of the voice of the
great words which the horne spake; I beheld
even till the Beast was slain, and his body destroyed,
and given to the burning flame: as
concerning the rest of the Beasts, they had
their Dominion taken away, yet their lives
were prolonged for a season, and time.”
I say
though at the first view of these words, they
seem to be a description of the last and great
day of Judgement, mentioned Rev. 20. 11,
12, 13, 14, 15.
Yet in observing the last of
these verses, (viz. ver. 12) it will cleerly
appear, that this is not, nor cannot bee the
meaning of the Spirit of God in this place,
for there it is said, that though by this appearance
of God, the Beast or little Horne was
slain, and his body destroyed, because of the
voice of the great words which the little
Horne spake; that yet, “the rest of the Beasts”
(of the hornes) “had their lives prolonged
for a little season”
: Which could not have
been, if that had been the generall day of
Judgement; and this is undeniable.

But now that this glorious appearance of
the most High, (in garments as white as
snow, and hair of his head as pure That is in pure and
unspotted righteousness.
Wool,
upon a Throne like the
fiery flame, and wheeles as C7r 29
as burning fire, with a That is impartiall
and zealous
justice.
fiery
stream issuing before him, and
thousand thousands ministring
unto him, &c.) is his appearing in and among
his Saints, is very clear, by observing
these passages; ver. 10. its said, “the Judgement
was set, and the Books were opened”
; and
ver. 11. that “the Beast because of the voice
of his great words,”
was adjudged to be slain,
and was slaine. Now the 22 verse explaines
the meaning of the judgement here
spoken of; and saies expresly, that “Judgement
was given to the Saints of the most high”
:
So that this appearing of the most high, is
his appearing in, and among his people; in
giving a spirit of judgement, and righteousnesse
unto them, whereby they shall act so
purely, and righteously, and withall so justly,
and impartially; as that those actions of
theirs in themselves, shall bee as white as
snow, as pure wooll; and withall to the
enemies of Christ, as fiery flames, and burning
fire. This is the appearance of God in
his people; so that when the judgement
was set, and the books were opened, that
is, all the horrid cruelties, and cruell cursed
practises of the Beast were declared; that
then, not unjustly or without just cause, but (saies C7v 30
(saies the Spirit of God) “because of the voice
of the great words which the horne spake, the
Beast was slaine, and his body destroyed.”
Thus
God appeares in his Saints, “Judgement was
given to the Saints of the most high, and the
Judgement shall sit, and they”
(that is, a company
of Saints) “they shall take away his Dominion,
to consume and destroy it unto the end.”

So that, God giving judgement to his saints,
he brings to passe the great designes he hath
in the world by them, as his instruments: so
that he does it, and they do it; and they must
doe it, and are alwaies ready, and shall be so:
For he hath thousand thousands ministring
unto him; and ten thousand times ten thousand
standing before him, ready to execute
his will, and do his pleasure.

But secondly, as by this appearance of
God is to be understood his appearance in
his people; so it is also to be understood of
his appearing for his people, viz. in manifesting,
evidently manifesting his power,
and wisdome, and faithfulnesse, in delivering
of them from the tyranny, fury, and cruelty
of their oppressors, and owning of them for
his own people: So that though the Beast
seemed to be, and was very potent, and very
great, and spake great words, and thought not C8r 31
not onely to wear out, but utterly to root out
the Saints, in his making War against them:
Yet God so appears for their help, and their
deliverance, as he gives them to overcome
him, and his complices, that thought to overcome
them: And in this worke hee
hath “thousand thousands ministring unto
him, and ten thousand times ten thousand
standing before him”
: hee hath all his Saints,
all men else, and all his holy Angels at his
beck, to execute his will, and doe his pleasure;
And as once the stars in their courses
fought against Sisera; so God in doing this
great work for his Saints deliverance, and
making way for the setting up of the Kingdom
of his beloved Sonne, hath multitudes,
multitudes, both of Celestiall, and terrestiall
creatures to attend him. And certainly such
great things could never have been done, if
the Ancient of daies had not most gloriously,
and wonderfully apppeared, for the help and
support of his people. How could they
which are so few in number, and in the eies
of the world despised, and despicable creatures,
have carried on that work so effectually,
as to have cut off the late King;
though it was verily beleeved, and it is very
probable, there was at that very time, twentyty C8v 32
to one in this Nation of England, that
were against it; had not the Lord assisted
them with thousands of Angels, and evidently
manifested himselfe to bee with
them?

Thus it is evident, that by the appearing
of the Ancient of daies, mentioned in this
Chapter, is meant his appearing in his people,
in that spirit of judgement, and justice
that he gives unto them; and his appearing
for his people, to own and defend, and deliver
them; and to lay their enemies in the
dust, while hee raises them up, and makes
them sit in high places.

Secondly, whereas I said that this position
was likewise the sense of this verse, together
with those other verses which I compared
with it; viz. That a certain number
of Saints should be convened together, and
have a spirit of judgement given unto them
by the most High; together with power
and authority, whereby they should take away
the dominion of the little horn, to consume
and to destroy it unto the end.

I shall illustrate that, thus:

In the 10 verse its said, that “thousands
thousands ministred unto the Ancient of
daies, and ten thousand times ten thousand stood D1r 33
stood before him, the judgement was set, and
the bookes were opened: and because of the
voice of the great words which the Horn spake
the Beast was slaine.”
Here it is evident that
the beast or horne was slaine by some that
did sit in judgement, before whom the books
of his evill deeds were opened, because of
which his evill deeds and sayings, he was
adjudged to be slaine. And at the 22 verse
it is plainly declared who they were that
did sit in judgement: That they were not
Angels, but Saints; the Saints of the most
High: for there its said, that the horne made
war with the Saints, and prevailed against
them “untill the Ancient of daies came, and
judgement was given to the Saints of the most
high,”
and then was his power taken off, for
then “the time came that the Saints possessed
the Kingdome.”
And that those Saints that
have judgement given to them, and that are
said to sit in judgement; that they are
the instruments by whom the beast was to
be judged, and slaine, is further cleare in this
26 verse, where (it having been declared in
the former verse, how evilly the horne
should deale with the Saints) its said, “But
the judgement shall sit, and They shall take
away his Dominion, to, consume, and to destroy
it unto the end.”

D Thus D1v 34

Thus it is also evidently the sense of these
verses compared together, that by the judgment
sitting is meant, a certaine number of
Saints, that by the wisdome, providence, and
power of the most High, were convened together,
and invested with power and authority,
and a Spirit of Judgement for this end,
to judge this little Horne, and do justice upon
him, and to take away his Dominion, to
consume, and to destroy it unto the end.

And this need not seem strange, that the
Saints should thus sit in judgement, and do
such things as these, for “do ye not know,” saies
the Apostle, 1 Cor. 6. 2. “that the Saints shall
judge the World?”
And (verse 3.) “Know ye not”
(saies he) “that we shall judge Angels?” This
being a known truth, it is no wonder among
those that know truth, that God should put
such power and authority, and such a spirit of
judgement upon Saints, whereby they
should be enabled to do these things.

And to this purpose that passage of the
Psalmist is also very considerable, Psa. 149.
4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
“The Lord taketh pleasure in his
people, he will beautifie the meek with salvation.
Let the Saints be joyfull in glory, let
them sing aloud upon their beds: Let the high
praises of God be in their mouths, and a two- edged D2r 35
edged sword in their hands, to execute vengeance
upon the heathen, and punishment upon
the people, to bind their Kings with chaines,
and their Nobles with setters of Iron, to execute
upon them the judgement written, this
honour have all his Saints; praise yee the
Lord.”

Now I say, since it is certaine that the
Saints shall one day judge not only the
world, but the wicked Angels, the Devils
also, and it being most certain that this
Prophesie of the Psalmist, wherein he speaks
of a time when God will beautifie the meek
of the earth with salvation, and put his high
praises in their mouths, and a two edged
sword into their hands to execute vengeance
upon the heathen, and punishment upon the
people, to bind their Kings and Nobles in
Chaines and Fetters of iron, and to execute
upon them the judgement written: Marke
it, “the judgement written”; these things being
so, it is no wonder that this “written judgement”
should be thus executed upon this
horne or King.

Thus it is cleare that a company of Saints
convened together by the wise providence
of the most high, and invested with power
and authority, and a spirit of judgement, D2 were D2v 36
to do this work upon the horne. And what
particularly they are, is by providence now
made very conspicuous, (the things that are
here spoken of, being now in a great measure
accomplished: for all prophesies are best
understood in the fulfilling of them,) Namely,
that they are those precious and gracious
ones, that by the wise and gracious disposall
of the most high have been called to sit in
Parliament, and the high Court of Justice
which they erected, who have had a spirit
of wisdome, of judgement, and faithfulnesse
put upon them, whereby they have acted
faithfully and zealously for the glory of God,
and the peace and welfare of all their brethren.
I say, it is the Parliament, and those
imployed by their Authority, who have hazarded
all that was deare unto them, rather
than to suffer the free people of this Kingdome,
and amongst them the Saints and people
of God, to be betrayed or given up to
the power of those that would have ruled
tyranically and cruelly over them.

But here let me not be understood, as
though I hereby asserted, that every individuall
person, that hath been, or is in Parlia
ment, is a Saint, because I say, that by the
judgement sitting, here spoken of, it meant a com- D3r 37
company of Saints, that by the wisdome and
goodnesse of the most high were convened
together, and have a spirit of judgement
given to them: and that the Parliament are
this company of Saints, who have had this
spirit of Judgement, and have acted faithfully,
&c. But this I affirme, that those
Saints that have been, and are in Parliament,
and have been, and are imployed in counsels,
and otherwise by their Authority, are
the judgement here spoken of. Now that
there have been, and are among these a
choice and precious company of Gods deare
Saints, there is none that truly knowes what
it is to be a Saint, will or can deny. And
these are they that chiefly and principally
have carried on these great and glorious designes
that have been so acceptable to God
and to his Saints, (though it may be they
have been many times, if not alwaies, lesse
in number than those others that have been
among them, that have not been reall Saints)
and it is they to whom God hath afforded
his presence in their counsels and undertakings,
and they whom God hath blessed, and
whom none can curse, and the rest have fared
the better for their sakes, they sitting in
Parliament held all together from being brokenD3 ken D3v 38
in peeces, even from the beginning of
their sitting: and admirable is that goodness
and wisdome of God, that knew what his
own determinations concerning them were,
that so brought it to passe, as to cause the late
King, (so contrary to his own intentions, and
his own ends and purposes) to passe an act
for the continuation of this Parliament; so
as though he would, yet he had not that power
which once he had to dissolve this Parliament
as he had done all others at his own
pleasure. But this Parliament must not, this
Parliament could not possibly be dissolved
by him: for God had reserved this Parliament
for further worke.

Now it was not possible for the adverse
party by all theit struglings to dissolve it, for
the judgement must sit.

“But the judgement shall sit, and they shall
take away his Dominion, to consume, and
to destroy it unto the end.”

In these words, (having seen what is
meant by the Judgement) here is now to be
declared what the work was which they
had to do, and the manner in which it was
to be done,

The worke which they had to do is exprest
in these words: “And they shall take away D4r 39
away his Dominion.”
And the manner of doing
it, in these words: “To consume, and to
destroy it unto the end.”

Their work then was to take away the
Dominion of that little Horne that spake
great words against the most high, and made
war against the Saints: that whereas he
had had Dominion, and great power, and
authority, whereby he persecuted, and grieved,
and afflicted the Saints, and endeavoured
to weare them out. This Judgement
being set, this Parliament being assembled,
they were to take away his Dominion, even
his authority, and power of ruling, and governing
according to his own will: yea all
his strength of Armes, and Ammunition:
of Forts, and Castles, and places of strength,
his Crown, Throne, and seat of Honour;
all and whatsoever appertaines to his Dominion:
Thats the worke they were to
do.

Now the manner in which they were to
doe it, was “to consume and to destroy it unto
the end.”
I say to consume it, it was not to
be done by them in a short time, not at an
instant; but they were to bee long in doing
of it, and to doe it by degrees; for so the
word consume implyeth: for when a thing D4 is D4v 40
is said to consume, that thing is wasted away
by degrees, and in continuance of time
it comes to nothing: So this dominion, and
greatnesse, and power, and authority, and
strength, which this horn had, was to consume
away by little and little, and in the end
wholly to be destroyed. And thus exactly it
came to passe.

When the Parliament first began to oppose
the late King, he had great power, and
strength, and authority, whereby hee made
war, and prevailed for a while; but at last
by degrees, and as it were insensibly, they
prevail’d against him, and began to take away
his strength, and power and greatnesse
from him: so that by degrees, he lost City
after City, and Towne after Towne, and
County after County, untill he came to have
dominion over none at all; but his dominion
was wholly taken away, and consumed
and destroyed unto the end. And as here
his dominion was said to be consumed, and
destroyed: so in the 11 verse the beast, or
the horne, or King himselfe, was said to be
slaine, and his body destroyed: so it came
to passe that his blood was also justly required
at his hands, having caused so much innocent
blood to bee shed, both of old men, young D5r 41
young men and babes in France, England,
Scotland, and Ireland. God suffered not
such a man to die in his bed, but as he was
a man of blood, so gave hee him blood to
drink. For as the Parliament, God having
given him up into their hands, took away his
dominion; so they also did justice upon his
person; and executed upon him The
Judgement Written
. For
so it was written, verse 11; that he should be
slain, and his body destroyed and given to the
burning flame of justice.

And thus this part of this prophecie being
thus opened and explained: It is made
evident that the late King of these three Nations,
that is by some called the None-such
Charles, for his desperate impiety and hypocrisie,
was long ago Prophesied of as well as
(he that was by him stiled) his holy Father
the Pope; to whom hee was as firm a son,
as any King ever was; though he played the
greatest hypocrite in professing the contrary,
as ever any King did.

I say it is evident, that the late King was
long ago prophesied of, as well as the Pope;
and that as the Pope was fore-prophesied
of, as being the beast that should be desperately
wicked and maliciously cruell against the D5v 42
the Saints. So is this King fore prophesied
of, as being of the ten homes of the beast,
and more stout then his fellows: as exceeding
them for wretched wicked dealing
with the Saints and cruelty to them.

Whereby the proceedings of the Parliament
with and against him, is cleared from
having the least stain or spot of injustice or
unrighteousnesse in it, which some would fasten
upon them.

For it is here evident, that as the afflicted
condition of the Church for twelve hundred
yeeres and more under the Pope, was long
ago prophesied of; so this Parliament which
were to be the instruments of the Churches
deliverance in their measure, were also long
ago prophesied of: In which prophesie, it
was so long ago declared, that to them judgment
should be given, and that they should
do justice upon that wicked King; take away
his Dominion, and destroy him unto
the end: And what the issue of all this will
be, is discovered in the following verse; but
of that in its place.

But now it may bee some may slight this
interpretation, saying that it is not to be regarded;
seeing severall have given severall
Interpretations of Scriptures, and most of them D6r 43
them have been besides the truth; and so
may this will they say,

But to those, I have but this to say; first,
that upon this account they may continually
sleight all that shall bee said in opening the
Scriptures, though it be never so consonant
unto the Truth and minde of the Spirit of
God, the Author of the Scriptures: And so
God (with such sleight spirits) will not have
the glory of his pre-decreeing of the things
he will have to come to passe many hundred
yeeres after; and of his exact bringing
things to passe according to the counsels of
his own will so many hundred yeeres before
resolved upon.

And secondly, they in so doing, doe give
lesse honour to God then the heathens did
to their Devilish Oracles; which would
pretend to foreshew things to come: and
lesse then they doe to Astronomers, who
from the stars do pretend to foretell things:
whereas God oftentimes frustrateth the tokens
of those lyars, and maketh those diviners
mad, ( Isa. 44. 25.) and they cannot foreshew
any thing infallibly; (though possibly
from the stars, they may give some uncertain
hints of things) but it is that which
is proper to God alone, infallibly to fore-tell things D6v 44
things to come. (As appeares, Isa, 48. 3, 4,
5.
and Isa, 46. 9, 10.) and which hee doth
from time to time do by his servants the
Prophets; and therefore what they have
declared from God, hath been done for our
observation; Rom. 15. 4 Psa. 107. 43. Deut.
29. 29.
Wherein we may see that what God
hath done from age to age; hath all along
bin the fulfilling of his word, of which we
are to give him the glory.

And thirdly, though some Interpreters
have failed of truth, which it may bee hath
been the hardening of the hearts of some:
yet this will not be a sufficient discharge for
any from their duty of observing these
things; that when the truth appeares, God
may have the glory.

But fourthly, it is true things have often
been uncertainely hit at by some men, before
they came to passe; but these things are
come to passe, and all prophecies are best
understood, when they are fulfilled, or neer
to be fulfilled: not but that oftentimes prophecies
have been cleerely understood, long
beforehand by many precious Saints.

But fifthly, this is certaine, that when the
very minde of God in Prophecies is unerringly
laid open, being cleerly and convincinglycingly D7r 45
discovered to his Saints and servants,
that desire to pry into, and observe these
things according to their dutie; that even
then some will not receive them: neither
the wise of the world, nor the wicked of
the world; as appeares, Mat. 11 25. and
Dan. 12. 10. But though the worldly-wise
do not, yet they that have wisdome from above,
shall have these things revealed to
them, and shall understand them, as appeares
in the same Scriptures; for when truth is
revealed, the children of truth, having one
and the same spirit, shall see it with the same
eye, and rejoyce with the same joy, in seeing
of it; “My Sheepe know my voice.” John
10. 27.
They know that it is my voice, and
not anothers voice: and indeed it is chiefly
for their sakes, who know his voice, who
have his spirit, that all truths are revealed.

But all these are generall answers, but for
this particular Interpretation, I have
onely this to say.

That I do not pretend to be any more exempted
from uncertainty, then any other
of the deare servants of God have been, to
whom God hath very often revealed his
secrets; though sometimes, some things of their D7v 46
owne suppositions have slipt from them:
and therefore I shall not presse any to believe
these things, because I have said them, unlesse
they do therein hear the voice of Christ
and his spirit setting them home upon them.
For this I know, that truth is powerfull enough
to to prevaile with Saints; and for
the truth of these things of which I have
spoken, or of whatever is laid down in the
following discourse, I leave them to the
great God, who hath put me upon the publishing
of them, to make them prevalent
with as many as hee intends good unto by
them.

And further, this I must professe, that it
hath not been a few daies only, or since the
last Kings death onely, that I have thus been
made to understand this Scripture; But I
thus understood it, for above nine yeeres ago;
and to this the Lord is witnesse, and severall
godly people, whom I have made acquainted
with it, at severall times: so that when
the late King was in his height, I declared
my confidence, that the Parliament should
prevaile over him, and at last destroy him.
But seeing as I have said, that all Prophesies
are best understood in the fulfilling of
them; the truth of these things will thereforefore D8r 47
doubtlesse now be the more prevailing
with Saints.

But one word more, and that is this;
That though it is true, that usually Saints
know the voice of Christ, and are able to
say certainly, this is (or this is not) the
voice of Christ. I say, though it be thus usually
with them, yet there are some cases, in,
which they are uncertaine; and some truths
about which they can neither say, that it is
truth, or that it is not truth. And now
if this be the case of any, about these things
I have spoken of; I have onely this to say to
them, that though they cannot receive
them presently, yet let them beware how
they sleight them: and this I must tell them,
that if the Lord had not all along hitherto,
in the workes of his Providence (which in
many particulars were very observable) evidenced
the truth hereof; and if hee doe not
demonstrate it more and more, it might bee
the more tollerable for them thus to sleight
it: but considering how wonderfully from
day to day, this is cleared, and will be cleared.
Oh let them beware, how they wilfully
shut their eyes against the light of it, for any
private interest whatsoever; lest in shutting
their eyes against light, they be shut up in D8v 48
in Babylonian darknesse, and consequently,
partake with Babylon, both in her sins and in
her plagues.

And now I should here proceed to the
27 verse, but because it treateth of the glorious
Kingdom which Jesus Christ shall have
in the world; and that being a subject,
which my spirit it drawn out to treat more
largely and amply of it, then any yet have
done, I shall therefore handle it in an intire
book by it selfe, closing up this discourse,
with those expressions of the Psalmist, Psal.
92. 5, 6, 7.
“O Lord how great are thy workes!
thy thoughts are very deep. A brutish man
knoweth not, neither doth a foole understand
this; when the wicked spring as the grasse,
and when all the workers of iniquity doe flourish:
It is that they may be destroyed for ever;
but thou Lord art most high for evermore.”

A E1r

A new
And More Exact Mappe

or,
Description
of

New Jerusalems Glory when Jesus
Christ
and his Saints with him shall reign on
earth a Thousand yeares, and possess all Kingdoms.

Wherein
Is discovered the glorious estate into which
the Church shall be then put both in respect of
externall and internall glory, and the time when.

And also,
What hath been done these eight yeares last
past, and what is now a doing, and what shall be
done within a few years now following in
order to this great work.

Wherein also
That great Question, whether it be lawfull
for Saints to make use of the materiall Sword in the
ruining of the enemies of Christ, and whether
it be the mind of Christ to have it so, is at large debated
and resolved in the Affirmative from
clear Scriptures, and all others answered.

By M. Cary a servant of Jesus Christ.

Rev. 22 6, 7. “And he said unto me; These sayings are faithfull and true,
and the Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his Angell to
shew unto his Servants the thing which must shortly be
done. Behold, I come quickly.”

London,
Printed by W. H. and are to be sold at the sign of the
Black-spread-Eagle at the West end of Pauls. 16511651.

E1v
E2r 51

A description of new Jerusalems
Glory, when Jesus
Christ
and his Saints with him
shall reign on earth a thousand
yearesa and possesse all
Kingdoms.

Dan. 7. 27. “And the Kingdom, and Dominion, and the greatness of
the Kingdom under the whole heaven, shall be given
unto the people of the Saints of the most high; whose
Kingdom is an everlasting Kingdom, and all Dominions
shall serve and obey him.”

The Spirit of God in the former
verses, having declared the rise,
actions, and end of the little
Horne that was to afflict the
Saints: and shewing how that at last the
Saints should overcome him, Saies expresly,E2 ly, E2v 52
“They shall take away his Dominion, to consume,
and to destroy it unto the end”
; and then
sais in this verse, that “the Kingdome, and
Dominion, and the greatness of the Kingdom
under the whole heaven shall be given to the
people of the Saints of the most high, &c.”

The assertion which is laid down in these
words is plaine and cleare, and needs no explanation
at all, which is this.

That not only this Kingdom of England,
and some few others, but all the Kingdomes
and Dominions in the whole
world, shall in a more peculiar and more
eminent manner than yet they have been,
be subjected to the Lord Jesus Christ, and
by him given to his Saints to possess.

This same truth likewise is positively asserted
in the 13, 14, 18, 21, and 22 verses of this
Chapter; in the 13 and 14 verses, where the
Vision it self, of which these verses are an interpretation,
is declared; there it is thus exprest,
“I saw in the night vision and behold
one like the Son of man came with the clouds
of heaven, and came to the Ancient of daies:
and they brought him neere before him, and
there was given him Dominion, and glory, and
a Kingdom, that all People, Nations, and Languages
should serve him; his Dominion is an ever- E3r 53
everlasting Dominion, which shall not pass
away, and his Kingdome that which shall not
be destroyed.”

So that this is clearly asserted here also,
that the Dominion, not only of some, but of
all people, Nations, and Languages should
be given to the Lord Jesus Christ, who is
here exprest by this appellation, “The Son of
man,”
by which he is often exprest in the
New Testament: and this is to be done after
the Beast is destroyed, as is here exprest.

And what is in these verses said to be given
to the Lord Jesus Christ is in the 18, 20,
21, and 27, verses, said to be given to his
Saints: for in the 18 verse it is said, that
“the Saints of the most high should take the
Kingdome, and possesse the Kingdome for
ever, even for ever and ever”
; and in the 21,
22, verses, that the Horne prevailed against
the Saints, “untill the Ancient of daies came,
and Judgement was given to the Saints of the
most high, and”
(the severall beasts having had
the Kingdomes of the world for their appointed
times) “the time” (then) “came, that the
Saints possessed the Kingdome,”
and in this 27
ver. that “the Kingdom, and Dominion, and the
greatnesse of the Kingdome under the whole E3 hea- E3v 54
heaven should be given unto the people of the
Saints of the most High.”

Thus what was in the 18 verse said to be
given to the Lord Jesus, there called “the
Son of man,”
is in these severall verses said
to be given to his Saints. The truth is, that
which is given to the head, is given to the
members, that which is given to the Husband,
the wife must partake of: for there is
nothing that he possesses, which she hath not
a right unto. And the Saints of Christ are
the members of Christ, they are the Lambs
wife: and having given himselfe unto them,
he will not with-hold anything that is his
from them; but when all the Kingdomes,
and Dominions under the whole heaven are
given to him, they shall possesse them with
him.

Thus is this assertion, that is laid downe
in this verse, confirmed in several other passages
in this very Chapter, namely,

That all Kingdomes, all the Nations,
and Languages, and People under the
whole heaven, shall be in a more peculiar,
and a more eminent manner than yet they
have been, be subjected to the Lord Jesus,
and by him be given to his Saints to
possesse.

And E4r 55

And as it is cleare here, so there are very
many other Scriptures wherein it is as clearly
asserted, severall of which Scriptures
I shall here produce, that out of the
mouth of many witnesses it may be confirmed
against all contradictions, which I shall
the rather do, because this Doctrine is so
much despised by profane men, who jeering
at Saints, say, these are the meek that must
inherit the earth.

But first let me premise;

That though it be unquestionably true,
that the riches of this world, which hath
been hitherto equally disensed alike to all,
shall in a very short time be abundantly given
to the Saints of the most High: as Canaans
Land was to Israel of old, which was
but a shadow of what shall come to passe in
the latter daies: that yet.

First, they that are indeed the Saints of
the most High, and that walke most with
God will be the least seekers of this worlds
wealth; and

Secondly, They that seeke it least, and
least desire it, shall have more than they
that seek it eagerly, and also shall injoy it
most comfortably, and with greatest joy in
God.

E4 Thirdly, E4v 56

Thirdly, that those saints that God will
most honour (though they shall have abundance
of the world, yet they) shall not let
their hearts upon it; but shall prefer the least
degree of the flowings of the spirit of God
(which they shall in these daies abundantly
have) above all the treasures of the whole
world. No: their hearts shall not
bee set upon the world: but “their
hearts shall rejoyce in the Lord.” Zach.
10. 7.

Fourthly, that the advanced saints
of God, shall not in these daies seeke the
wealth of the Nations, but the Nations
themselves, (as Paul expresses himselfe,
2 Cor. 11. 14. “we seek not yours, but you;”) that
is, not their wealth, but their weale; not
their treasure, but their safety; not their
riches but their happinesse; not their outward
things, but the salvation of their souls:
and they that seek not these things, to wit,
the publike weale, and safety, and happinesse,
and salvation of all; but that doe covet to
treasure up most riches for themselves, and
to poll, and rob, and cheat the people, to inhance
their owne estates, and make themselves
great in the world, and their children
gay and splendid amongst men; as doe
Kings, Princes, and evill Governours, (not to E5r 57
to mention some sorts of Committee-men)
these shall become the basest, and the vilest
among men; and their children be despised,
and contemned for their sakes: especially if
they walk in their steps.

Fiftly and lastly, It is heaven and not the
earth; It is “the kingdom of God, and
his righteousnesse that Saints will
seek after: and these things shall bee added
unto them.” Math.
6. 33.

And now having thus premised, I shall
come to mention those Scriptures which do
so cleerly demonstrate that which is here asserted;
and the truth is, the Scripture is so
pregnant, and so full of such passages, as it
would be very tedious to mention them all;
and doubtlesse many saints are very well acquainted
with them; but for satisfaction to
others, I shall mention some of them, and
the first shall be that known place in the second
Psalme; where it is cleerly asserted,
that all the kingdomes of the world, shall in
a most eminent manner be subjected to the
Lord Jesus Christ, and that hee should rule
over Kings, Princes, and Judges, (which
would not obey him,) with a rod of Iron,
and break them in pieces like a potters vessell;
if they cast not their Crownes at his feet, E5v 58
feet, and kisse him with the kisse of faith and
obedience.

In the three first verses of that Psalme, the
Prophet seemes to have in his eye the rage
of the heathen, and the fury, and the madnesse
of the Kings of the earth, at that time
when God shall set up the kingdom of Jesus
Christ
over the whole world; as if that as
soon as they see preparation unto such a
thing, that their sprits should be presently inraged;
and they, their Kings, and rulers especially,
should set their whole strength, consultations,
and counsels against the effecting
hereof, as being resolved not to suffer
it; and therefore when they see that God is
setting up of his Christ or anointed; they say
among themselves: “Come let us break their
bonds, and cast away their cords from us.”

But alas poore wormes what doe they?
“He that sit in the heavens shall laugh,” (sais the Psalmist) “The Lord shall have
them in derision: Yea he shall speake
unto them in his wrath, and vex
them in his sore displeasure,” vers.
4, 5, 6.
when
they shall doe, and notwithstanding “hee
will set his King upon his holy hill of Sion, and
shall give him the heathen for his inheritance,
the the uttermost parts of the earth for his possessi- E6r 59
possession”
; some of which being pertinacious,
and obstinate opposers, he shall breake
with a rod of iron, and dash them in pieces
like a potters vessell. And therefore the
spirit exhorts all those Kings, Rulers, and
Judges of the earth to bee wise, and receive
this instruction even to kisse the Sonne, and
and to serve the Lord with fear, and rejoyce
with trembling; lest the Sonne bee angry,
and they perish in the way, when his wrath
is kindled but a little. But for the comfort
of others who long to see that day, of the
King, the Lord Christ his exaltation; hee
addes, “Blessed are all they that wait for him.”
Thus this Scripture fully concurres with the
present Text, in asserting this thing; That
all the Kingdomes of the world, shall bee
subjected to the Lord Jesus Christ; and as
its said here, that all dominions (or as the
word may be more rightly rendred, all Rulers)
must serve and obey him: so the same
is cleerly declared, in this Prophesie of the
Psalmist also.

The next Scripture, which I shall quote
for the clearing of this point, shall be that in
the 110 Psalme, which is also very full to
this purpose: for there the Psalmist speakes
of a time when the Lord Jesus Christ, (there stiled E6v 60
stiled a Priest for ever after the order of Melchizedeck)
should be set up and exalted
above all the Kings and Potentates of the
world; and when he should rule in the midst
of his enemies, and should have his enemies
made his footstoole, and should judge
among the heathen, and wound the heathen,
and wound the heads over many
Countries, and fill them with the dead bodies;
and his people should be willing in
that day of his power, so that hence it is
cleare also, that there is a time coming when
Jesus Christ shall have the Kingdomes of the
world subjected to him. And because it is,
and will be so, that when he comes thus
to rule and raigne, that many people, but
especially the great ones, Kings, Princes,
Rulers, and Heads of Kingdomes, shall endeavour
to oppose the Lord Jesus in so doing:
therefore it is said here, that he shall
strike through Kings in the day of his wrath,
and wound the heads over many Countries.
The third Scripture which I shall cite for
the confirming of this truth, shall be that in
the 149 Psalme, (a place already mentioned
upon another occasion) where it is
said; That the Lord taketh pleasure in his
people, and he will beautifie the meek with salva- E7r 61
salvation, and that the high praises of God
shall be in their mouths and a two-edged
sword in their hands; to execute vengeance
upon the heathen, and punishments upon the
people, to bind their Kings in Chaines, and
their Nobles in Fetters of Iron: to execute
upon them the Judgement written. This
honour have all his Saints.

Now true it is, that (almost) hitherto
since the Primitive times: the Saints have
been as it were trodden under feet of the
Gentiles (that is of heathen or profane men)
and they have trampled upon them, and
sorely afflicted them. For they have both
imprisoned them, and chain’d, fetter’d, and
whipt, and cropt, and mangled, and rackt, and
burnt them & what not? For all the cruelties
that wit sharpened with malice, could either
invent or inflict, have the meek, the precious
ones of God undergone at the hands
of their cruell raging enemies. But here
they have a promise, that the Lord who taketh
pleasure in his people, will at last beautifie
the meek with salvation. And what
shall the issue thereof be? It shall be this.
That whereas, for thus a long time, they have
been in a mourning, and a sad condition,
wearing sackcloath for a time, times, and
halfe a time.

Now E7v 62

Now the high praises of God shall be in
their mouths; and whereas the heathen,
viz. profane men, have trampled upon
them, and made them as the filth of the
world, and as the off-scouring of all things,
Now they shall have together with the high
praises of God in their mouth, a two-edged
sword in their hands, to execute vengeance
upon the heathen, and punishments upon the
people: to bind their Kings in Chaines, and
their Nobles with Fetters of Iron: to execute
upon them the judgement written,
“This honour have all his Saints.”

Thus, Kings, and Nobles, and mighty
men, are to be subjected to his Saints, This
honour have all his Saints.

The fourth Scripture which I shall produce
for the illustrating of this truth, shall be
that in Isa. 51. 21. &c. which is a promise to
this purpose also, in these words; “Heare now
this thou afflicted and drunken, but not with
wine. Thus saith the Lord, the Lord and thy
God, that pleadeth the cause of his people. Behold
I have taken out of thy hand the cup of my fury,
and thou shalt no more drink it again: But
I will put it into the hand of them that afflict
thee: which have said to thy soule bow down that E8r 63
that we may go ever, and thou hast laid thy
body as the ground, and as the street to them
that went over.”

Here it is expressly said, that the cup of
trembling, and fury, should be so taken out of
the hand of the Church, as they should never
any more drink againe; and not onely so,
but that it should be put into the hands of
them that afflicted her. So that those great
and wicked ones, that most ragefully, and
most bitterly have afflicted and destroyed
the Saints of God, must now drinke off the
dregs of that cup, both that scarlet Beast the
Pope, and all those Kings, Princes, Prelates,
and inferiour persons, that continue implacable
enemies of his Saints.

Another cleare passage to this purpose is
in Isa. 51. 8, &c. in these words, “Thy watchmen
shall lift up the voice, with the voice together
shall they sing: for they shall see eye to
eye, when the Lord shall bring aghaine Sion,
break forth into joy, sing together ye wast places
of Jerusalem; for the Lord hath comforted
his people; he hath redeemed Jerusalem:
The Lord hath made bare his holy arme, in
the eyes of all the Nations: and all the ends
of the earth shall see the salvation of our
God.”

Here E8v 64

Here then its cleare, that not only some,
but all the Nations shall see the glory; and all
the ends of the earth the Salvation of our
God. He will make bare his holy arme in
the eyes of every Nation, and People under
heaven, and they must all stoope to the Scepter
of his Son.

Another clear confirmation of this truth
we have Isa. 60. 1, 2, 3, &c. in these words,
“Arise, shine. for thy light is come: for the glory
of the Lord is risen upon thee, for behold the
darnesse shall cover the earth, and grosse
darkness the people: but the Lord shall rise
upon thee, and his glory shall be seen upon thee:
and the Gentiles shall come to thy light, and
Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising. Then
thou shalt see and flow together, and thine
heart shall feare and be inlarged: because the
abundance of the sea shall be converted unto
thee, the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto
thee. They shall bring Gold and Incense,
and they shall shew forth the praises of the
Lord. Surely the Ises shall wait for me, and
the ships of the Tarshish first, to bring thy Sons
from far: their silver and their gold with
them, unto the name of the Lord thy God, and
to the holy one of Israel, because he hath glorified
thee: and the Sons of strangers shall build F1r 65
build up thy walls, and their Kings shall ministeer
unto thee: and the Nation and Kingdome
that will not serve thee shall perish; yea
those Nations shall bee utterly wasted. The
sonnes also of them that afflicted thee, shall
come bending unto thee; and all they that
despised thee, shall bow themselves down at the
soles of thy feet; and they shall call thee the
City of the Lord, the Sion of the holy one of
Israel: whereas thou hast been forsaken, and
hated, I will make thee an externall excellency,
the joy of many generations. Thy people
also shalt be all righteous, they shall inherit
the Land forever, the branch of my planting,
that I may bee glorified: a little one
shall become a thousand, and a small one a
strong Nation. I the Lord will hasten it, in
his time.”

These words are a Prophesie of the glorious
estate which the Church must in these
latter daies, (after all her sufferings) be advanced
unto.

And first it is said of the Church, that is,
the saints of the most high: that the Light
of the Lord shall rise upon them, and his glory
shall bee seen upon them; and that so evidently
and cleerly, as that the Gentiles, i.e.
the prophane men of the world shall come F to F1v 66
to that light: And not onely the poore, and
the mean among the Gentiles; but some of
their Kings, and great ones shall be converted,
and imbrace the light, and come to the
brightnesse of the saints rising.

And secondly, as abundance of the heathen
shall bee converted; sp those of them,
that have formerly afflicted the saints of
the most High, shall come bending unto
them; and those that despised them, shall
bow themselves down at the soles of their
feet, and that out of pure love to them: because
they shall see, that they are the people
of the Lord, and the Sion of the holy one of
Israel.

And thirdly, those converted Gentiles,
shall further menifest their love to the saints
of the most High: by bringing in their
wealth, their riches, their treasures, their silver
and their gold to them; and by building
their wals for them, in this also their Kings
ministring unto them.

And fourthly, the Church (the saints of
God) seeing these things, and being thus
favoured, and blessed of the Lord, shall be in
in a sweet frame of spirit, being filled with
joy, and therewith inlarged and heightned;
and this joy mixed with a holy feare, and trem- F2r 67
trembling, walking altogether in the paths
of righteousnesse.

And fifthly, the Church or saints, at this
their rising, shall grow so potent, as that
a little or despised one, shall become a thousand,
and a small one a strong nation.

And sixthly, The Nation and Kingdome
that will not serve Sion, i.e. the saints, shall
perish: yea those nations shall bee utterly
wasted.

And seventhly, whereas the saints have
been (during the time of the prevalency
of the Beast) a despised and a contemned
people, they shall now be an externall excellency;
and the joy of many generations.

This in this Scripture is this truth most
evidently demonstrated; That there must
be such a time, when the saints must bee so
lifted up out of the dust, as they must be the
top and the head of all Nations: and whatsoever
Kingdome and Nation will not seve
them must perish (which yet hath not been
accomplished) the Kings, and Princes of the
Nations bringing in their treasures to Sion,
the redeemed of the Lord.

And as full to this purpose also is that
passage, Esa. 65. 8, 9, &c. “Thus saith the F2 Lord F2v 68
Lord, As the new wine is found in the cluster,
and one saies destroy it not, for a blessing is in
it: so will I doe for my servants sake, that I
may not destroy them all; and I will bring
forth a seed out of Jacob, and out of Judah
an inheritor of my mountaines; and mine
elect shall inherit it, and my servants shall dwel
there: and Sharon shall be afold of flockes,
and the valley of Achor a place for the herds
to lie downe in, for my people that have sought
me. But ye are they that forsake the Lord,
that forget my holy mountaine.――Therefore
thus saith the Lord, behold my servants
shall eate, but ye shall be hungry, my servants
shall drink, but yee shall be thirsty: Behold,
my servants shall rejoyce, but yee shall bee ashamed,
behold my servants shall sing for joy of
heart, but yee shall cry for sorrow of heart,
and shall howle for vexation of spirit; and yee
shall leave your name for a curse unto my chosen:
For the Lord God shall slay thee, and
shall call his servants by another name: that
he who blesseth himselfe in the earth, shall
blesse himselfe in the God of truth: and hee
that sweareth in the earth, shall sweare by the
God of truth; because the former troubles
are forgotten, and because they are hid from
mine eyes: For behold I create new heavens, and F3r 69
and a new earth, and the former shall not be
remembred, nor come into minde: but be you
glad and rejoyce for ever, in that which I
create; for behold I create Jerusalem a rejoycing,
and her people a joy: and I will rejoyce
in Jerusalem, and joy in my people: and
the voice of weeping shall be no more heard in
her, nor the voice of crying. There shall bee
no more thence an infant of daies, nor an old
man that hath not filled his daies; for the
child shall die an hundred yeeres old, but the
sinner being an hundred yeeres old shall be accursed;
and they shall build houses and inhabite
them, and plant vineyards and eat the
fruit of them. They shall not build and another
inhabit; they shall not plant, and another
eate: for as the daies of a tree, are the
daies of my people; and mine elect shall long
enjoy the work of their hands; They shall not
labour in vaine, nor bring forth for trouble:
for they are the seed of the blessed of the Lord,
and their off-spring with them: and it shall
come to passe, that before they call I will answer;
and whiles they are yet speaking, I wil
heare. The Woolfe and the Lambe shall feed
together, and the Lion shall eate straw like
the Bullock, and dust shall bee the Serpents
meate; they shall not hurt nor destroie, in F3 all F3v 70
all my holy Mountaine saith the Lord.”

This Scripture also fully concurres with
the former in clearing this truth; most
sweetly holding forth, that Christ (who was
to come out of the seed of Jacob and of the tribe
of Judah) and his Saints (here stil’d Gods
elect) shall inherit the Mountaines, or Kingdomes
of this world, which are the Lords:
(verse 12.) And that when that time
comes, the saints former afflictions and sorrow,
shall be so done away, as they shall be
as forgotten, and hid from their eyes. (verses
16, 19.) And to make them joyfull,
yea full of joy; they shall have all the good
things that their hearts can wish for.

For, first they shall be filled with the spirit,
and blesse themselves, or see themselves
blessed in the God of truth: and the Lord
will rejoyce in them, and joy in his people,
verses 16, 19.

And secondly, all their prayers shall bee
speedily heard, and answered, ver. 24.

And thirdly, as they shall bee the blessed
of the Lord, so shall their of-spring be also:
that so their joyes may be without mixtures
of sorrow, ver. 23.

And fourthly, they shall inhabit the houses
which they build, and eate the fruite of the F4r 71
the vineyards which they shall plant, & none
shall take from them; but they shall long
enjoy the work of their hands; and they shall
have abundance of flockes, and herds; and
eate and drink, and rejoyce in the Lord, and
sing for joy of heart, verses 10, 13, 14, 21, 22.

And fifthly they shall live till they come to
a good old age, and be blessed, verses 20, 22.

And sixthly, no ravenous, or hurtfull, or
devouring creature shall then do any hurt to
man or beast, verse 25.

And because the condition of the Saints
shall be so happy, and the Kingdomes of the
world shall be put into such a new posture,
and be so changed from what they were;
therefore the spirit of God here calls them,
new heavens, and a new earth: (ver. 17.)
and the holy Mountaines of the Lord (verses
9, 25.) for so they will bee when these
things are accomplished: and the confusions,
and combustions, and oppressions, and
troubles that were in the old frame of the
world shall be forgotten, verses 16, 17.

Againe, This is also cleared, Jer. 30.
16, &c. and 31. 1, 2, &c.
in these words, “They
that devoure thee shall be devoured, and all
thine adversaries every one of them shall go
into Captivity: and they that spoile thee shall F4 be F4v 72
be spoiled―― And ye shall be my people, and
I will be your God; behold the whirlewind of
the Lord goeth forth with fury, a continuing
whirlewind: it shall fall with paine upon the
head of the wicked; and the fierce anger of
the Lord shall not returne untill he have done
it; and untill he have performed the intents
of his heart, in the latter daies ye shall consider
it; at the same time saith the Lord, will
I be the God of all the Families of Israel, and
they shall be my people―― Againe, I will
build thee, and thou shalt be built a virgin of
of Israel: thou shalt againe be adorned with
thy tabrets, and go forth in the dances of them
that make merry――For thus saith the Lord,
sing with gladnesse for Jacob, and shout among
the chiefe of the Nations: publish ye, praise
ye, and say, O Lord save thy people the remnant
of Israel―― Heare the word of the
Lord, O ye Nations: and declare it in the
Isles afar off; and say, he that scattered Israel
will gather him, and keep him as a shepheard
doth his flock; therefore they shall come, and
sing in the height of Sion: and shall flow together
to the goodnesse of the Lord for wheat,
and for wine, and for oyle, and for the young
of the flocke: and their soule shall be as a watered
garden, and they shall not sorrow any more F5r 73
more at all; then shall the virgin rejoyce in the
dance, both young men and old together: for
I will turne their mourning into joy, and will
comfort them, and make them rejoyce from
their sorrow.”

Though these words do more particularly,
and peculiarly concerne the seed of Abraham
after the flesh, or the naturall Israelites,
(who shall againe be received into the
love an favour of God: which shall be to
them, and others, as life from the dead,
Ezek. 37. 5. Rev. 11. 15. and be pardoned,
and cleansed from all their sins, Ezek. 36. and
become very glorious;) yet in generall do
they also concerne all the Saints, and people
of God, and must be applied to them; and
whereas they have for many hundred of
yeares been oppressed, and devoured, and
spoyled, and as captives, imprisoned, and
afflicted: the Lord here assures them, that
they that thus dealt with them shall be devoured,
and spoyled, and captivated, and destroyed
themselves, and that his fury and
fierce anger, (that hath been so provoked by
the unjust, malicious, and cruell dealings of
those wicked ones, with his own deare, precious,
and beloved people,) shall go forth
like a whirlewind, and fall paine, with a F5v 74
a witnesse upon the head of those wicked
ones: and not returne untill he have performed
the intents of his heart, and this must
be in the latter daies; And is this all God
will then do for his people, to avenge them
upon their enemies, and to bring down their
power and pride? No, this is not all, but at
the same time will he lift up his people, and
build them, and gather them, and make
them glorious, and fill them with joy,
so that they shall not sorrow any more at all.

Thus this Scripture also speakes the same
truth with the rest foregoing; and by all
these is this truth sufficiently confirmed: And
though I am suire that multitudes of faithfull
and judicious ones are fully acquainted with
these truths; yet knowing that some yet are
not, and that those that are, will be rather
delighted than wearied, by taking a review
of these Scriptures compared together, and
considering the wilfulnesse of some, in shuting
their eyes against the light, breaking
forth both from the word and works of God
in clearing these things. I shall therefore add
some other Scriptures, in which this is further
manifested: and the next shall be that
Dan. 2. 37, 38. and so on, where Daniel interpretingterpreting F6r 75
Nebuchadnezzars dreame, declares,
that after the foure Monarchs, the
Golden, the Silver, the Brasse, and the Iron
Monarchs, have been set up in the world, and
continued their appointed times: that then
the God of heaven shall set up another Kingdom,
which shall as a stone cut out of the
Mountaines without hands, break in peeces
this last Monarch of Iron, and clay, and stone;
and shall it selfe become a great mountaine,
and fill the whole earth, and this Kingdom
shall never be destroyed, nor be left to other
people, but it shall stand for ever.

This is that Kingdome that Christ and his
Saints must possesse, whose rise and beginning
may seem small, but as a little stone cut
out of the mountain, and that without hands,
without the help of the strength and power
of the Kings and the great ones of the earth:
and yet this seeming small rising of Christ
and his Saints shall be hard enough, and potent
enough to break in peeces the Roman
Iron legs, that last and worst Beast, and to
make the Iron, and the Clay, and the Brass,
and the Silver, & the Gold, to be as the chaffe
that is carried away of the wind, and this
is undoubtedly that which is now a doing.

Another confirmation of this we have Joel F6v 76
Joel 3. 1, 3, &c. “For behold in those daies,
and at that time, when I shall bring again the
Captivity of Judah and Jerusalem; I will
gather all Nations, and wil bring them down
into the valley of Jehoshaphat, and I will plead
with them there―― Proclaime yee this among
the Gentiles: prepare war, wake up
the mighty men, let all the men of war draw
neer, let them come up: beat your plowshares
into swords, and your pruning hookes into
speares: Let the weak say I am strong; assemble
your selves, and come all yee Heathen,
and gather your selves together round about;
put yee in the sickle, for the harvest is ripe:
get ye downe for the presse is full, for the wickednesse
is great; multitudes, multitudes,
in the valley of decision: for the day of the
Lord is neer, in the valley of decision. The
Lord also shall roar out of Sion, and utter his
voice from Jerusalem, and the Heavens and
the Earth shall shake; but the Lord will bee
the hope of his people, and the strength of the
Children of Israel: So shall yee know that I
am the Lord your God dwelling in Sion. And
it shall come to passe in that day, that the
Mountaines shall drop downe new Wine, and
the Hils shall flow with milke, and all the Rivers
of Judah shall flow with waters, and a Foun- F7r 77
Fountaine shall come forth of the house of the
Lord, and shall water the Valley of Shittim.”

In these words here is a very great war
proclaimed; for what end? To bring againe
the Captivity of Gods people, (ver.
1.) or to inlarge and set them at liberty, and
bring them out of all their troubles; and to
this end the Lord saies that hee will plead
with all Nations, that have afflicted his people,
(ver. 2) And being determined to
shew forth his great power, and glory, and
his tender love to his people, he proclaims
a War, and summons all the Nations to gather
themselves together, and to prepare for
War, and to awaken all their mighty men,
all their most puissant, and valiant men of
War: and to make the greatest provision
of men, and ammunition, that ’tis possible
for them to make. To that end to beat their
instruments of Husbandry into instruments
of War; and to gather together the greatest
strength imaginable: and when they have
done this, then will he sit to judge the heathen,
and thither cause his mighty ones to
come, to bee as a sickle to cut downe this
ripe harvest of wicked men; whose wickednesse
is great, and then by destroying there F7v 78
their multitudes, to decide the controversie
between them and his owne people; which
shall be an occasion of calling the place
where it is done, the valley of decision: for
there the Lord will marvellously shew himselfe,
to the causing of the whole earth to
shake; but to the joy and consolation of his
people: for he will then be their hope, and
their strength, and then it shall be knowne
that the Lord dwelleth in Sion, and they
shall abundantly enjoy the blessings of
the Lord; and bee delivered from all their
troubles for evermore.

Another Scripture which speakes of these
same times, (though it doe not so fully declare
particulars) is that in Act. 3. 19, 20.
&c.
Where Peter speaking unto the Jews,
charges this upon them, that they had denied
the holy one and the Just, and kil’d the
Prince of Life, whom God had raised from
the dead; by faith in whose Name the
lame man was healed: hee addes, “Now
brethren, I wot that through ignorance yee
did it, as did also your Rulers; but these
things which God before had shewed by the
mouth of all his Prophets that Christ should
suffer, he hath so fulfilled: repent you therefore
and be converted, that your sins may bee blot- F8r 79
blotted out when the times of refreshing shall
come from the presence of the Lord: and he
shall send Jesus Christ which was before preached
unto you, whom the heavens must receive
untill the time of restitution of all things,
which God hath spoken of by the mouth of all
his holy Prophets since the world began.”

Peter here preaching to those that had
been the actors of that most unjust, and most
unrighteous act that ever was acted by the
most wretched, and most sinfull of the sons
of men: he charges it home upon them,
ver. 12, 13, 14 and 15. and having done so,
he is guided by the wisdome of the Spirit,
(lest they should in the sense hereof be driven
to despaire,) to mitigate the terrour of
of it; (though the sin was so hainous) by
these two considerations.

First, their ignorance, verse 17. sutable to
which is that passage of Paul, 1 Cor. 2. 8.

Secondly, by the determinate counsell of
God, which he then fulfilled in that act of
theirs, which was in it selfe so hainously
sinfull as it came from them.

And having thus done, he presses them to
repentance, and to an embracing of the
Lord Jesus Christ: from whom he preaches
peace, not withstanding their great sin against him; F8v 80
him; telling them that upon their being
converted unto him, their sins should be blotted
out; and tels them withall, that though
they had crucified him, and he according to
the counsell of God had suffered death; of
which all the Prophets had spoken: that yet
there was a time comming, when that
Jesus Christ which had been crucified, who
was gone to heaven, and must there remaine
untill that appointed time, even that Jesus
Christ
should come again and (v. 21.) restore
Restore all things, that is,
to restore to his Saints a
comfortable and free enjoyment
of all the comforts of
the Spirit of grace, and of
all the comforts of the whole
Creation; and when the
Apostle here saies, he shall
restore all these things, he
meanes, he shall restore
them to those that are converted;
to his Saints only;
and not to all men, as some
would have it, for that is
directly contradictory to other
Scriptures that speake
of this same time, as Isa.
65. 13, 14, 15, 20.
Isa. 51.
22, 23.
Jer. 30. 23, 24. Rev.
21. 8. Chap. 22. 15.
besides
many others to this purpose
that are as cleare; for if
this were true, then may it
be said in this case as
Paul in another said, if
so, &c. Saints are of all
men most miserable, in that
they suffer sharpe afflictions,
and drinke many a bitter
cup from the hands of
wicked men, because they
will not do as they do, and
say as they say; because
they are more righteous, and
for righteousnesse sake:
but they it suffer because
they know that the righteous
Judge of all the earth
will quickly come, and reward
every one as his work
shall be, Rev. 22. 12. even
to them who patiently continue
in well doing eternall
life, but unto the ungodly
workers of iniquity, indignation,
and wrath, tribulation,
and anguish upon
every soule of man that
doth evill, of the Jew first,
and also of the Gentile,
Rom. 2. 6, 7, 8, 9.
all things, and pardon
their sins, and refresh
(v. 19.) & comfort
them; and this
is that time, saies Peter,
which God hath
spoken of by the
mouth of all his holy
Prophets, which have
been since the world
began; and this doubtless
is that which is
spoken of by the Prophet
Daniel, in this
passage we are treating
of.

And this is that which G1r 81
which Paul also
speakes of, Rom. 8.
18, 19, &c.
in these
words, “The sufferings
of this present time
are not worthy to be
compared with the
glory which shall be
revealed in us; for the
earnest expectation of
the Creature waiteth
for the manifestation
of the sons of God, for
the Creature was
made subject to vanity:
not willingly, but
by reason of him who
hath subjected the
same in hope; because
the Creature its selfe
also shall be delivered
from the bondage of
corruption into the
glorious liberty of the
children of God; for
we know that the
whole Creation groaneth and travelleth together
in paine untill now; and not only they, but G our G1v 82
our selves also, which have the first fruits of
the spirit: even we our selves groane within
our selves; waiting for the adoption, to wit,
the redemption of our bodies.”

Here the Apostle speaking of this exalted
condition of the Saints, in these latter daies,
doth illustrate it in these 5 particulars; by
which he sets out what the condition of
saints shall be, and by six particulars, in which
he speaks to the condition of the whole Creation.
The particulars wherein he speakes to
the condition of the Saints are these.

First, That the condition of the Saints,
untill that time come, whatever their enjoyments
are, and how confortable soever
it shall be, yet (in comparison of that) it shall
be a sighing, a groaning, a sorrowing condition;
for so he saies: even we our selves,
we that are Saints, and have the first fruits
of the spirit; which are exceeding precious
to us, and in which we have so much joy
and peace, as Rom. 5. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 11. we groan
within our selves, are in a sighing, sorrowing
condition, waiting for the Adoption, or
Redemption of our bodies, untill when we
shall sigh; and indeed so it must needs be: for
besides outward troubles we meet with from
wicked men, we the best, Pauls, Cephas’s and G2r 83
and Primitive Saints, which are indued with
the most eminent gifts, are also troubled
with sin that dwels in us; so that when we
would do good evill is present with us. But

Secondly, He tels us that at that time the
condition of Saints shall be such, as that
their bodies shall be redeemed from the servitude,
and slavery in which they have been
subjected to men, in that (over their bodies)
other Lords have had dominion, for that
must needs be his meaning in those words,

“Waiting for the redemption of our bodies.”
what shall our bodies have redemption from
else but that? And that is also the meaning of
those words, “The glorious liberty of the
children of God.”
They have not been in their
bodies free, nor in liberty, but in bondage,
and subjection; but then comes the redemption
of their bodies; and they shall be at liberty.
And

Thirdly, They shall also be freed from the
power of corruption within: as well as
from the outward slavery and subjection of
wicked men; and this is exprest in these
words, “The glory which shall be revealed in
us”
; present sufferings are “not worthy to be
compared with the glory which shall be revealed
in us”
; the inward glory of Saints consistethG2 steth G2v 84
only in such things as these, in the presence
and power of the spirit within them,
in subduing all corruption, and in leading
them into the paths of righteousnesse,
when they do no Psal. 119
.2.
iniquitie,
but walk in his law and light,
&c. Then are they all-glorious
within; and this is the glory which shall be
revealed in them: and in this most eminently
shall they bee freed from the bondage of
corruption.

Fouthly, that condition wherein the
saints shall then be, shall bee such as wherein
they shall be cleerly and visibly manifested
to be the sonnes of God, which is exprest
in these words: “Waiting for the manifestation
of the Sonnes of God.”
The saints having
all this while been as it were in obscurity,
and laine among the pots (to use the
Psalmists expression) they shall then arise,
and bee as the wings of a Dove, covered
with silver, and her feathers with yellow
gold; for then shall be the manifestation of
the sonnes of God. For then, shall God so
fully and so evidently owne them, and appear
in them, and for them, as that the heathen
shall see it, and acknowledge it to them;
and then to all shall they be manifested to be the G3r 85
the sonnes of God: This is exprest in these
words also; “waiting for the adoption, to wit,”
the redemption of our bodies: he cals this
time the adoption, because then the sonship
of the saints of God, as before he had said,
should be made manifest: but that in the
word the adoption, hee might be understood,
hee addes this, “to wit, the redemption
of our bodies”
; implying that the time of the
redemption of our bodies, will be the time of
the manifestation of our sonship or adoption.

Fifthly, this condition of the saints shall
be a most glorious condition; that’s exprest
in these words, “the glory that shall be revealed
in us, and the glorious liberty of the children
of God.”

Thus in these five particulars doth the Apostle
set out, what the condition of the
saints shall be at that time: which is also
further cleered in those six particulars, in
which hee speakes to the condition of the
whole creation: which are these,

First, that the bondage of corruption is now
universally spread over the whole creation:
as all mankind, so all other creatures since
man sin’d, and corruption broke forth in
him; (whereby hee violated the Law of a
righteous Creator) are exposed to misery G3 and G3v 86
and paine; so grievous was the fall of man,
and so hainous is the sin, as that there is
none of the sons of men, nor yet of the creatures,
which were appointed for the use of
man; but the weight and bondage of sin it
lies upon.

Secondly, that this bondage lies so heavy
upon the whole Creation, as it makes it
groan under the burthen of it, as being very
irksome and painfull to it. “The whole Creation
groaneth, and travelleth together in pain.”

Thirdly, that it was not willingly, but
with reluctancy and paine, that the creature
became subject to vanity; to wit, to
the bondage of corruption, that is the misery
that sinne and corruption brought upon it:
It is not willingly, that ny of them suffer
pinching cold, and pining hunger, and killing
stormes, and many other judgements which
sinne brought into the world: (though willingly,
and with delight some creatures, doe
and shall performe that service to man in
which they were appointed to be usefull to
man, as man is Lord over all creatures: as
the horse rusheth into the battell, and swiftly
carries man in journies, sometimes
without whip or spur, and the Ox willingly
takes the yoak, and other services severall crea- G4r 87
creatures willingly performe, when they
are not abused by men that are unreasonable.
“The good man is merciful to his beast.”) But
painefull sufferings, and all the bondage
that sinne brought upon the creature, it was
willingly subjected to. “The Creature
was made subject to vanity, not willingly,
&c.”

Fourthly, that when it was subjected to
vanity, it had hope given it of deliverance;
“not willingly, but by reason of him, who hath
subjected the same in hope”
: So that it was
subjected in hope; not that such hope can
be in an unreasonable creature, as there may
be and is in reasonable man; who hopes,
and hath a reason of his hope: but it is
with such a hope as its nature is capable of;
of which to give an exact definition, I will
not undertake: But certain it is that it hath
a hope such as it is; and this hope it had
when first it was made subject to vanity, and
in this hope it was subjected: for though
it was with reluctancy, not willingly, that
it was subjected; yet, subjected it was, by
reason of him, who subjected the same in
hope: Who for ends best knowne to himselfe,
both subjected it, and subjected it in
hope.

G4 Fifth- G4v

Fifthly, as the whole creation was subjected
in hope, so doth it waite for and expect
accordingly, that liberty that it shall
have at the time of the glorious manifestation
of the sonnes of God. Yea it earnestly
expects and waits for it, as it is exprest in
these words. “The earnest expectation of the
creature, waiteth for the manifestation of the
sonnes of God.”
But this expectation and
waiting must be understood, of such an expectation
and waiting, as the creature is capable
of, and not of any such expectations
or waitings as are in reasonable man, it being
not capable of it.

But sixthly, and lastly, the creature that
thus is as hath been said, under the bondage
of corruption; under which it groanes and
travels, being not willingly but with reluctancy
under it; but yet hoping for, and
waiting for and expecting deliverance,
shall at that time, when the saints by being
set at liberty from the pressures of inward
corruptions, and outward enemies, be gloriously
manifested to be the sons of God; bee
also set at liberty from all its pressures, and
griefes, under which it groans: and set into
a condition of gladsomnesse and freedom.

Thus in this place of Paul is this great truth, G5r 89
truth, so much spoken of by the Prophets,
and saints, confirmed by Paul: wherein because
he in some things, speakes more particularly
of the state of the creatures at that
time, I could not passe it by without this
brief observation of it; wherein wee may
see that the condition of the Saints must
needs be exceeding glorious, since the creatures
over which man is Lord, shall be then
in such a state of freedome and liberty.

I shall not inlarge any further, in producing
any other of those many passages in Scripture,
which witnesse this truth, but onely
those two, Rev. 5. 10. and Rev. 11. 15,
16, 17, 18.
Both which, do also punctually
speak in the language of the Prophet Daniel
here in this Chapter; to wit, that the
Kingdomes of this world, must more visibly
and more fully then yet they have been, become
the Kingdomes of the Lord Jesus, and
obey him. So Dan. 7. 14, 27. and Revel.
11. 15.
And that when that time is, the
Saints must possesse the Kingdome, and
reigne on earth: so Dan. 7. 22, 27. and Rev.
5. 10.

The first of these passages mentioned in
the Revelation, is that, Chap. 5. 9, 10.
which runs thus. “Thou wast slaine, and hast redee- G5v 90
redeemed us to God by thy blood; out of every
kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation:
and hast made us unto our God, Kings
and Priests, and we shall reigne on the earth.”

These words are a part of a song, sung by
Saints, wherein they praise the Lambe, and
herein they have in their eye, as matter for
which their hearts are ingaged to honour
and glorifie Christ: both that which he had
already done for them, and also that which
he had not yet done, but would doe for
them. That which hee had done for them,
in these words; “Thou wast slaine, and thou
hast redeemed us――and thou hast made us
unto our God Kings and Priests”
: and that
which should bee done for them by Christ
in these words, “and wee shall reigne on the
earth”
: this being that which they knew hee
would doe; hee having declared it by the
mouth of all his Prophets, therefore they
sing it out, “we shall reigne on the earth.”

The other passage, which is, Rev. 11. 15,
16, 17, 18.
runnes thus. “And the seventh
Angel sounded, and there were great voices
in Heaven, saying, the Kingdomes of this
world are become the Kingdomes of our Lord,
and of his Christ, and he shall reigne for ever
and ever: and the four and twenty Elders which G6r 91
which sate before God on their seates, fell upon
their faces and worshipped God, saying, We
give thee thankes, O Lord God Almighty,
which art, and wast, and art to come: because
thou hast taken to thee thy great power, and
hast reigned; and the Nations were angry,
and thy wrath is come, and the time of the
dead that they should be judged; and that
thou shouldest give reward unto thy servants
the Prophets, and to the Saints, and
them that feare thy name, small and great,
and shouldest destroy them which destroy the
earth. And the Temple of God was opened
in Heaven, and there was seen in his Temple
the Ark of his Testament; and there were
lightnings, and voices, and thunderings, and
an earthquake, and great hail.”

This Scripture being so pertinent unto the
present purpose; and having already in another
Treatise opened the former part of this
Chapter, from the first to the 15 verse; I
shall therefore be the more copious in opening
of this part, which is from the 15
verse (where I left) unto the end of the
chapter.

Verse G6v 92

Verse 15.

“And the seventh Angel sounded, and there
were great voices in Heaven, saying the kingdoms
of this world are become, &c.”

The declaration of this truth, that the
Kingdomes of this world are become the
Kingdomes of the Lord Christ, is here held
forth unto us to bee that great and glorious
part, and portion of the providence and
counsell of God, that is to be manifested under
the sounding of the seventh Trumpet;
which brings in the seventh, and last, and
greatest judgement of God upon that
wicked, (as the Apostle termes him,) or
that man of sinne. That great Saint opposer
the Roman Papall Beast, and his adherents:
For by the seven Angels which
were to sound the seven Trumpets, is to
be undestood 7 severall, remarkeable, and
great judgements, that in so many several
periods of time, by so many severall passages
of the providence and purpose of God,
should be brought upon that beast, and his
associates, whereby they should bee gradually
ruined. The first of them being one degree
of bringing them down; and the second bring- G7r 93
bringing them lower then the first had done,
and the third bringing them lower then the
two former, and the fourth breaking down
another part of their greatnesse, and glory,
which was not broken by the three former:
but the three latter are to bee more terrible,
and dreadfull unto them then any of the former;
and therefore they are said to be three
great woes which were to come upon that
crew, Chap. 8. 13. which are there stil’d
the inhabitants of the earth: for all along
in this Prophesie they are cal’d the earth, to
distinguish them from the Saints, who are
all along cal’d heaven, and as these are said
to be woes, so they prove woes indeed, unto
that miserable crew; but it is to them, and
them onely, and not to any others. As for
the Saints, all the seven Trumpets produce
matter of joy to them, because therein
Christs enemies, and their enemies are from
time to time brought low: And indeed
these seven Trumpets (or seven severall
judgements of God upon the Beast and his
adherents,) were obtained from God in a
great measure by their prayers; being offered
up by the Lord Jesus their blessed Mediator,
who perfumed them with the incense
of his own rightwousnesse and worthinesse, in G7v 94
in which they are acceptable: For upon
the offering up of the prayers of Saints, with
that incense, these Judgements were powred
out upon the earth, that is, nupon
that crew: and these angels prepared
to sound, as appeares, Chap. 8. 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, &c. So that, the Saints had cause to rejoyce,
when these judgements came upon
that faction; and they indeed did rejoyce,
and their hearts have been made glad, in all
these severall Judgemeunts which have come
upon them. As in that their Doctrines, and
Doctors, Bishops, Jesuits, and Priests, and
much of their power and authority which
they had over the people, have been brought
down and laid in the dust; in those six severall
Trumpreets sounding, or glorious dispensations
already past, wherein that party
have been troubled, perplexed and pained at
the heart: and now this great and glorious
dispensation we are treating of, is to bee the
seventh and last; which is of greatest terror
to them, and greatest joy to the saints: as it
followes,

“And the seventh Angel sounded, and there
were great voices in Heaven, saying, the kingdoms,
&c.”

There were great voices in heaven, that is, G8r 95
is, there were many in heaven, that is, in
the Church, or among the Saints, (that in
the Prophesies of this Book are stiled heaven)
that did trumpet forth, sound forth, or
clearely hold forth, and confidently speake
out this truth: that “the Kingdomes of this
world are become the Kingdomes of our Lord
and of his Christ, and he shall reign for ever
anad ever.”
They were voyces; it was not only
the single voice of one, but they are voices;
it is the voice of many in heaven, many
among the Saints: And they are not the
whimsicall notions of unsound and rotten
men, but they are voices in heaven, voyces
of reall Saints.

“Great voyces in heaven:” Being great
voices, argues first, that they are not some
poore weak suppositions, or may be’s: Nor
secondly, are they some weake faint sayings;
but they are great, that is, effectuall, convincing,
and unquestionable speakings: such
as shall be heard, and be received, and be beleeved
among the Saints; they shall be spoken
with such authority of Scripture, and
such demonstration of the spirit, and power
going along with them; and these great voyces
shall have a double effect: first, they shall
minister joy and gladnesse to the Saints; and secondly, G8v 96
secondly they shall minister terrour to the
Popish party, for it speakes and works their
ruine, and third woe that comes upon
them.

“The Kingdomes of this world are become
the Kingdomes of our Lord, and of his Christ,
and he shall reign for ever and ever.”
The
Kingdomes of this world are become to, why
were they not so before this seventh Angell
sounded, or this seventh dispensation? Is not
the earth the Lords and the fulnesse thereof?
whose were the Kingdomes of this world
but our Lords, and his Christs? Answer,
Though it is true they were his, yet they
were not so visibly the Kingdoms of God,
and of Christ as they shall then be. For they
seemed rather to be the Kingdomes of the
evill one, they were so universally inslaved
to the Devill, among the Indians, and the Heathens
that professed not Christ, and they
seemed rather to be inslaved to that man of
sin, that wicked one, that sate in the Temple of
God, and blasphemed among such as professed
Christianity. But at this time they shall
in a most visible and glorious manner become
the Kingdomes of our Lord, and of his
Christ: for he shall break down the power
of other Kings, even of all that will not stoop H1r 97
stoope to him, and cast their Crowns at his
feet, yea, he will breake them in peeces as a
Potters vessell, and that great Papall Beast
shall be destroyed with the fire of his
wrath, and his glory shall be manifested to
all people, and nations, and languages: who
casting off all other Lords shall willingly be
subjected to him; and rejoyce in his glorious
reign, according to that of the Psalmist,
“The Lord Psal. 97. 1.
and 96. 10,
11, 12, 13.

“England
is one of the
great Isles.”
reigneth and let the
earth rejoyce, and let the great
Isles be glad thereof.”
Yea, the
Kingdomes of this world shall be
universally so subjected to our
Lord Jesus Christ, as they shall all serve and
obey him only: and other Lords shall not
have Dominion over them, but they shall
have one Lord, and his name one in all the
earth. Thus in a most visible manner
shall the Kingdomes of this Zach. 14. 9.
world become the Kingdoms of this
our Lord, and of his Christ.

“And he shall reign of ever and ever.” He
having once subjected the Kingdomes of
this world unto the obedience of himselfe;
it shall not be with him, as it hath been with
all the great and potent Monarchs that have
formerly ruled the world: that one of them H have H1v 98
have thrust out and destroyed another: and
one hath taken the Dominion from another.
No, none shall take the Dominion from him:
But as Daniel saies, “His Kingdome shall be
an everlasting Kingdom, and all Rulers shall
serve and obey him.”
So John here sais, “He
shall reigne for ever and ever.”

“And the foure and twenty Elders, which
sate before God on their seats, fell upon their
faces, and worshipped God, saying, we give
thee thanks O Lord God Almighty, &c.”

What thosle foure and twenty Elders are
will appeare in the fourth and fifth Chapters
of this Prophesie. They are first mentioned
Chap.4.4. where they are thus described,
“And round about the throne were foure and
twenty seats, and upon the seats I saw foure
and twenty Elders, sitting, cloathed in white
rayment: and upon their heads were Crownes
of Gold.”
Now that we may know what
these be: we must observe what the Angell
saies to John in the first verse of that Chapter,
in these words, “Come and I will shew thee
things which must be hereafter”
; whence it
appears that these Elders, as well as the
other things which John saw, were representatives
of some things that were to be
after that time. Now Chapter 5. we may see what H2r 99
what they were that were to be hereafter;
which these foure and twenty Elders did represent,
and that is, that they were Saints
that were redeemed to God by the bloud of
the Lamb out of every kindred, and Nation,
and people, as appeares in the 8, 9, 10. verses
of that Chapter.

Now here in this 11 Chapter these foure
and twenty Elders, that is, these Saints and
redeemed ones of Christ, do upon the sounding
of these voyces, (that the Kingdomes
of this world are become the Kingdomes of
our Lord, and of his Christ) fall upon their
faces, that is, they lay themselves low before
God, and worship him: being exceedingly
affected with this great work of God,
and with his great grace toward them, in
bringing them out of their suffering condition
to reign with Christ.

“They fell upon their faces, and worshipped
God, saying, we give thee thanks O Lord God
Almighty, which art, and wast, and art to
come, because thou hast taken to thee thy great
power, and hast reigned”

The Saints, whatever others do herein, yet
they, (if their eyes be open to see it) they
cannot but give thanks, yea, solemnly lay
themselves low before God in thanksgiving: H2 for H2v 100
for the great and signall manifestations of the
Lord God Almighty, and eternall, his taking
to him his great power in ruling, and raigning;
and laying of such as are indeed his
enemies in the dust, and yet withall at the
same time their hearts may be very much affected
with this, that any godly men should
be so deeply engaged with Gods enemies:
and consequently do partake of their punishments.

“Because thou hast taken to thee thy great
power, and hast reigned”
Because thou hast
not suffered thine enemies alwaies to boast,
and to triumph, but hast begun to lay them
low before thee, and now hast taken to thee
thy great power, which thou seemedst to
have laid aside, when thou sufferedst so long
the rod of the wicked to rest upon the lot
of thy righteous ones: but now dost thou
take to thee, and shew forth thy great power,
in punishing, and bringing down the
power of thine enemies; for these things
we give thee thanks, and because that now
more generally, universally, and evidently
thou appearest to reign over men in thy just
and righteous deciding of Controversies, and
in justifying them that in the integrity of
their hearts give up themselves to glorifie thy H3r 101
thy great name, and to do that which may
be for the good of all thy Saints, even of
every one that feares thy name, small and
great: laying aside all by and selfe respects;
yea, we give thee thanks for that thou now
so evidently appearest to reigne over men,
in condemning and blasting those that pretending
other things, force themselves
against their judgements to contend for
some things which are but a seeming ground
of that quarrell against others which was
primarily occasioned by their selfe ends
which selfe-love hath so blinded them as
they could not, or would not see, but shall
see, and be made to acknowledge them to
thee, and to thy Saints by thy righteous
judgements.

This and much more is the Saints meaning
in these words, when they say, “Wee
give thee thankes because thou hast taken to
thee, &c.”
Wherein they expresse how they
are affected with, and doe rejoyce in these
things: Wee know how David expresses
himselfe upon such an occasion, Psal. 98. 7,
8, 9.
“Let the Sea roar and the fulnesse thereof;
the world and they that dwell therein:
Let the floods clap their hands, and let the
hils be joyful together, before the Lord, for he H3 commeth H3v 102
commeth to judge the earth with righteousnesse,
and to judge the people with equity.”
David
is so affected with this great and glorious
dispensation, when God comes to reigne,
and even for to judge the earth with righteousnesse,
and to decide with justice and equity,
the controversies of the people; as
that he cannot be content, to onely rejoyce
and be exceeding glad thereof himselfe, but
he also excites the whole Creation to rejoyce
in this most glorious dispensation.
And if these that are still of the world, (so
they be not the desperate and implacable
enemies of his Saints) shall have such cause
to rejoyce when the Lord reigneth; because
they shall not be at all oppressed, nor
unjustly dealt with, as they had bin before,
but shall have justice done them. I say, if
these, and the whole Creation shall rejoyce
when the Lord reigneth: much more shall
Saints, when hee shall come to Judge their
cause with righteousnesse, and destroy the
man of sinne; and shall lay all his supporters,
though Kings and Princes, (notwithstanding
whosoever labours to prop or beare
them up) in the dust.

“And the Nations were angry.”

When God comes to take his great power,er, H4r 103
and to reigne himselfe, the Nations are
angry; because their vaine customes which
they have doated upon, must bee laid aside
and this great man must be brought downe:
and that King, and ’tother darling, and favourite
of the Nations, (for opposing of the
Lord Jesus Christ and his Saints)
must bee destroyed, even the
Psal. 110. heads over many Countries.

“And thy wrath is come.”

When Jesus Christ comes to reigne, hee
will breake forth in wrath against his, and
his Saints implacable enemies: and this is
that which he speakes of, when hee speakes
of the yeere of recompences, for the controversies
of Sion. And when he
sais the day of vengeance is in Isa. 63. 3, 4.
his heart, and the yeere of his
redeemed is come; having suffered his adversaries
a long time, to go on unpunished,
in afflicting and martryring, and oppressing
Saints; hee will at last have a time to
reckon with them, and hee will avenge his
Saints quarrell, (for vengeance is his) recompencing
all the blood, and cruelty of
their enemies on their owne heads: And
he will shew that hee hath not been regardlesse,
of all the sufferings and sad pressures H4 which H4v 104
which his people have undergone, from the
hands of wicked and cruel men; but when
the yeere of his redeemed is come, then will
he recompence his enemies for all their controversies
with Sion: and as it is Jer. 30.
23.
His fierce anger shall goe forth as a
whirlewinde, and shall fall with pain upon
the heads of the wicked.

“For thy wrath is come, and the time of the
dead that they should be judged.”

When Christ thus comes to avenge his
people on their enemies, he doth therein
give judgement for them, for in that those
enemies have slain with righteous judgement,
when he passes the sentence of condemnation,
and executes it upon those that have thus
destroyed, and had a hand in the destroying
of so many innocent, and so many righteous
soules: for all the bloud of all the innocent
soules, from righteous Abel to the bloud
of the many innocents lately shed in Ireland
and elsewhere must be charged upon the
“And thus God judgeth the
dead Saints cause.”
Pope, and that Generation,
for so sais the
Text, Rev. 18. 24. that
in them will be found all the bloud of all the Prophets, H5r 105
Prophets, and Saints, and of all that were
slaine upon earth

“And that thou shou dst give reward unto
thy servants the Prophets, and to thy Saints,
and to them that feare thy name, small and
great.”

The time of Christs reigning will be the
time of Saints rewarding, for all their love,
and all the labour and sufferings of it. There
is none that ever did any thing for God, or
that suffered any thing for God, but shall be abundantly
rewarded for all their doings, and
sufferings; and for all their shame and sufferings
shal have a reward of double joy, according
to that passage, Isa 61. 7. “For your shame
you shal have double: and for confusion they shal
rejoyce in their portion: therefore in their
land they shall possesse the double, everlasting
joy shall be unto them”
; And the reward which
Christ will give, when he hath thus brought
down his enemies, shall be universall to all
his Saints; not only (as some have conceived)
unto those Saints that have been Martyr’d
for Christ; but to all his Saints, which
are here exprest under various denominations,
that so all Saints may see themselves
here included; and therefore first it is thus
exprest, “That thou shouldst give reward unto thy H5v 106
thy servants the Prophets”
; by which in generall
is meant all Saints: for all Saints have in
a measure a spirit of Prophesie; “For the testimony
of Jesus is the spirit of Prophesie,”
saies
the Angell, Rev. 19. 10. but more peculiarly
by Prophets, is ordinarily understood, the
great preachers and publishers of Gospell-
truths: those that are gifted and inabled to
hold forth publikely to edification, exhortation
and comfort Gospell truths; for this is
prophesying, as Cor. 14. 3. and now if there
had in this place been no other description
given of the Saints which should have been
rewarded by Christ: but only this “his servants
the Prophets,”
there might have been
some question made whether this did include
all Saints? and it might be taken only
for publike officers; but it therefore follows,
“and to thy Saints”; this is a more generall
word, and herein all saints might be satisfied,
though they be not so eminently gifted
as others are: since this word is added, “and
to thy Saints”
: but if any should yet conceive
that they are not here included, seeing some
that are Saints are sometimes under some
doubtings of their Saintship; therefore it
follows: “And to them that feare thy name”:
so that if they have but a true filiall sonlike feare H6r 107
feare of God, they may hereby be encouraged;
but yet any further, that there may not be
any discouraged for their weakeness, because
they are lookt upon as little ones, as babes:
of because they are low in the world; it
therefore followes, and “to them that feare
thy name, small and great”
; all Saints, from
the most eminent Prophet, and Teacher, to
the meanest and tenderest babe, thaat waites
upon, and loves, and feares the Lord Jesus,
shall all be rewarded at his comming; not
that any thing they have done or suffered
doth merit a reward, but he will freely give
them a glorious reward, for all that they
have suffered and done for him.

“And shouldst destroy them which destroy
the earth.”

This being the time in which he comes to
do righteousness and justice in the earth: he
will render a just reward to the enemies of
his people, and cause his wrath to go forth
against them to their destruction; but this
is further spoken of in the 19. verse, as it
follows.

“And the temple of God was opened in heaven,
and there was seen in his temple the Arke
of his Testament, and there were lightnings, and H6v 108
and voyces, and thunderings, and an earthquake,
and great haile.”

This verse containes a declaration of two
great effects, the first of which concernes
Saints, and the latter concernes the enemies
of Christ and his Saints. That which concernes
Saints is in these words, “And the
Temple of God was opened in heaven, and
there was seen in the Temple the Arke of his
Testament”
; and that which concernes the
enemies is in these words, “And there were
lightnings, and voyces, and thunderings, and
an earthquake, and great haile”
: of this latter
effect of the sounding of this Trumpet I
shall speake by and by in its place; but first
of the first effect mentioned in this verse,
which concernes the Saints, which is contained
in these words, “And the Temple of
God was opened in heaven, and there was seen
in his Temple the Arke of his Testament.”

The Temple, and the Arke of his Testament
are both Old Testament-phrases: and
for the opening of these things we must first
enquire what is meant by these phrases here
in the New Testament?

Now this may be made cleare by comparing
Scripture with Scripture, for the spirit
of God ordinarily cleares that in one Scripture, H7r 109
Scripture, which he leaves more doubtfull
in another.

Now generally in the New Testament,
our Lord Jesus Christ, and his Disciples
to whom he opened the
Scriptures, Luk. 14.
22.
of Moses and all the
Prophets do make use of such phrases, as the
Temple, and Jerusalem, and Sion, and the
Priesthood, and the Sacrifices, and the like,
to expresse those things by them which the
outward things in use under the law did type
out, and they never spake of these things as
they are litterally understood; as to be so understood
in the times of the Gospell: but as
being now abolished: and those spirituall
things which they typed out, are alwaies to
be understood by such phrases in the New
Testament
, and so the spirit of Christ in the
Apostles expressly declares: as for instance,
the Churches of God are now said to be the
Temple of God, as 2 Cor. 6. 16. for ye (saith
Paul to the Church of the Corinthians) are
the Temple of the living God; as God hath
said, “I will dwell in them, and walk in them:
and I will be their God, and they shall be my
people”
: and so also the Church of God is in
the New Testament called the heavenly Jerusalem,
and Sion, as Heb. 12. 22. and Gal. 4. 26. H7v 110
26.
and Rev. 21. 2, 3. and in the New Testament
the title of High-Priest is given to
Christ, as Heb. 8. 1. and the title of Priest is
given to Saints, as Rev. 1. 6. and the spirituall
services of Saints are termed sacrifices, “for
with such sacrifices,”
(saies the Apostle) “God
is well pleased.”

So that these words in this verse, “The
Temple of God, and the Arke of his Testament,”
are to be mystically understood, and not
literally, since such things are abolished.
Now by the Temple of God, we are to understand
here the Church of God, the Saints,
the people of God, which in the New Testament
are stiled the Temple of God. And
as the Arke of the Testament was of old that
wherein the Book of the Law was put in the
Temple of old: so in this New Testament
Temple, that is to say in the Church of God,
there is the Arke of his Testament, there is
the new and spirituall Laws, and Ordinances
of God contained; Now then this follows
upon the sounding of the seventh Trumpet,
That the Temple of God is opened in heaven;
that is, that the Church of God which
before seemed to be shut up, and to lye in
obscurity, now it shall be opened, that is, be
more fully discovered, and manifested openly,ly H8r 111
it shall no longer remaine shut up, and in
obscurity, but it shall be visible, and in it is
seene the Arke of his Testament, among
the Churches, the saints of God, is to
be seen the Law, and Ordinances of God set
up in Majesty, and purity; I say, it is to be
seen, it no longer remaines in doubt what the
Laws and Ordinances of God are; but in
his Temple, in his Church they are to be
seen under the sounding of this 7th Trumpet.

Thus much concernes and is peculiar only
to saints, but that which followes concernes
the enemies of Christ, which is in
these words; “and there were voices, and
lightnings, and thunderings, and an earthquake,
and great haile”
: these words are to expresse
terrible things to come upon the opposers
of Christ: the like words are used,
Rev. 8. 5. To expresse the terrible Judgements
of God, that were to come upon his
enemies in the sounding of the trumpets, in
answer to the prayers of Saints, which are
there mentioned to be presented before God:
and wee know that thundrings, and lightnings,
and haile, is usually very sad and
dreadfull weather: and earthquakes, and
voices, are very sad and amazing things.
Now such terrible, dreadfull, and amazing things H8v 112
things doe come upon Antichrist, and his
adherents, upon the sounding of the seventh
Trumpet, which will prove exceeding
dreadfull, distracting, and destructive to
them: and this shall be when the saints shall
be in greater freedome, and liberty, and
glory, and splendor then ever they were;
and when nothing shall disquiet them, for
these tempests must come upon the wicked:
To them there will be earthquakes, but there
shall be none among the Saints, no earthquakes
in heaven, (the Saints and their societies
are heaven) but Antichrist and his
crew, and conclave is earth, and upon these
come these stormes, and these earthquakes,
but the saints are above the reach of them.

And thus much for the opening of this
latter part of the eleventh Chapter of the
Revelation, which I have the more fully
and distinctly opened, as it now came in my
way, in the cleering of this truth in hand,
because I have already opened all the former
part from the first verse to the fifteenth
where I now began; so that now I have opened
the whole Chapter.

And now in all these thirteen severall
Scriptures which I have produced (and opened
as there was need) is this truth which in I1r 113
in this twenty seven verse of this seventh of
Daniel is asserted or made as cleare as the
Sun.

And having thus cleared this truth in generall,
(which I have done the more fully,
to be a foundation to what I have in the following
part of the discourse to discover.)
There are now severall queries that may be
made, about severall things which are such as
these.

How and by what meanes shall the kingdomes
of this world come to bee possessed by
Christ and his Saints?

Whether at all the material sword shall be
made use of in the cutting downe the power
of men?

When Christ shall begin to take the kingdoms
of the world into his possession?

Whether or no he shall take them into his
possession all at once? or when shall the
time be when the work shall be compleatly
finished?

Whether multitudes of the Gentiles shall
not bee first brought into the beliefe of the
Gospel, and the obedience of Christ? and
when the Jews shall be called?

Whether at the time of Christs taking the
whole world into his possession, hee shall I not I1v 114
not personally appeare on earth?

Whether his saints that have been sufferers
for his sake, shall not then be raised and reign
on earth?

Whether or no the world shall then bee
burnt with fire?

Whether temporary enjoyments shall bee
enjoyed by saints when Christ shall take the
world into his possession?

Whether the Saints shall then practice any
ordinances?

How long this Kingdome of Christ is to
continue? and what is to succeed it?

Now to all these questions I shall give full
and cleere answers: which that I may do
the more cleerely, and without confounding
of one thing with another; I shall
not observe that method of answering them
particularly as they are laid downe, but
(which will bee more cleare, and pleasant,
and satisfactory when it is done) I shall give
a generall description of the state of the
Church, from the Yeere 1645, already past,
unto the day of the last generall resurrection.
In which description of all these Queries, and
many others which might be made, shall bee
answered.

Now the description or map of this new world I2r 115
world, from the first entrance into it, unto
the utmost borders of it, as farre as I have
yet discovered, (or rather hath been discovered
to me from the Scripture,) in my
weake travels, inquiries, searches into it; followes
after this short preface.

The Preface.

“When the Lord shall build up Psal. 102.
16.

Sion”
(saith the Psalmist then)
“hee shall appeare in his glory”:
Implying, as if the Lord did never appeare so
gloriously as then he doth, when he standeth
forth to build up his Sion: And indeed it is
very true, that when the Church of God is
in a desolate afflicted condition; when the
enemies of the Church triumph over them,
and make them as vassals, and slaves to
them, and tread them under their feet, as if
they were the off-scouring of the world:
then is the glory of God much obscured, and
the world cannot at all see it, nor is it so visible
to his Saints as it shall be.

But when God arises to shake terribly the
earth, and to visit the inhabitants thereof
for their iniquity; especially for the cruelty,
and malice, and inhumanity, they have exercisedI2 cised I2v 116
against his own people, his peculiarly
beloved ones, who bear his owne stampe,
and image, and name and nature; of whose
soules he is the beloved, and who are the beloved
of his soule. Then when he commeth
to visit wicked men for these things, and to
owne his owne people, (as he did the Israelites
of old when hee brought them out of
Egypt,) and to manifest to all the world
that they are indeed his people, and that hee
comes to rebuke, destroy, and scatter the
Kings, and the great ones of the earth for
their sakes; and when he sets his people at
perfect liberty, and crownes them with gracious
blessings, and destroyes all the Nations
that indeavour to injure them, or disturbe
their peace. Then I say, when the
Lord doth these things, doth hee appeare in
his glory; and so hee did when he brought
the Isrealites out of Egypt; and so in a more
glorious manner then ever will he do, when
he buildeth his Sion now in these latter
daies; wherein hee hath spoken of doing
greater things for them, then ever hath been
done from the beginning of the world, as will
appear in the following discourse.

The I3r 117

The description of the new
Jerusalem.

That I may set out the more cleerly what
the condition of the Church shall be in
these glorious times; it will bee requisite,
that I briefly take notice of the condition
the Church before this time hath been in, as
the Holy Ghost hath declared it in Scripture:
of which having already spoken in my
discourse, on the former part of the eleventh
Chapter of the Revelation, (and also hinted
at it in the beginning of this Book;) I shall
therefore here but nominate some particulars,
to which I will referre the Reader,
that so I may avoid unnecessary prolixity:
Onely necessity compels me for the cleere
and orderly proceeding in this present discourse,
to recapitulate some particular
heads of that, of which I have already more
largely discourst: as thus,

I have shewed that the beloved people of
God, (stiled by the Holy Ghost, The Holy
City, The two witnesses, The Olive trees,
and The two Candlesticks: who witnesse
too and prophesie the truths of Christ,) have
for above 1200 yeares by divine appointmentI3 ment I3v 118
and decree been kept in a low condition,
in a despicable, sackcloath, mourning,
wildernesse-condition: and that so long they
have been warred against, and overcome by
the Beast the Pope, and his crew, I have
shewne; and that the ten Kings under the
Popes Jurisdiction have been of one mind
with him in this, trampling upon, and persecuting
the Saints, and that for this end
have the ten Kings given their power to the
Beast.

I have also shewed that the King of
England was one of those that was of one
mind with the Beast: and that having one
mind with the Beast he persecuted the saints,
and made war against them, and overcame
them for a season as the Beast did.

I have shewed also that the time of this
prevalency of the Beast, and the Kings under
him over the Saints, and making war
against them, and overcoming them, was
a limited, prefixed time: and that beyond it
they could not go, nor have the power to overcome
the Saints after that time was expired.

I have also shewed how long time it was
that the Scripture declares that the Beast and
his Associates should have power to persecutecute I4r 119
the Saints, and prevaile over them, and
that was 1260. years, after which terme was
expired they were to prevaile no more.

I have also shewed when that time expired,
and that was in the yeare 16451645.

And now I proceed from this yeare to describe
the state of the Church.

In this yeere, as I have said did the time of
prevalency of the Beast and his Associates
over the saints cease: and though those enemies
of the Saints do not cease to be after
this yeare; but they do and shall remaine
yet longer, yet they cease to overcome the
Saints, and instead of prevailing they shall
be prevailed against; and instead of overcomming
they shall be overcome by the
saints. I say not that they shall never any
more make war against the Saints in these
three Nations, nor in France, nor Spaine, or
Portugall, or Germany, or any of the other
Kingdomes, or any part of the world; but
this I say, they shal never any more overcome
them in war. They shall no more tread them
under feet; for it was but 1260. Rev. 13.
5, 7.

years that the Beast was to make
war against the Saints, so as to overcome
them, and that time is expired, and in this
yeare 16451645. did it come to a period, at the I4 expi- I4v 120
expiration whereof the Lord appeared in his
glory, and raised up his Saints out of their
low condition, and gave them to overcome
their enemies, and to go on by Jesus Christ
their great Lord Generall, conquering, and
to conquer: causing them to tread downe
strength, to overcome the little Horne, giving
him into their hands, causing them to
do justice upon him andhis Associates, and
to overcome all that rise up against them:
(This hath already been done, and now to
describe what is to succeed as the Scripture
declares it, thus) and now must they go on
hence-forward to get victory over the Beast.

Of the overcomming of the ten Kings.

And as the Lord Jesus hath by his Saints
already begun with that little Horne, who
came up in the room of three of the ten
Kings: so he will go on to overcome all the
Kings, as appeares, Rev. 17. where at the
14. ver. it is said, that the ten kings while they
were under the Beast should make war with
the Lambe, and this we know they did; for as
the Beast made war with the Lambe, and
with his saints, so did the ten Kings also,
they gave up their power and strength unto
him; but what followes? “They shall make war I5r 121
war with the Lambe, and the Lambe shall
overcome them.”

But here it may be questioned, how the
Lambe shall overcome them? And in what
way? And by what meanes?

To which I answer, The meanes by which the
Lambe will overcome the
ten Kings.

That as they are making
war with the
Lambe, (for in making
war with his saints, they do make war
with the Lambe,) the Lambe shall overcome
them; we know how the late King
made war with the Lambe, and how the
Lambe overcame him; we see now how the
King of Scots is making war with the Lamb,
and how the Lambe is overcoming him; and
so when the rest of the Kings shall make war
with the Lambe, shall the Lamb overcome
them; that is plainly thus, the Lamb shall
overcome the ten Kings that make war with
him in his Saints, by being in, and among,
and with the Armies of his Saints, subduing
their enemies before them; and as this is
cleere by what he hath already done, so also
is it cleare in this very Scripture that speakes
of the Lambe his overcomming of them:
thus, “And they shall make war with the Lamb,
and the Lamb shall overcome them: for he is King I5v 122
King of Kings, and Lord of Lords; and
they that are with him are called, and chosen,
and faithfull”
; where it is clear, that when
the ten Kings make war with the Lambe,
and that he being Lord of Lords, and King
of Kings overcomes them, that his servants
that are called, and chosen and faithfull, attend
him, and are his instruments in this businesse;
else why are they said to be with
him when he doth that worke? But it cleerly
implies, that by the Armies of his saints he
doth it: as in the 19. of the Revelation it is
said (that when he commeth to destroy the
Beast, and) that in righteousnesse he doth
judge and make war; that in that war also
the armies in heaven (or of his saints) followed
him, so that the Lord Jesus is the great
Lord Generall that goeth forth to overcome
the ten Kings, and his saints, his choice, called,
and faithfull ones, are the Armies that
follow him.

The lawfulness of fighting against the enemies
of Christ with the materiall sword cleared.

But some may here object or say, is it lawfull
or warrantable for saints under the Gospell
to fight upon such an account? Doth not
the Gospell require them to live peaceably? and I6r 123
and not to avenge their own quarrell, but to suffer
patiently the wrongs done unto them,
and whosoever smites themon the one
cheeke to turne to him the other also, and
to blesse them that curse them, and to do
good to them that dispitefully use them, and
persecute them; and are not saints appointed
to a suffering condition in this world,
now under the Gospell especially? and saith
not the Apostle that he who would live godly
in Christ Jesus must suffer persecution?
and seeing these things are so, how can it
be lawfull for saints to fight to maintaine
their own peace, and to preserve themselves
from suffering at the hands of those that
would persecute them, and do them
wrong?

To which I answer, first that it is indeed
true that saints should be meek, and peaceable,
and suffer wrongs, and do good for
evill in their own private cases, they are not
to avenge themselves: and I beleeve they
will not, but rather than render evill for
evill, will do good for evill; but yet withall
we are to consider, that this is as true,
that those saints that are Magistrates are indispensibly
bound to do justice upon Rom. 13.
4, 5.

evill doers, and that those saints which I6v 124
which are subjects to be subject to those
Magistrates in all just commands; and this
being not denied (as it cannot be denied)
then it follows, that if a Godly Magistrate
hath some that are evill doers under him, as
that are theeves, or robbers, or murtherers,
or the like, it is his duty to do justice upon
them: for he is appointed of God for that
end, to be an encouragement to them that
do well, and for the punishment of evill doers,
that justice may take place, and that he
suffer none of his people under him to be injured
or wronged that would live peaceably
and Godly; and if such a Magistrate should
neglect to do his duty in this case it would be
his sin: and he would not answer the end
for which he is ordained of God. This being
so, then if the case be so, as that an Army
of injurious men should rise up, either
within the territories of good Magistrates,
or without, thus to rob, and spoile, and kill
their subjects; they are to command such
of their subjects as they think fit, to suppresse
those evill doers, and if possibly they can to
prevent them from injuring, and wronging,
and spoyling those people whom they are to
protect: and their subjects ought to obey
them in these their just commands: for it is the I7r 125
the duty of godly people to obey their superiours
in all lawfull things; and now these
things may be done by Magistrates, and people
now under the Gospell; and yet they
may inviolably observe those rules, in respect
to their own private cases; of suffering
patiently the wrongs that are done unto
them, and loving their enemies, and doing
good to them that hate them: These things
may they do, and yet ought they not to leave
the other undone.

But this may by the way bee considered,
that there hath been times when there was
never a good Magistrate in the world; and
then was it the duty of Saints to bee wholy
passive, and observe the forementioned rules
of patient suffering.

But when providence so orders it, as to
place in authority godly men; then wee see
it cleer, that they should neglect their duty,
if they should not protect those that do well,
from the wicked cruelties of evill doers:
and thus the objection is answered, and it
is cleer, that it is lawfull in Gospel times for
Saints to fight against such as would murther,
and destroy them (as the Associates of
the Beast would.) Nay, it is not onely lawfull
to do it, but it would bee their sinne if they I7v 126
they should not doe it. Godly Magistrates
would sin if they did bear the sword in vain,
and did not punish evill doers: and godly
subjects would sinne, if they shouldnot obey
the Magistrate when hee requires them to
do this lawfull thing; which is to bee assistant
to him in punishing of evill doers:
and thus have I answered this sufficiently,
if I should not adde any thing else in answer.

But secondly, in answer to such as make
this objection; that though it be true that
the Apostle saies, that those that will live
godly in Christ Jesus must suffer persecution;
and it was a truth in the Apostles time, and
hath been so for almost this sixteen hundred
yeeres, since that the Saints have suffered
persecution, either from the Roman Beasts
the Emperours, or the Roman Beasts the
Popes, or those that have acted by authority
from them: yet it doth not follow, that
this will alwaies hold a truth, that the saints
shall be alwaies sufferers: but the contrary
is cleer, and I know none that deny it; but
that as the Saints have had a suffering time,
so they shall have a time of deliverance, and
freedome from suffering; and the rod of the
wicked shall not always rest upon the lot of the I8r 127
the righteous; but God will
(though he have borne Luke 18.
7.
long)
at last avenge the quarrell of
his people upon their enemies:
and though for this 1500 or 1600 yeers, God
(having appointedhis people thus long to a
suffering condition,) he never called his people
to do justice upon their enemies, as hee
did his people of old oftentimes under the
Law, (as in the time of Joshua, and of the
Judges, and David, &c.) Yet it followes
not but that hee may do it now: For it is no
where said that now in the latter daies, when
the time of the Saints deliverance commeth,
that they shall not by the sword (as Israel of
old did,) subdue the enemies of God, which
are also their enemies.

I say it is no where said they shall not so do,
but in severall places it is said that they shall
so doe, as in that knowne place in the 149
Psalme, (which never was yet so eminently
fulfilled as it shall be in these latter daies,)
Where the Psalmist in expresse termes sais,
that the Saints shall execute vengeance upon
the heathen, and punishment upon the people;
and bind their Kings in chaines, and
their Nobles in fetters of iron; and execute
upon them the judgement written. And doubt- I8v 128
doubtlesse the time is comming, wherein
the Saints in a most glorious manner shall
have the honour to doe these things: And
this is cleer likewise in the 110 Psalme,
where the Psalmist speakes expressely of the
time, when the enemies of Christ shall bee
made his footstoole, as appeares in the first
verse; “The Lord said unto my Lord, sit at my
right hand untill I make thine enemies thy
footstoole.”
Now Jesus Christ when he ascended
up to Heaven, is said there to sit at the
right hand of God, Mark 16. 19. and there
he sitteth, and there hee must sit, untill the
time come that all his enemies be made his
footstoole (sais the Psalmist.) And in the
fifth verse, speaking of that time, when they
shall be made his footstoole, he speakes thus,
“The Lord at thy right hand,” (that is, the Lord
Christ at the right hand of God) shall strike
through Kings in the day of his wrath, and he
shall judge among the heathen, and fill the places
with dead bodies, and wound the heads over
many Countries.”
This is a great work that
he will doe, wound the heads over many
Countries, strike through Kings in his wrath;
but what instruments shall the Lord Jesus
use in doing these things, he being at the right
hand of God? that is answered in the second and K1r 129
and third verses, “The Lord shall send the rod of
thy strength out of Sion, — and thy people shal be
willing in the day of thy power.”
Here it is cleer
that the sons of Sion, are & shal be the Lords
instruments, the rod of his strength, and they
shall be willing in this day of Christs power.

Another very cleer place to this purpose,
wee have, Esa. 54. 15, 16, 17. The whole
Chapter is a Prophesie of the happy estate
of the Church in these latter daies: But that
which is observable to this purpose, is in
these words; “In righteousnesse thou shalt bee
established, thou shalt bee far from oppression,
for thou shalt not feare, and from terror for it
shall not come neer thee.”
But how shall this
be? shall they have no enemies at all to oppresse
them, nor terrifie them? yes, they
shall have enemies, but they shall have no
power to oppresse them: nay, they shall not
so much as be any feare, or terror at all unto
them; such confidence shall they have that
they shall overcome them; for so it follows
in the next verse. “Behold they shall gather together,
but not by me; whosoever shall gather
together against thee, shall fall for thy sake――
and no weapon that is formed against thee
shall prosper; and every tongue that shall rise
against thee in judgement, thou shalt condemn. K This K1v 130
This is the heritage of the servants of the
Lord, and their righteousnesse is of me, saith
the Lord.”
Thus its cleer, that though the
Church in these times have enemies, and
though these enemies doe gather together,
and rise up against them, yet Saints shall not
feare them, nor at all bee terrified by them.
Why? The Lord hath promised, that all
their enemies shall fall before them, and
though they make weapons and fight against
the Saints, yet they shall not prosper;
But the Saints shall overcome them in all
the battels they fight.

Againe, that the Saints shall in these latter
daies, be the instruments of Christ in
subduing his enemies, is cleere, as in the
fourteenth and sixteenth verses of the seventeenth
of the Revelation, and in the nineteenth
Chapter; so also in the sixth verse of
the 18 Chapter, where the Lord gives
an expresse commission and command to his
people, to execute his just vengeance upon
his and their enemies, in these words; “Come
out of her my people,――and reward her, even
as she hath rewarded you, and double unto
her double according to her workes: in the
cup which she hath filled, fill to her double;
how much she hath glorified her selfe and livedved K2r 131
deliciously, so much torment and sorrow
give her: And thus much in answer to this
objection.”

Thus have I shewne that the Lambe having
raised his Saints, hath in part overcome,
and is going on to overcome the ten Kings;
in which he will make use of his saints as his
instruments.

And now I am to go on to declare, How the ten
Kings shall
so imbrace
Christ, as they
shall hate the
whore.

that as the ten Kings or
Kingdomes, (for it is not the
Kings alone but the Kingdomes
also that hee will overcome)
shall be subdued by the Lambe and his saints:
So will he so poure out his spirit upon the
people of those Kingdomes, as they shall
not unwillingly, (I meane many of them, or
at least such a part as shall rule the rest in
those Kingdomes) but willingly yeeld obedience
to him that hath subdued them: and
that in love to him. And this appeares in
the sixteenth verse; “And the ten
hornes which thou sawest upon
the Beast, these shall hate the
whore, and make her desolate, and naked, and
shall eat her flesh, and shall burne her with
fire.” Rev. 17.
Thus, those that were once one with
the Beast, when they are overcome by the K2 Lamb, K2v 132
Lambe, shall have such cleer light given to
them to discover truth; and shall be so freed
from the smoake of the bottomlesse pit,
which is in the Beasts Kingdome: and
shall have such cleere light given to them,
as they so cleerly see the delusions, and the
abominable filthy practices of the Babylonish
crew, as their hearts shall rise against
them, and they shall loathe and hate them;
and then shall willingly, and freely yeeld
obedience to the Lamb that overcame them,
and ruine that cursed City Rome, which is
stil’d the Whore, the Mother of Harlots
and abominations of the Earth. Of this
destruction of Rome I shall speake more fully
in its place: But first I must declare what
things must precede it; for about these
daies, when the Kings (or Kingdomes) are
thus overcome, and also converted and enlightned,
and before the ruine of Rome, the
Gospel shall be preached universally unto all
Nations, and Kindreds, and Tongues, and
People, which doubtlesse will bee effectuall
to the bringing in of multitudes, both Jews
and Gentiles, the manner of which I should
here proceed, cleerly and particularly to describe;
but before I proceed any further therein,
I shall make a little necessary digression.

For K3r 133

For first, I must Jesus Christ in the yeare
16451645. began to take his
Kingdome.

make it to appear, that
Jesus Christ in the
yeare 16451645. began to
take his Kingdome, and this I shall cleare, to
the end we may the more orderly proceed
in describing what is to follow.

Now that it is so, appeares Rev. 11. where
it is said, that when the witnesses are raised,
that then the seventh Trumpet was sounded,
and then it is expresly said, that “the kingdomes
of this world are become the Kingdoms
of our Lord and of his Christ: and he shall
reign for ever and ever.”
Thus expresly is it
said to be done upon the resurrection of the
witnesses, and before all his judgements are
powred out upon his enemies, some of
which are mentioned in the following verses,
And so in this 27. verse of this seventh
Chapter of Daniel it is said, that when the
time, times, and halfe a time are come to an
end, and the little Horn is overcome by the
Saints, that immediately upon this, “the Kingdome,
and Dominion, and the greatnesse of the
Kingdome under the wholeheaven shall be given
to the people of the Saints of the most
High; whose Kingdome is an everlasting
Kingdome: and all Rulers shall serve and obey
him.”

K3 But K3v 134

But it may be objected, how can this be
said to be so, seeing that we see the great
Monarchs of the world, or the toes of the
4 Monarchs (mentioned Dan.2.) among
whom the world is divided, do yet possesse
most of the severall Dominions under the
whole heaven: these only of England and
Ireland excepted; and they do not any of
them stoope to the Scepter of Christ, nor to
his Government, but they do exclude it
wholly, and rule according to their own tyranicall
wils and pleasures?

To this I answer, That although we see
not yet those many Kingdomes and Dominions
of the world subjected unto Christ; yet
this may be true notwithstanding, and will
appeare, if we consider that the Kingdome
of Christ in the beginning of it (in the second
of Daniel) is said to be a stone cut out
of the Mountaine without hands, that should
smite the Image upon his feet, and breake
them to peeces: which stone was to become
a glorious Kingdome, and fill the whole
earth; by which appeares, that the beginning
of this Kingdome should be so small as
it should not appeare whence it came, it
should be a stone cut out of the Mountaine,
it should not appeare to be any Mountaine, but K4r 135
but to be a stone at first, but afterwards to
become a great Mountain, and fill the whole
earth; Againe, at first it should appeare as a
stone cut out of the Mountaine without
hands, it should so miraculously appeare at
first as it should seeme to be done without
hands, without the power, or strength, or
help of the Kings, Princes, or Monarchs
of the world; and when the witnesses were
first raised, what help of the strength, and
power of the Kings and Monarchs of the
world had they? What hands assisted them?
Were they not a company of poore weake
despised people in the eyes of the world, that
were indeed but as a little stone cut out of
the Mountaine of the whole world without
hands? and yet this little stone cut out of
the Mountaine without hands must, and undoubtedly
shall smite the Image upon his
feet, and break in peeces the Iron, and the
Clay, and the Brass, and the silver, and the
Gold together, and not cease untill its selfe
become a Mountaine filling the whole earth.
Jesus Christ having begun to take to him his
great power, and to reigne, will not cease
untill he have subjected every Dominion to
his Royall Scepter, and made them to serve
and obey him: which he is going on apace K4 to K4v 136
to do; and will doubtlesse go on swifter
yet; and the neerer he is to the end of his
worke, the swifter is his motion like to
be.

Thus have I digrest from what was in
hand (being to describe the manner of bringing
in of multitudes to the obedience of
Christ) to this end, that notice might be taken
of this along as I go, that what Christ
doth herein, is in order to the becomming a
great mountaine: according to the phrase
of the Prophet; but now to return.

I was shewing, how that when the
Lambe had overcome the ten Kings, that
when the Gospell must be
preached to all nations.
then before the ruine
of Rome, the Gospell
should be universally
Preached unto all Nations; and this is cleer
Rev. 14. In the five first verses of that Chapter
we have a declaration of Jesus Christ
his standing upon mount Sion, his appearing
for to own his people, and of his peoples
being gathered unto him, which are described
to be pure, and undefiled, and redeemed
ones to God, and to the Lord Jesus: and
they are said to be the first fruits, and to follow
the Lambe wheresoever he goeth; implying,
that they are the first of those that were K5r 137
were called to waite upon the Lambe in the
services that he hath to do for them in order
to the setting up of his Kingdome. They
were brought in to him before the everlasting
Gospel was generally preached, and before
the fall of Babylon. They were the first
fruits. Now who are these first fruits that
now stand upon Mount Sion with the Lamb,
and follow him withersoever he goeth?
Doubtlesse, those whom he hath now called
forth to follow him, and those that he will
call out of the rest of the ten Kingdomes.
Well what follows? In the 6, 7, and 8. verses.
“And I saw and Angell flye in the midst of heaven,
having the everlasting Gospell to preach
unto them that dwell on the earth; and to every
nation, and kindred, and tongue, and people:
saying with a loud voice, feare God and give
glory to him; for the houre of his judgement
is come, and worship him that made heaven,
and earth, and the sea, and the fountaines of
waters: and there followed another Angell,
saying, Babylon is fallen, is fallen, that great
City, &c.”
Here we see that before the fall of
Babylon, and yet after the first fruits are come
in to the Lambe, the Gospell must be preached
to all Nations: and doubtlesse, glorious
and wonderfull will be the proceedings of Jesus K5v 138
Jesus Christ in the world, now that he hath
begun to take the Kingdomes and Dominions
thereof into his possession; he hath done
great things in some Kingdomes already, and
he will do the like in others shortly; and will
powre out his spirit withall unto them, and
so cause the light to appeare unto them, as
shall effectually discover unto them the basenesse,
the viciousnesse, the filthinesse, and the
abominablenesse, of the cursed Doctrines of
the Beast, and the whore: and cause them
to loath them, and to publish and manifest
their dislike and hatred of them to all the
world: and with much zeale and fervency
of spirit will all such as shall bee enlightened,
and thereunto qualified, preach
and publish the cleare truths of the Gospell,
in opposition to the false Doctrines of Antichrist,
in all parts of the world, and unto all
nations: discovering also unto them the
glad tidings of the Gospell, to the saving of
their soules, and the turning of them from
Idols and vanities to serve the true and living
God.

Of K6r 139

Of the Jews Conversion.

And by this meanes way will be made
for the bringing in of the Jewes, who
are at this day earnestly expecting of, and
waiting for the comming of the Messias;
Christ the anointed to bee their King, their
Saviour, and their Prophet: But before
the ten Kings doe hate the Whore, and before
they manifest to all the world a detestation
of her, they cannot come in; but
then shall the everlasting Gospell be preached
to all Nations, Jewes and Gentiles; and
a spirit of zeale, for Christ will bee then upon
the Saints, so as they shall not bee able to
withhold from preaching the Gospel more
generally in all the world.

But if now any faithfull and able Minister
of the new Covenant, which is the
Ministration of life, and the Ministration of the K6v 140
the Spirit; should goe and preach Jesus
Christ
unto the Jewes, and publish glad tidings
to them, and tell them that the Messias
is come, and that Jesus Christ is he who
will bee their King, and Lord, and Prophet,
and Saviour, and will save them from all
their sinnes, if they beleeve in him; and
that he will restore all things to them, and
do glorious things for them; alas! they
would scarce now say of such, “Blessed is hee
that commeth in the Name of the Lord”
: and
why? because they cannot beleeve, that
the Lord Jesus Christ in whom we beleeve,
and rejoyce and glory; and who is our
light, and life, and peace, and joy, and
strength, and all in all; is indeed the Messias,
and the Saviour of all the ends of the
earth, as we know, and beleeve he is: and
why cannot they beleeve it? because that
great Whore, the City of Rome, who
pretends to have power over all
What is the present
let of the
Jewes cunversioon.
that are called Christians, is
such a filthy, abominable, hatefull
strumpet; such a mother
of harlots, andabominations.
Whereas the Jewes keep close to the
Old Testament, and to the Law contained
therein, which is holy, just, and good: And they K7r 141
they know, and are assured in the Old Testament,
that when the Messias comes, hee
will turne away ungodlinesse from Jacob;
he will cleanse them from all their corruptions,
and all their waies that are not good;
and that they that are his shall be a holy people,
a people taught of God: and therefore
they cannot beleeve him to be the true Messias,
whom such polluted, openly profane,
and impudently filthy creatures, as the Romanists
are, professe to bee their Saviour.
For besides many others, there are five
things especially, which the Jews take
offence at, in the practises of that cursed
crew: as

First, their worshipping of Images, and
statues, and crosses, and crucifixes, and such
like trumpery.

Secondly, their loathsome, hatefull, and
excessive giving up of themselves unto uncleane
lusts; tolerating and allowing themselves,
and others in them; as in fornication,
adultery, sodomie, and beastiality;
practises which the very heathen abhor: and
yet these abominable sins the Popes, Cardinals,
Bishops, and Priests, and others of all
ranks are frequent in the practice of: granting
liberty to all that are under their jurisdictions,ons K7v 142
to live in the practice of them; if they
do but purchase a pardon, with mony from
the Pope for them.

Thirdly, frequent murthers, teaching it to
be no sin to murther an Hereticke, and tolerating
such as are murtherers.

Fourthly, Their tolerating of drunkenness,
and oaths.

Fifthly, Their allowing of sorcery, and
witchcraft: most of their Priests being sorcerers.

For these things especially, but for many
others also are the Jewes offended, and cannot
beleeve him to be the true Messias that
shall be the Saviour of such prophane persons;
for they are assured that such persons
cannot be the people of God: They know
that Adulterers, and Idolaters, and Sorcerers,
and Murtherers, and Swearers, and Lyers
shall not enter into the Kingdome of God.
Not shall come into his holy
Ps. 15. 1, 2.
and 24, 2, 4.
Hill, sais David, but such as
have cleane hands, and a pure
heart; and this they know, and
therefore do hate the Popish crew.

But when the Lamb shall have overcome
the ten Kingdomes, and shall have put
them into a new frame and posture: and when K8r 143
when his glory shall be wonderfully seen
among his people, and all the world shall
heare how gloriously he shall manifest himselfe
among them; in giving of his people
miraculous victories over, and unheard of
successe against the Beast and his Associates,
and that in such a wonderfull manner as the
like hath not been heard of; and when the
Jews shall heare of this, and heare how the
Kingdomes are fallen from the Beast; and
how they loath those abominable practises
with a perfect hatred; and how that they
do all set themselves against that cursed company;
and intend to make them desolate,
and utterly to destroy them as the enemies of
him who is the true Christ. At this time, I say,
way will be made for the bringing of them
in, and then the Gospel in the purity of it shall
be preached unto them: being wholly freed
from the imbasing mixtures of Romes inventions,
and the pure Gospell of Jesus Christ
shall in the preciousnesse, and sweetness, and
glory of it, be cleerly held forth unto them, and
they then will begin to be convinced, seeing
that our Lord Jesus Christ doth manifest his
wrath and displeasure against that prophane
sort of men, and ruines them, and destroyes
them, and takes vengeance on them, for all their K8v 144
their abominations that they have committed,
and all the murthers, and cruelties that
they have exercised upon his holy people,
whom now he ownes, and gloriously goes
on to save them with outward and externall
salvation, as well as inward; and giving of
them to tread upon the necks of their enemies,
and to be exalted above the Nations:
Then, I say, cleere way will be made for
them to be brought in, and to beleev the
Lord Jesus to be indeed their King, and Saviour,
and Prophet, and to give themselves
to him, and to his protection; and when
they shall thus do, they shall have the spirit
abundantly poured out upon them; and they
shall bemoane themselves for their folly, in
that they have so long rejected Jesus Christ:
and shall then look upon this Jesus whom
they have pierced, and shall mourne for him
as for an only son, as appeares, Zach. 10. and
that Scripture seems to import, that such
shall be the spirit of grace, and supplication,
and so strongly shall that spirit work in them,
as they shall therein exceed us; for grace
shall be so powerfull, and love shall worke
so wonderfully in them, and so melt their
hearts, as that they shall be so deeply afflicted
for their having rejected Jesus Christ, as L1r 145
as they shall be in bitternesse, as one that
is in bitternesse for his first borne; and
being so in good earnest, it is said that each
soule shall mourne apart.

And for the manner Of the admirable manner
in which the Jews
shall be converted.

of this their unfaigned
conversion,
the Holy Ghost
speakes, as if this worke should be done
very suddenly, and very admirably, as appeares,
Isa. 66. 7, 8. “Before Sion travelled
shee brought forth; before her paine came
she was delivered of a manchild; who hath
heard such a thing? Who hath seen such a
thing? Shall the earth be made to bring
forth in one day? shall a Nation be brought
forth at once? For as soon as Sion travelvled
she brought forth her children”
; Here
it is clearely implyed, that the work shall
be very admirable, and be very suddenly,
strangely, and unexpectedly done. It shall
be done as it were before any work is visibly
begun, and before those ordinary preparations
to such a worke, that do use to
precede the same work in others, at other
times, when others have been begotten
and borne to Christ, there hath been a long L travel- L1v 146
travelling in birth for them before they
have been brought forth, and the paines,
and the pangs of the new birth do ordinarily
precede the bringing of it forth, in
some more, in some lesse, in all some;
but here it is said, “Before she travelled she
brought forth, before her paine came she
was delivered.”
O what a wonderfull!
what an admirable thing is this! and therefore
in the next verse it followes by way
of admiration, who hath heard such a
thing! who hath seen such a thing! as if
it had been said, this is a thing which hath
not been heard of, these are things that
never have been seen; and can ye beleeve
such things? Shall the earth be made to
bring forth in one day? Shall a Nation be
borne at once? And shall these things be
so indeed? Yea, they shall: for it follows,
“As soone as Sion travelled she brought
forth her Children.”
The worke of the
birth of a Nation shall be very sudden. “The
earth shall bring forth in one day.”

Zion no sooner travelled but she brought
forth her Children; it was so soon, and
her travell so quickly over, as it may in
comparison of others, be said to be no tra- L2r 147
travell, but to be done before travell, and
before paine came; a paralell place to
this we have Isa. 49. Where the Lord
sais, that though Sion said, “my Lord hath
forsaken me,”
and “the Lord hath forgotten
me”
: that yet he had not forgotten
them, but they were graven upon the
palmes of his hands: and that their wals
were continually before him: and that
the time should come when he would
wonderfully enlarge them; and therefore
saies in the 20. verse, “The children
which thou shalt have after thou hast lost
the other, shall say againe in thine eares: the
place is too straight for me, give place to me
that I may dwell.”
And at the 21. verse,
“Then shalt thou say in mine eares, ‘who hath
begotten me these? I have lost my children,
and am desolate, a captive, and removing
to and fro, and who hath brought up these?
behold I was left alone; these where they?’”
It
is a broken expression (for thsere is no other
word added in the HebHebrew: to, “where they?”)
shewing amazedness at the miraculousnes
of the thing. It shal be of such a sudden, that
those multitudes shall be brought in, after
the Churches being desolate, a Captive, L2 and L2v 148
and being removed to and fro, up and
down at the pleasure of tyrants: when
her children seemed to be all lost, and none
of the Sons of Sion could as it were visibly
appeare: that she shall say in her
heart, “who hath begotten me these?” Or
“how came I so suddenly to have so many
Children? Who hath brought them up?”

Or “what shall I say? Where they? What
a miracle is it that I should have such a
multitude of Children, on such a sudden,
after my desolated, captivated, and wandering
condition?”
Thus in these Scriptures
it appeares that this worke shall be
very sudden, in a very short time it shall
be done: a Nation shall be borne at once:
and the Earth shall bring forth in a day:
which implies a very short time; but
to confine it to a naturall day, consisting
of 24 houres, I see no reason nor necesity
of so understanding it; but it is usuall in
the Scripture to account a day for a yeere,
and of more then so, of necessity we
may not understand it: because the holy
Ghost hath here so many emphaticall expressions
to set out the suddennesse of it:
as that it shall be sudden beyond what hath L3r 149
hath been heard of; “Who hath heard such a
thing?”
And that it shall be done so suddenly,
as that those usuall preparations that
do precede the same worke in others,
shall scarcely appeare in this; and so sudden
that Sion her selfe is as it were astonished
at the thoughts of it, and looks on
it as that which she cannot imagine how
it came to passe; so that we may rather
take liberty to conclude, that it shall be
indeed done in a naturall ordinary day:
then to conceive that it shall be more than
a yeere (which is a Propheticall day) a doing;
for then it would not be so miraculous,
if it should be yeares a doing; but
miraculous, and unheard of, it shall be
for the suddennesse of it; “As soone as Sion
travelled she brought forth, and a Nation
is borne at once.”
By which Nation as we
may no doubt understand the Nation of
the Jews: so may we unquestionably also
be perswaded, that the fulnesse of the
Gentiles which is to come in with them,
and upon their comming in, is herein also
included, and not at all to be excluded;
for the Scripture speakes as fully every
where for the bringing in of the Gentiles L3 by L3v 150
by multitudes in these latter daies,
as for the Conversion of the
Jewes.

But here some may object and say, it
is true indeed; the Gentiles may not bee
here excluded: for, for any thing appeares
to us, it is the Gentiles onely that
are here spoken of; and wee know no
ground you have to speake particularly of
the bringing in of the Nation of the
Jewes, any more then they have been
brought in already at the first preaching
of the Gospel, when the partition wall
was broken downe between Jewes and
Gentiles; and both were equally alike
received in the favour of God, and made
heires of life by Jesus Christ: Yea even
some of those who had crucified and slain
him; and they being then some of them
converted, were all one with the Gentiles;
and for the most part of them, being
now mixed among the Gentiles, probably
when the Gospell is preached to all
Nations, they may bee converted among
the Gentiles, without any distinction
from the Gentiles.

To which I answer, that though it be L4r 151
be true, that the partition The objections against
the Jewes
conversion removed.

wall is broken downe, that
was between Jewes and
Gentiles, and both were
equally alike received into
the favour of God, and made heires
of life by Jesus Christ: and wee are all
one in Jesus Christ, the Gentiles in uncircumcision
are saved, as well
as the Jews in their circumcision:
“For Rom. 2.
28, 29.
hee is not a
Jew that is one outwardly,
neither is that circumcision which is outward
in the flesh; but hee is a Jew that
is one inwardly, and circumcision is that of
the heart, in the spirit, and not in the letter,
whose praise is not of men, but of God.”

I say, though this bee an undoubted truth,
and that many of the Jewes in the first
preaching of the Gospell were converted,
and not their externall priviledges in being
Israelites, obtained that mercy of
comming to the knowledge of Christ;
but the election obtained it, as the Apostle
expresses it, Rom. 11. 7. And as
there were in Elijahs time, seven thousand
that had not bowed the knee to Baal, L4 (though L4v 152
(though few were visible to Elijah) so
sais Paul, that in his time there were a
remnant of the Jewes, according to the
election of grace, that were saved, ver.
4, 5. of which number himselfe was one,
being an Israelite of the seed of Abraham,
of the Tribe of Benjamin, verse first: and
he withall grants, that the small remnant,
according to the election of Grace being
saved; the rest were blinded, and had a
spirit of slumber upon them, as verses 7,
8. I say though these things bee so, yet
certaine it is, that the Jewes shall bee
distinctly cal’d in these latter daies; and
this appeares here in this eleventh of the
Romans, for at the eleven and twelve
verses, Paul thus expresses himselfe: “I
say then, have they stumbled that they should
fall? God forbid.”
It is as if hee had said,
have they so stumbled that they should
fall so, as not to rise againe? God forbid.
How then doe they fall? and how are
they stumbled? May it bee said to Paul;
Why sais hee, God forbid, that in stumbling
they should have such a fall, as not
to rise any more: No, it is not so; but
through their fall, salvation is come to the L5r 153
the Gentiles; and the Gentiles are thereby
received into the favour of God, and
made heires of the promises, and of the
priviledges, and prerogatives, that are
by Jesus Christ; and they are become
the sonnes and daughters, and people of
the living God. What then, is this done
to exclude those Jewes, who are fallen
through unbeliefe, from ever being received
into our favour againe? No, for saies
the Apostle; through their fall, salvation
is come to the Gentiles. For what end?
To provoke the Jewes to jealousie; so
that there is a time to come, in which by
beholding the glorious estate, in which
the Gentiles are by Jesus Christ, the
Jewes shall bee provoked to jealousie.
And now then sais the Apostle, if the
fall of them, bee the riches of the world;
and the diminishing of them, the riches
of the Gentiles, how much more their
fulnesse? It is as if the Apostle had said;
by the fall of the Jewes salvation is come
to the Gentiles: But this shall bee the
fruit of the Gentiles conversion, the
Jewes shall at last, bee thereby provoked
to jealousie, when this spirit of slumber is L5v 154
is removed from them, (which now is
on them, verse 8) And when they have
received a seeing eye, and a hearing eare
again; then they shall bee provoked to
jealousie, and beholding the salvation, and
glory of the Gentiles, they shall bee moved
with emulation against the Gentiles;
envying, as it were, that they should enjoy
that happinesse, and glory, which
they have lost, and which did belong to
them; and which was in the first place
offered to them: But ô what indignation
will theyhave against themselves,
for their great sin, in rejecting their Lord
and Saviour! and then, saies the Apostle,
when they shall come in, the glory of
the Gentiles will be much augmented:
For saies he, “If the fall of them be the riches
of the World, and the diminishing of them
the riches of the Gentiles; how much more
their fulnesse?”

And at the 15 verse, and so on, the Apostle
doth again cleerly affirm, that those
fallen Jews, shall be againe restored; and
positively saies, “that blindnesse in part, is
hapned to Israel; until the fulnesse of the
Gentiles be come in, and so all Israel”
(that is, L6r 155
is that people that were the natural Olive
branches) shall be saved, and graffed in
againe; as it is written, There shall come
out of Sion a deliverer, and he shall turne
away ungodlinesse from Jacob, for this is
my Covenant unto them when I shall take
away their sins”
; this promise they had,
Isa 59. 20. which the Apostle applies particularly
to them the naturall seed of Jacob,
and therefore of them he saies, as
concerning the Gospell they are now enemies
for your sakes, but as touching the
Election they are beloved for the Fathers
sake, (what more cleere?) For the gifts
and calling of God are without repentance,
so that saies the Apostle, they are an
Elect people, and they are beloved, and
the time shall come when they shall be
called into the bosome of love, for the
gifts and calling of God are without repentance.

And in the 30, 31, 32. verses the Apostle
doth againe argue it out of all doubt,
that they shall againe obtaine mercy;
for saies he, for as ye in times past have
not beleeved, yet have now obtained mercy
through their unbeliefe; even so have
these also now not beleeved, that through your L6v 156
your mercy they also may obtaine mercy:
wherein the Apostle saies thus much; as
your former unbeliefe excluded you not
from mercy, butbutt through their fall you
which once did not beleeve have now obtained
mercy; so they now being in unbeleefe
are in no worse condition than
you once were, and therefore they through
your mercy shall also obtaine mercy; and
so the Apostle layeth down this conclusion,
That God hath concluded them all in
unbeliefe thathe might have mercy upon
all, and thereupon he breaks out into the
admiration of God in these words, “O the
depth of the riches both of the wisdome and
knowledge of God, how unsearchable are
his Judgements, and his waies past finding
out!”
And this I thinke is it sufficiently
cleered by Paul, that the Jewes in particular
are to be called, and that the fulness
of the Gentiles must come in with them;
but I shall adde of many only two witnesses
more to confirme it, and the first shall
be the Prophet Ezekiel, who (Chap. 37.)
under the figure of two stickes, united
into one, clearly declares, that the two
Tribes, and the ten Tribes which were
divided in Rehoboams time, Judah and Ben- L7r 157
Benjamin, remaining under Rehoboam the Son
of Solomon, and the other then Tribes being
rent from them departing unto Jeroboam the
Son of Nebat. I say, Ezekiel declares, that
the two Tribes, and the ten Tribes that
were thus divided under two Kings, should
be againe united under one King, even one
that should come of the seed of David, and
being united they should be one Nation
in the Land upon the Mountaines of Israel,
and one King should be King to them all,
and they should never be divided into two
Kingdomes anymore at all, neither should
they defile themselves any more with their
Idols, and their detestable things, nor with
any of their transgressions. But, saies the
Lord, “I will save them out of all their dwelling
places where they have sinned, and will
cleanse them, so shall they be my people, and I
will be their God, and my servant David
shall be a King unto them, and they shall have
one shepheard; they shall also wake in my
Judgements, and observe my statuutes, and do
them; and they shall dwell in the Land that I
have given unto Jacob my servant, wherein
your fathers have dwelt, and they shall dwell
therein, even they, and their children, and
their childrens children for ever; and my servant L7v 158
servant David shall be their Prince for ever.”

Now the Prophet Ezekiel, we know, prophesied
in the time when the two Tribes
were carries Captives into Babylon, and began
to prophesie in the fifth year of Jehoiakims
Captivity, (the ten Tribes being carried
into Captivity above a hundred and ten
yeares before by Shalmanezer the King of
Assyria, even in the sixth yeare of the reign
of Hezekiah over Judah) and at this time,
when they were thus in Captivity, doth Ezekiel
thus prophesie of their returning againe
to their own Land; but if it shall be said,
that so theydid returne againe after they had
been seventy yeares in Babylon, I answer, it
is true, the two Tribes which were carried
into Babylon did return againe in Ezra’s and
Nehemiah’s time, but we never read of the
returning againe of the ten Tribes which
were carried into Captivity by the King of
Assyria, and scattered into far Countries so
long before the two Tribes were captivated;
for there is nothing at all upon record that
ever they returned into their own Land
againe; but hereis a promise that the Lord
will take the Children of Israel from among
the Heathern whither they be gone, and will
gather them on every side, and bring them into L8r 159
into their own Land; and not only so, but “they
shall never any more be defiled with their Idols
and with their detestable things, nor with any
of their transgressions, but I will save them,
saith the Lord, out of all places wherein they
have sinned, so shall they be my people, and I
will be their God, &c.”
Now, though the two
Tribes did then return, yet was not these
promises made good unto them, being united
with the ten Tribes under one King, and so
to be for ever; nor were those promises
that are in this, and in the 36 Chapter, of
dwelling in all prosperity and peace in their
own Land without ever being molested and
troubled, and those promises of a plentifull
enjoyment of all spirituall and temporall
blessings without being ever any more interrupted
therein, but we know, that though
they that were carried Captives to Babylon
did returne, yet they enjoyed not peace, nor
had those promises made good unto them in
that their returne, but were ever and anon
interrupted in their peace by their enemies
in Ezra and Nehemiah his time; and besides
we find that they were not so cleansed
from their detestable things, and their transgressions,
but the sins of strange wives, of
Sabbath-breaking, andof oppression were found L8v 160
found amongst them in that time, and they
were all the while they possest the land often
exercised with much wars; and at last were
utterly rooted out of their own Land, and
of Jerusalem by the Romans, in the time of
Vespasian the Emperour.

Therefore certainly, these promises being
never yet made good to them, the time
will come (as surely as the word of God is
true) in which these promises shall be made
good unto them, to the uttermost jot of
them.

Another cleer testimony to this truth is given
by the Prophet Zachary, Chap. 10. 6, 7,
8, &c. In these words, “I will strengthen
the house of Judah, and will save the house of
Joseph,”
(here the two Tribes and the ten
Tribes are also particularly mentioned, the
house of Judah and the house of Joseph) “and
I will bring them again to place them, for I
have mercy on them, and they shall bee as
though I had not cast them off; for I am the
Lord their God, and will hear them; and they
of Ephraim shall bee like a mighty man, and
their heart shall rejoyce as through wine, yea
their children shall see it and be glad, and their
heart shall rejoyce in the Lord: I will hisse for
them, and gather them, for I have redeemedmed m1r 161
them, and they shall increase as they have
increased; and I will sow them among the
people, and they shall remember mee in farre
countries, and they shall live with their children,
and turn again, and I will bring them again
out of the Land of Egypt, and gather
them out of Assyria, and I will bring them into
the Land of Gilead, and place shall not bee
found for them―― And I will strengthen
them in the Lord, and they shall walk up and
down in his name, saith the Lord.”
Here are
cleer promises that they should be brought
out of Egypt, and Assyria, and from the far
Countries wither they had bin carried, and
brought into their owne Land again; and
there should be strengthned in the Lord, and
walk up and down in his name: that is, his
name, and feare, and Spirit should bee upon
them; all which shall come to passe in his
due time.

And now by these severall witnesses, it is
evident, that the Jewes in particular shall
be converted and bee distinct from the Gentiles,
under that notion of the anciently beloved
people of God, the seed of Abraham,
Isaac and Jacob, and that they shall possesse
their owne land, even the land given to
their fathers to possesse, the which very manym ny m1v 162
other Scriptures do affirme, which I forbeare
to multiply, as conceiving it needlesse.

And thus having made it cleer, how that
the Jewes shall bee called, I should now
come to speak more fully of the calling of
the yet unconverted Nations of the Gentiles
also: But there is one remarkable thing
which concernes the Jewes, which when
they are converted shall be done, of which a
word or two in this place, and it is this:
That when the Jewes shall be converted and
returne to their owne Land, as the Lord of
old, when hee wrought deliverances for
them, caused them to passe through the red
Sea, ( Exod. 14. 22.) and through that mighty
river, the river Jordan, ( Josh 3.17.) on
dry ground, wherein hee gloriously appeared
unto them: so will hee now also dry up the
tongue of the Egyptian sea, to make way for
them, as appears, Isa. 11.11,12 &c. And it
shall come to passe in that day, that the Lord
shall sethis hand again the second time, to
recover the remnant of his people which
shall be left from Assyria, and from Egypt,
and Pathros, and from Cush, and from Elam,
and from Shinar, and from Hamsth, and
from the Islands of the Sea; and hee shall set
up an Ensigne for the Nations, and shall assemblesemble m2r 163
the out-casts of Israel, and gather together
the dispersed of Judah, from the foure
corners of the earth―― And the Lord shall
utterly destroy the tongue of the Egyptian
sea: and with his mighty winde shall shake
his hand over the river, and shall smite it in
the seven streames, and make men go over
dry-shod; and there shall bee an highway
for the remnant of his people, which shall
bee left from Assyria, like as it was to
Israel in the day that hee came up out of the
Land of Egypt. Here it is plain, that thus the
Lord will utterly destroy the tongue of the
Egyptian Sea, and smite it in the seven
streames, for this very end; that his people,
the people of Israel and Judah, whom
he intends to gather out of the four corners
of the earth, where they have been scattered,
may have way made for them, at least those
of them, that must come that way, who are
in Assyria, that they may come into their
owne Land again. This is plainly asserted
likewise in Isa. 27. 12, 13. “And it shall
come to passe in that day, that the Lord shall
beat off from the chanell of the river unto the
stream of Egypt, and yee shall bee gathered one
by one, O yee children of Israel; and it shall
come to passe in that day, that the great trumpetm2 pet m2v 194164
shall be blown, and they shall come which
were ready to perish in the Land of Assyria,
and the out-casts in the Land of Egypt, and
shall worship the Lord in the holy mount at
Jerusalem.”

This is also a cleere Prophesie of the calling
of the Children of Israel to the obedience
of Christ, their Lord and ours; and
of the bringing of them when they are thus
converted into their owne land; for which
end the river of Egypt is to be beaten off,
that so clear way may be made, for them to
go over dry shod; for when God will work,
who shall let it? and when he will bring his
people to any place, it is not vast and great
rivers that lying in the way shall hinder
it.

But wee finde that when the Nation of
the Jews, and all the seed of Jacob shall again
be converted unto the Lord; that that
great worke shall not be too hard for God to
do, but he will do therein that which shall be
too hard for men to beleeve. As, that a Nation
shall be born at once: That they shall
come to the birth, & be brought forth in one
day: And that before Sion travelleth, before
the Church doth any thing considerable in order
to the converting of a Nation to Christ, it shall m3r 165
shall be done: “Before
she travelled, she brought
forth.” It may bee before any
considerable numbers of
Gospel Ministers are sent
to preach the Gospel to
them, many thonusands may
be converted by the preaching
of one, or few, and the
the spirit be richly poured
out upon them.
These are things
too hard for men to beleeve,
but not too hard
for God to doe: for
when the Lord undertakes
the worke, all
obstructions shall be removed; and the
Lord will suddenly, and wonderfully convert
these Nations; and being converted,
they must be brought into their own land:
and if he will have it done, who, or what
shall let it? If the river of Egypt, even the
tongue of the Egyptian sea be in the way, “he
will beat off from the Chanel of the river, unto
the stream of Egypt; yea he wil utterly destroy
the tongue of the Egyptian sea, and with his
mighty winde, shall shake his hand over the
river, and shall smite it in the seven streames,
and men shall go over dry-shod.”
So that as the
red sea, and the river Jordan, could not hinder
the passage of his people that were to
passe that way, when he brought them out of
Egypt; so neither shall the river of Egypt hindetr
his people now, from their passage into
their own Land.

m3 But m3v 166

But it may bee queried, why should the
river of Egypt bee dried up, to make
way for the Israelites comming unto their
own Land, rather then any other river, that
may lie in their way?

I answer, first, That though the Scripture
mention not the drying up of any river, but
the river of Egypt; yet it doth not follow,
but that there may bee other rivers besides
this dried up, to make way for them, if any
other rivers shall be in their way; although
the Scripture be silent in it, and mention not
particularly any others.

But secondly, the river of Egypt is chiefly
mentioned, as that it shall be dried up, because
that lieth in the way in which they
must come, when they come out of the land
of Assyria, where its probable that greatest
numbers of the Israelites are: for though the
two Tribes may be scattered, and are scattered
in all parts of the world; yet wee know
that the ten Tribes that were first carried
captives into the Land of Assyria, were never
brought forth from thence: so that it is
probable that there may bee, and is a greater
number of the Israelites there, then
in any part of the world besides, and that may m4r 167
may bee the reason why the Scripture,
when it mentions anyparticular places from
whence the Children of Israel shall be gathered,
when they shall bee converted: It doth
chiefly speak of Assyria, as Isa. 11. 11. “And it
shall come to passe, that the Lord shall set his
hand againe the second time to recover the
remnant of his people, which shall be left from
Assyria, and from Egypt, and from Pathros,
and from Cush, and from Elam, &c.”
Here Assyria
is chiefely mentioned; and so again, in
this place, Isa. 27. 12, 13. It is said, “Ye shall be
gathered one by one, O ye children of Israel;
and they shall come which were ready to perish
in the Land of Assyria, and the outcast in the
Land of Egypt, and shall worship the Lord in
the holy Mount at Jerusalem”
: and so againe,
in Zach. 10. 10. “I will bring them again out of
the Land of Egypt, and gather them out of
Assyria, and will bring them into the Land of
Gilead, &c.”
In all these places, Assyria is especially
mentioned, from whence the
Children of Israel must bee brought. And
because of the great number which must
bee brought out of the Land of Assyria,
the river of Egypt is to bee dried up, to
make way for them to come to their owne Land m4v 168
Land; that they may againe inhabite
Jerusalem, and the Mountaines of Israel,
according to the many promises which
are made unto them to that purpose; as
Ezek. 36 2, 3, &c. And Jer 32. 41, 42,
&c.
and Zach. 10. 10. And so much shall
suffice to bee spoken of the conversion of
the Jewes.

Of M1r 161

Of the Gentiles conversion.

And thus having discoursed of the
conversion of the Jews, I now come
to describe also the conversion of the
Gentiles; which about this time, are also abundantly
to be brought in. For so I made it
evident before, out of the fourteenth of the
Revelations, that after the Lamb hath overcome
the ten Kings, or part of them, before
the fall of Babylon, that the everlasting Gospel
is to be preached to all Nations, and Kinreds,
and Tongues, and People. Now as the
preaching of the Gospel at that time, will be
the more effectual upon the Jews, because then
the wickednesses of Babylon shall be declared
against, and detested, and Jesus Christ shall
manifest himself against that wicked crew;
so also will the preaching of the Gospel be the
more effectual upon the Gentiles, because
then the judgements of God will be so terribly
manifested against the Idolatrous, sinful, and M pro- M1v 162
prophane practices of wicked men. For mark,
in that fourteenth of the Revelation, where
it is said, that the everlasting Gospel is to be
preached to all Nations, which shall teach
men to fear God, and to give him glory, and
to turn from Idols, and to worship him that
made the earth, and the sea, and the fountains
of waters; the motive that is given to prevail
with men to receive the Gospel; is this:
(ver. 7.) “Because the houre of his judgement
is come.”
And if we would know what
is meant by the hour of his judgement, it follows
in the eighth verse, “Babylon is fallen is
fallen.”
Herein the judgement of God will be
evidently manifested against prophane ungodly
men, when he comes to ruine that great whore
who corrupted all Nations: So that the light
of the glorious Gospel now shining forth, and
the judgements of God being evidently manifested
against wicked men, doubtless the Nations
that are yet unconverted, shall then also
be abundantly brought in to the obedience of
Christ. And the Scripture everywhere plentifully
speaks of this abundant bringing in of all
Nations; As Isa. 2. 2, 3. “And it shall come
to pass in the last days, that the mountain of
the Lords house shall be established in the
top of the mountains: and what then?”
(not onely M2r 163
onely the Jews nor onely some of the Nations,
but) “all nations shall flow unto it”: and they
shall not come in by drops, scatteringly, one
now, and another then; but they shall come in by
multitudes; they shall flow unto it. That which
comes flowing in, comes in abundantly. Again,
Isa. 60. 1. It is said to the Church, “Arise,
shine: for thy light is come, and the glory of
the Lord is risen upon thee.”
This Chapter
all along describes the rising and shining glory
of the Church: I have already quoted it;
I shall here onely mention those passages in it
that speak to this present purpose. And vers.
3.
It is said, “And the Gentiles shall come to
thy light, and kings to the brightness of thy
rising.”
And vers. 5. “The abundance of the
sea shall be converted unto thee, and the
forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee.”

And vers. 9, 10 11, 14, 15, 16. It’s said that
“the Isles shall wait upon the Lord.” And again
’tis said that the Kings of the Gentiles and the
forces of the Gentiles shall come in to the
Church, and be ready to serve and minister to
it. Again, Isa. 62. 2, 3. where the glory of the
Church is also described, it is said thus to Sion;
“The Gentiles shall see thy righteousness, and
all kings thy glory; and thou shalt be called
by a new name, which the mouth of the Lord M2 shall M2v 164
shall name; and shalt be a crown of glory in
the hand of the Lord &c.”
And, Isa. 49. 23.
“Kings shall be thy nursing fathers, and their
Queens thy nursing mothers: and they shall
bow down to thee with their face toward the
earth.”
And Isa. 66. 12. It’s said that “the glory
of the Gentiles like a flowing stream,”
shall
come into the Church. And vers. 18, 19, 20.
“I will gather all nations and tongues, and
they shall come and see my glory; and I will
set a signe among them, and I will send those
that escape unto the nations, to Tarshish, Pul,
and Lud; to those that draw the bow, to
Tubal, and Javan; to the Isles afar off,
that have not heard my fame, neither have
seen my glory; and they shall declare my
glory among the Gentiles.”
And Zech. 9. 9,
10.
“Rejoyce, O daughter of Sion, behold thy
King cometh unto thee: he is just and having
salvation, and he shall speak peace unto
the heathen, and his dominion shall be even
from sea to sea, and from the river even
to the ends of the earth.”
And Zech. 8. 21,
22, 23.
“The inhabitants of one city shall go
to another, saying, ‘Let us go speedily to pray
before the Lord, and to seek the Lord of
hosts: I will go also.’
Yea many people, and
strong nations shall come to seek the Lord of hosts M3r 165
hosts in Jerusalem, and pray before the
Lord. And in those days men shall take hold
out of all languages in the nations, even
shall take hold of the skirt of him that is a
Jew, saying, ‘We will go with you, for we
have heard that God is with you.’”
Thus the
Spirit of God in Scripture hath cleerly set forth
the conversion of the Gentiles, together with
the Jews, in these several Scriptures that I have
mentioned.

And as it is cleer in these Scriptures; so
there are several other Scriptures, wherein it is
as cleer; but I shall adde onely one more, and
it’s a Scripture that speaks of the conversion
and turning to God of two particular Nations,
which at this day are yet Idolaters, as well
as many others, and in the state of gross darkness
and unbelief; and they are the Egyptians
and Assyrians, Isa. 19. the Prophecy hereof
begins at vers. 18. “In that day shall five cities
in the land of Egypt speak the language
of Canaan, and swear to the Lord of hosts:
one shall be called the city of Heres,”
(or of the
Sun, or of shining glory.) “In that day there
shall be an altar to the Lord in the midst of
the land of Egypt, and a pillar at the border
thereof to the Lord; and it shall be for a
signe, and for a witness unto the Lord of M3 hosts M3v 166
hosts in the land of Egypt: for they shall
cry unto the Lord, because of the oppressors,
and he shall send them a Saviour, and a
great one, and he shall deliver them: and
the Lord shall be known to Egypt, and the Egyptians
shall know the Lord at that day.
Yea, theyshall vow a vow unto the Lord and
shall perform it: and the Lord shall smite
Egypt, he shall smite and heal it: and they
shall return unto the Lord, and he shall be
entreated of them and shall heal them. In
that day there shall be a high-way out of Egypt
to Assyria: and the Assyrians shall
come into Egypt, and the Egyptians into Assyria:
and the Egyptians shall serve with
the Assyrians. In that day shall Israel be
the third with Egypt and with Assyria, even
a blessing in the midst of the land,
whom the Lord of hosts shall bless, saying,
‘Blessed be Egypt my people, and Assyria the
worke of mine hands, and Israel mine inheritence.’”

In this Prophecy it is very cleer, that there is
a time to come, wherein the Jews shall again
be the beloved people of God; for never yet
was there a time, when Israel, Egypt, and
Assyria; were all together at one time acknowledged
to be the people of God: but the time is M4r 167
is coming when it shall be so, when not onely
the Gentiles alone, but the Jews also; and not
onely the Jews alone, but the Gentiles also,
shall be the people of God; and when in
particular, the Egyptians, and the Assyrians,
which are now so deeply involved in darkness,
and blindness, and have no knowledge of
God, shall be a people blessed of the Lord.
For there are in theses verses such expressions as
do plainly and cleerly speak the conversion
of these Nations. As, that the Lord shall
be known to the Egyptians, and the Egyptians
shall know the Lord, and that they shall
engage themselves to theLord; which is expressed
under the terms of swearing to the
Lord, and vowing to the Lord; which do
cleerly hold forth the engaging of their hearts
to the Lord. And again, it is said that the Egyptians
being oppressed shall cry unto the
Lord: but they shall not cry in vain; for in a swer
unto their crying, he shall send them a
Saviour, and a great one; and he shall deliver
them. And besides, it is said that the Egyptians
being smitten of the Lord, shall return,
even to the Lord; and he shall be intreated of
them, and heal them; and that the Egyptians
being thus converted, they shall then, and
therein be in fellowship with the Assyrians, M4 and M4v 168
and the Assyrians with them, and they both
with Israel.

And thus now it is cleer in these several Sciptures,
(as well as in many others, which I forbear
to mention, to avoid prolixity) that the
Gentiles shall be plentifully and abundantly
brought in to the obedience of Christ (whose
dominion must be from sea to sea, from the rivers
unto the ends of the earth) and that not
onely some Nations, but all Nations shall seek
after the Lord; And that not onely the mean,
and inferiour sort of the people of the Nations,
but some of their Kings, and Queens, and the
greatest among them, shall come and see the
glory of the Lord; and become his servants,
and be supports under him to his people:
Kings shall be their nursing fathers, and
Queens their nursing mothers, and bring their
forces to their support: and they not weak
ones, but many people, and strong Nations
(saith Zechariah in the place forementionded)
shall come to seek the Lord of Hosts.

And now having shown, that the preaching
of the Gospel to all Nations is to follow upon
the Lamb his overcoming the ten Kings, and
that this will probably be the time of the
bringing in of Jews and Gentiles, because,
that buy the Lord Jesus his so gloriousy appearingpearing M5r 169
(for his own people, and against that
scarlet whore, Rome, and the beast, and all
that crew) way will be made for the coming
in of Jews and Gentiles. But this by the way
I desire may be taken notice of, That as many
of the Nations as the preaching of the Gospel
shall not prevail with, to bring them in to the
obedience of Christ, (for multitudes, as I have
made it evident, must come in that way) them
shall the sword of Justice subdue, both before,
and at, and after the ruine of Rome. Those
whom the grace of the Gospel, the tenders of
love, and the offers of peace win not: them
vengeance and wrath shall overtake. If they
will not listen to that voice of the Spirit, (that
says to the Kings of the earth, “Be wise now
therefore, O ye Kings, and be instructed, ye
Judges of the earth: kiss the Son, lest he
be angry, and ye perish, &c.”
) then shall he
speak unto them in wrath, and vex them in his
sore displeasure; and he shall break them with
a rod of Iron, and dash them in pieces like a
potters vessel. Thus he will do with the ten
kings, and thus he will afterwards do with the
other Nations. But if any of these ten kings
that yet stand out, shall be overcome by his
love, and by receiving the cleer light of the Gospel,
(for there is no question but those his called,led M5v 170
and chosen, and faithful ones, those first-
fruits whom he hath now called forth, and engaged
in his works, shall, having the Spirit of
their Lord upon them do according to his ensample,
first What course the
Armies of the Saints
under Jesus Christ,
first will take with
the Nations or ten
Kingdoms.
offer peace,
and publish the cleer light
of Gospel to them, that if
possible they might be that
way won:) I say, if any of
the ten Kings shall this way
be brought in they will doubtless be very acceptable
to Christ. (And who knows whether or
no the Lamb may overcome some of them this
way? Whether Spain and other kingdoms
may not be so gained to Christ, and made to
hate the whore?) But if not so, then will he
deal with those that are implacable of them, in
the way of his justice, and overcome them (I
mean those of them that are implacable: for
some of them shall hate the whore, when they
are overcome) in his wrath, and sore displeasure,
as he hath already done with those that
in maintenance of the beast, stood it out against
him; making hispeople to execute upon
them the judgement written: for overcome
them he will.

Of M6r 171

Of Romes ruine.

And thus having shewn how that the Lamb
will overcome the ten Kings; and that about
that time, when some, or all the ten Kings or
kingdoms are overcome, and made to hate the
whore, the Gospel shall be universally preached
all the world over:

I now come to shew, that when the Lord
Christ hath thus inlarged his kingdom, and
diminished the kingdom of the bease: he shall
then go on to cause his people (those especially
of the ten kingdoms) to go on in their work
of breaking down the strength of the beast,
and bringing it to nothing, that the Lord
Christ may be all. And in other thereunto,
they shall be the instruments of the utter ruining
of Rome: which is that whore mentioned,
Rev. 17. 1. As appears, vers. 18. “The
woman”
(or the whore) “which thou sawest,
is that great city which raigneth over the
kings of the earth”
(which Rome then did) I
say the Saints of the ten kingdoms, about this
time when these things are done, shall then be
instruments of ruining this whore. And this
appears, Rev. 17. 10. “And the ten horns
which thou sawest upon the beast, these shall hate M6v 173172
hate the whore, and shall make her desolate,
and naked, and shall eat her flesh and burn
her with fire.”
Where it is very cleer, that
the ten Kings being overcome by the Lamb,
they shall have such a cleer sight of the
light of the Gospel, as shall not onely cause
them to forsake the principles of darkness
that are imbraced by Rome but they shall hate
those principles, and hate Rome, for her filthiness,
and cursed lewdness; and shall manifest
their hatred, in disrobing her of her strength,
and glory, and pomp, with which the text
says she is decked, Rev. 17. 4. All which they
shall take from her, and make her naked: And
shall that be all they will do? No: for they
will not onely make her naked, but will eat her
flesh; will make her destitute, not onely of her
outward robes of pomp, and glory, but will
eat her very flesh; that is, they will devour and
consume that, without which she can as little
consist, as a man can whose flesh is consumed.
So that they shall so far manifest their hatred to
Rome, as they shall reduce her to the greatest
straights that can be imagined: And shall they
leave there? No: but they shall burn her
with fire. And that the Saints shall deal thus
with her, is again expressed in chap. 18. vers. 6,
7, 8. Where the people of God are bid to “rewardward M7r 172173
Babylon,”
(that is, Rome) “even as she
hath rewarded them; and double unto her
double according to her works: in the cup
which she hath filled, fill to her double: how
much she hath glorified her self, and lived
deliciously so much torment, and sorrow give
her. For she saith in her heart, I sit a Queen,
and am no widow, and shall see no sorrow:
therefore shall her plagues come in one day,
death, and mourning, and famine; and she
shall be utterly burnt with fire: for strong is
the Lord God who judgeth her.”
Thus it’s cleer,
that the Saints in the ten kingdoms shall so hate
Rome, as they shall plague her, make her desolate,
expose her to great misery, and utterly
burn her with fire. And when this City is
thus burnt with fire, because she hath Rev. 18. 6.
made her self drunk with the blood
of the Saints, and the blood of the Martyrs of
Jesus; and because she hath made all Nations
drunk with the wine of the wrath vers 2.
of her fornication, and the Kings of
the earth have committed fornication with
her; and because that when she comes to be
destroyed, in her will be found the vers. 24.
blood of Prophets, and of Saints,
and of all that were slain upon the earth;
therefore, when she comes to be destroyed, she shall M7v 174
shall be made a monument of vengeance, (as
being the most cursed City in the world,) and
therefore it is said that when Babylon is fallen,
she “is become the habitation of devils, and
the hold of every foul spirit, and a cage
of every unclean and hateful bird,”
Rev.
18. 2.
“And the voice of harpers, and musicians,
and trumpeters, shall be heard no
more at all in thee; & no crafts men of whatsoever
craft he be, shall be found any more
in thee. And the sound of a milestone shall
be heard no more at all in thee; and the
light of a candle shall shine no more at all in
thee; and the voice of the bridegroom and of
the bride, shall be heard no more at all in
thee: for thy merchants were all the great
men of the earth; for by thy sorceries were
all Nations deceived.”

Thus Rome, when it is destroyed, shall be
no more inhabited by the sons of men, it is
such a cursed City; but on the contrary, it
shall become the hold of every foul spirit, and
a cage of every unclean and hateful bird, and
the wild beasts of the desart shall lie therein,
and it shall be full of doleful creatures Owles,
and Satyrs, and Dragons; as it is at large exprest,
Isa. 34. 9, 10, 11, &c. And Isa. 13.
19, 29, &c.

Thus M8r 175

Thus Rome shall be ruined; and over it’s ruines
shall the Saints rejoyce, as Rev. 18. 20.
“Rejoyce over her, thou heaven, and ye holy
Apostles and Prophets: for God hath avenged
you on her.”
But her confederates will
greatly lament and bewail her; As vers. 9, 10,
&c.

Thus much for Romes ruine.

Of what it to follow Romes ruine.

But the enemies of Jesus Christ and his
Saints, are not wholly ruined, when Rome is
thus destroyed; but many will be left to bewail
it: and amongst the rest, it appears that
the Beast, viz. the Pope, still remains undestroyed:
and the manner how it shall be is
this: When these things we have spoken
of shall thus be done, viz. When the ten
Kings are overcome, and do yield obedience to
the Lamb, and the Gospel in universally preached,
and Jews and Gentiles are abundantly
converted to Christ, and Rome is ruined; the
Pope being then turned out of Rome, and he
with his Cardinals, Bishops, and Jesuits, being
lurking in some other places, up and down in
the world, shall still act like himself, and
shew himself to be the Beast; still retaining his M8v 176
his cursed nature, continuing in enmity against
Christ and his Saints, and being so, shall resolve
not to give all for lost yet, though he be
thus far prevailed against, but shall resolve to
make one desperate attempt more against the
Saints; and to this end, shall send abroad his
Emissaries unto all the unconverted Kings, and
great men of the earth, whom neither the Gospel
of peace, nor sword of war hath overcome,
and shall gather them all together; which
shall make a very great Army, with which they
shall think to destroy all the Saints, who at this
time will be increased to a very great number,
the Jews, and multitudes of the Gentiles,
being brought in before this last battel; but
when they are brought in, they will meet with
opposition from this man of sin, and from the
rest of the wicked of the world, who will not
have Christ to raign over them. And this
Beast, I say, will gather together all the unconverted
Kings of the earth, and all their Armies,
thinking to destroy the Saints, Jews and Gentiles;
but they shall not, neither first nor last,
prevail upon them; but they shall be overcome
and foiled still; so that now at last they shall
grow desperate, and say (as some now do) they
will now fight for it, and they will either win all, N1r 177
all, or lose all; for the Beast and the Kings of
the earth are gathered together, with their Armies
of prophane wicked men (for none else
are with them) to make war against Jesus
Christ
, and his Armies of Saints. In which last
battel, (wherein the utmost strength of all the
enemies of Christ and his Saints shall be united
together) shall the controversie between
the one and the other be decided; and the
flesh of these Kings, and Captains, and mighty
men of the earth, and of all their Armies, shall
be given to the fowles of the aire; and all this
more largely appears, Rev. 19. 11, 12, &c.
“And I saw heaven opened, and behold, a
white horse, and he that sat upon him, was
called faithful and true; and in righteousness
he doth judge and make war; his eys
were as a flame of fire, and on his head were
many Crowns, and he had a name written
that no man knew but he himself. And he
was clothed with a vesture dipt in blood, and
his name is called the word of God; and
the Armies which were in heaven followed
him upon white horses, clothed in fine linen
white and clean. And outod his mouth goeth
a sharp sword, that with it he should
smite the Nations: and he shall rule them
with a rod of Iron, and he treadeth the wine- N press N1v 178
press of the fierceness and wrath of Almighty
God. And he hath on his vesture
and on his thigh a name written, ‘King
of Kings, and Lord of
Lords.’
And I saw an Angel standing
in the Sun, and he cryed with a lowd voice,
saying to all the fowls that flie in the midst
of heaven, Come, and gather your selves together
unto the supper of the great God:
that ye may eat the flesh of Kings, and the
flesh of Captains, and the flesh of mighty
men, and the flesh of horses, and of them
that sit on them, and the flesh of all men,
both of free and bond, both small and great.
And I saw the Beast, and the Kings of the
earth, and their armies gathered together
to make war against him that sat on the
horse, and against his army. And the beast
was taken, and with him the false Prophet
that wrought miracles before him, with
which he deceived them that had received
the mark of the Beast, and them that worshipped
his image. These both were cast
alive into a lake of fire burning with brimstone.
And the remnant were slain with
the sword of him that sate upon the horse,
which sword proceeded out of his mouth:
and all the fowls were filled with their flesh.”

In N2r 179

In these words we see is a plain description
of two Generals, and their Armies; and of a
battel fought between them, and of the success
of the battel.

The description of the great Lord General
of the Army of Saints.

The first General is described; by his
Name, by his Frame, and by his Aym.

First, byhis Nanme. And he is called,
“faithful and true, and his name is called the
Word of God, and he hath a Name written,
‘King of Kings, and
Lord of Lords.’”
And this
is the Name, and Tile, of the Lord Jesus
Christ
alone.

But secondly, He is described also by his
Frame, and posture in which he is: thus, “He
sat upon a white horse.”
Which manifests his
purity. “And his eys were as a flame of fire”:
Which shews the piercing, discerning nature
of them, being the searcher of hearts, and trier
of the reins. “And on his head are many
Crowns”
: Which shews that all the Crowns of
all Kingdomes must be put upon his head,
who is “King of Kings,
and Lord of Lords.”
N2 And N2v 180
And this is the Frame and posture in which
he is.

But thirdly, He is described also by his
Aym; thus, that “in righteousness he doth
judge and make war.”
He ayms at doing
justice, making war against the Beast, and
judging that other Army according to righteousness:
and that he may do so, his Aym is
to give them blood to drink, and that in righteousness;
for they are worthy: and therefore
he is said to be “clothed in a vesture dipt in
blood,”
and that “out of his mouth goeth a
sharp sword, that with it he should smite
the Nations.”
Out of his mouth it goeth,
that is, he commandeth with the word of his
mouth, “a sharp sword to smite the Nations:”
and this justly. And his Aym is to
“rule the nations with a rod of Iron”: And
this in righteousness; “and to tread the wine-
press of the fierceness of the wrath of Almighty
God.”
And in all this may it be said
unto him, “Righteous art thou, O Lord; who
hast judged thus.”

The Description of his Army.

But in the next place we have his Army
described, thus: “And the armies which were in M3r 181
in heaven followed him upon white horses,
clothed in fine linen, white and clean.”
Where
first we may observe, the place where they
were; and that is, heaven; which shews that
they are armies of the Church, that they are
Saints; for the Church of God is all along the
Prophecy of the Book of the Revelation, called
Heaven. Now these Armies that follow this General,
are the Armies in Heaven, the Armies in
the Churches of Christ, and out of heaven also
is their General said to come, ver. 11. But it is
no wonder, for he always walks in the midst of
his golden Candlesticks, his Witnesses, his Saints,
his Churches. Rev. 1. 13. But again, these Armies
in Heaven are said to follow their General
“upon white horses”: As he is upon a white horse,
which shews his purity; so also are they upon
white horses, which shews their purity: For he
hath put his own Frame and Spirit upon them;
which further appears in that they are also said
to be clothed in fine linen, white and clean;
which also imports purity, and undefiledness.

And thus we have the Description of the
Lord General, and his Army on the one
side.

On the other side, The chief among them
is called the Beast: which shews his unworthy, M3 filthy, M3v 182
filthy, beastly nature: and with him are the
Kings of the earth; they are not of heaven,
but of the earth: and of the earth they may
be said to be, in opposition to the heavenly nature
of those whom they oppose. And for
the Armies that are under them, they are said
to be Their Armies, implying that they were
earthly, corrupt Armies; because they
did belong to those that were of the
earth. And this is all the description that we
have in place of the other General and his
Army.

Now these being thus described. It is said
that the Beast, and the Kings of the earth, and
their Armies, were gathered together, to make
war against him that sat upon the horse, and
against his Army. It seems they have hopes
to overcome him, and his Army; because they
gather together against them.

The event of the Battel.

But what is the event of the battel? The
Beast and his Army are overcome, and the Beast,
and the false Prophet is that with him, are taken.
What this false Prophet is, is doutful;
for there is no mention made of him before this, N4r 1083
this, at least not under this Title, The
false Prophet.
not
in all the book of the Revelation:
but it may be it is some new sort of deceiver,
which he will make use of to deceive the
Nations by false miracles, when he draws them
to ingage in this battel. But whether so or
no, whatever he be, when this battel is fought
the Beast, and the false Prophet, that wrought
miracles before him, are both taken; and of
them is it said, That they particularly were cast
alive into a lake of fire burning with brimston,
and the remnant are slain with the sword, and
their flesh is given to the fowls of the aire; even
the flesh of Kings, and Captains, and mighty
men, &c.

And this is the success of this battel, or the
event of it, as far forth as it is in this place
spoken of.

But because the day of the battel is to be
such a great and terrible day to wicked men,
being that great and terrible day of the Lord,
so much spoken of by all the holy Prophets,
and Apostles, and Saints of God; which day
is represented unto us in such a dreadful, terrible,
and glorious manner, as if it were the General
day of judgement, (but that it is cleered
not to be that day, by the declarations of the N4 things N4v 184
things that must follow it; which are laid
down in the several Scriptures which speak of
this day.) I say, seeing it is represented unto
us in a dreadful, and wonderful manner; and
since so many wonders shall be shewn at that
that time, and so much of the glory and majesty
of God shall then be seen; and such
strange changes shall then be made in the
world: I say, these things being so wonderful,
and so glorious, I shall be the larger in giving
the description of this day from several other
Scriptures. Thus:

Of the great day of the Lord.

This day, is that great day, which is called
“the day of the Lords vengeance,” and “the year
of recompences for the controversies of Sion;”
Mentioned, Isa. 34. 8. That day of
which he speaks, when he says, “The day of
vengeance is in my heart, and the yeer of my
redeemed is come,”
Isa. 63. 4. For though it
be true, that he hath already begun to take
vengeance upon his, and his peoples enemies;
and to plead the cause of his people: and
though he hath begun to recompence his
wrath upon these enemies, for the controversies
his Sion hath against them; yet the compleatmentpleat- N5r 185
hereof is reserved unto that day,
which of all days shall be the most terrible to
wicked men, because it shall utterly overthrow
them, and they shall not escape, nor avoid it;
for then he will tread them in his anger, and
trample them in his fury; yea they shall be
troden in the wine-press of the fierceness of
the wrath of Almighty God. And their
blood shall be sprinkled upon his Garments,
and he will stain all his rayment, As Isa. 63.
3.
But who shall live when God doth this?
(was Balaams expression, when he spake of
the ruineof several Nations Numb. 24. 23.)
for let all wicked men look to it, when this
day comes; for to them it will be very terrible.
For this is the day which is spokenof, Isa. 66.
15.
“For behold the Lord will come with
fire, and with Chariots like a whirl-wind,
to render his anger with fury, and his rebukes
with flames of fire: for by fire, and
by his sword, will the Lord plead with all
flesh, and the slain of the Lord shall be many.”

How terrible will this day be, when the Lord
shall thus plead with all flesh by fire and
sword, and render his anger with fury, and his
rebukes with flames of fire! Who shall live
when God doth this? It is answered by the
Prophet in the same Chapter, that at the same time, N5v 186
time, “The hand of the Lord shall be known
toward his servants, and his indignation
toward his enemies; and their hearts shall
rejoyce, and their bones shall flourish like an
herb”
: They shall be so far from being quailed,
or discouraged, or amated, or terrified,
when this terrible day comes, as they shall then
flourish most, and be most joyful at heart.

Again, this day is spoken of, Joel 3. 9, 10.
where the Lord summons all the Gentiles to
gather together and make themselves as stong
as they can for war: and says, that when they
are gathered together round about, in ver. 11.
that thither he will cause his mighty ones to
come down & at v. 12. That there he will sit to
judge all the heathen round about; & then declares
that the Sickle shal be put in to cut down
this harvest of wicked men, “for the wickedness
is great,”
and that multitudes shall be cut
down, when the Lord shall thus judge these
men, and decide the controversies of his people:
for which cause it shall be called, The valley of
decision. And then, vers. 16. “The Lord shall
roar out of Sion, and utter his voice from
Jerusalem: and the heavens and the earth
shall shake.”
This is that “once more”, wherein
he will shake not the earth onely, but the heavens
also: of which Paul speaks. Heb. 12. 26. N6r 187
26.
And therefore this is called, Joel 2. 31.
“The great and terrible day of the Lord.” But
who shall live when God doth this? When
the Heavens and the Earth shall shake? &c.
Why it’s answered in the same 16. vers. “But
the Lord shall be the hope of his people, and
the strength of the children of Israel.”

Of this day also Paul speaks, 2 Thes. 1. 7, 8,
9.
Where he says, that the day is coming when
“the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from heaven,
with his mighty Angels, in flaming fire,
taking vengeance on them that know not God
and that obey not the Gospel of our Lord Jesus
Christ
; who shall be punished with everlasting
destruction, from the presence of the
Lord, and from the glory of his power.”

Thus doth Paul render this as a most terrible
day: and as the Prophet Isaiah in the forementioned
place, says the Lord will then render
his anger, and his rebukes with flames of
fire: So Paul here says, that the Lord Jesus
shall in flaming fire take vengeance, on them
that know not God, &c. punishing them
with everlasting destruction from his presence.
But who shall live when God doth this? The
Apostle tells us, that then the Lord Jesus shall
come to be glorified in his, Saints & to be admired
in all them that believe in that day, v. 10 The N6v 188
The Saints shall then live, and glorifie him, and
admire him.

Of this day also speaks the Prophet Malachi,
Chap. 4. 1. “For behold, the day cometh
that shall burn as an oven: and all the proud,
yea all that do wickedly shall be stubble: and
the day that cometh shall turn them up, saith
the Lord of hosts. that it shall leave them
neither root nor branch.”
But who shall live
when God doth this? It follows in vers. 2, 3.
“But unto you that fear my Name, shall the
Sun of righteousness arise, with healing in
his wings: and ye shall go forth, and grow
up as calves of the stall. And ye shall
tread down the wicked; for they shall be ashes
under the soles of your feet, in the day that
I shall do this saith the Lord of hosts.”

Thus in a terrible manner is this dayhere also
represented; being a day that shall burn as
an Oven.

Of this day also speaks the Apostle Peter,
and represents it in the same terrible manner,
2 Pet. 3. 7. “But the Heavens and the Earth
which are now,”
(saith he) “by the same word
are kept in store, reserved unto fire against
the day of judgement, and perdition of ungodly
men”
: or as, Isaiah says, the day in which N7r 189
which the Lord will plead with all flesh, rendering
his rebukes with flames of fire. But
says Peter, vers. 10. This day will come suddenly
upon men, as a thief in the night. And
indeed, this numerous Army that shall be gathered
together against the Saints, shall little
dream of such an overflowing scourge, as
shall overtake them: but rather, promise themselves
a victorious overcoming of the Saints;
but alas! Miserable creatures, this day of their
destruction and perdition, says Peter, shall
come, “as a thief in the night: in which the
Heavens shall pass away with a noise, and
the Elements shall melt with fervent heat.”

(The whole world shall be on fire about their
ears on a sudden, and there shall be an utter
destruction of them; and their corrupt and
filthy courses shall perish with them.) “The
earth also, and the works that are therein,
shall be burnt up.”
And vers. 12. “The Heavens
being on fire, shall be dissolved.”
But
what might some say, shall the Elements melt
with fervent heat, and the Heavens being on
fire be dissolved, and the Earth with the
works that are therein be burnt up? Who
shall live when God doth this? Peter, in the
very next words, seems to prevent this question,
and says, “Nevertheless we according to his promise, N7v 190
promise, look for new Heavens, and a new
Earth wherein dwelleth righteousness.”
As
if he had said, it is the perdition and destruction
of ungodly men onely that I speak of: take
notice of that. And this day that shall burn
as an Oven, shall burn up pnely such as do
wickedly: but it shall not in the least manner
touch nor trouble the Saints. But we, when
these wicked men are burnt up, shall have
new Heavens, and a new Earth, wherein
dwelleth righteousness: It shall be a new
time to us, when these corrupt men shall be
burnt up. And this we have a promise for.
And this promise they had in Isa. 65. 17.
where this day is spoken of: the promise runs
thus. “For behold I create new Heavens,
and a new Earth, and the former shall not be
remembred, nor come into minde: but be
you glad and rejoyce for ever, in that which
I create; for I create Jerusalem a rejoycing,
and her people a joy, &c.”
And so he goeth
on to declare the happy estate that Saints
shall live in, in these new Heavens, and new
Ea rth.

But this terrible day to wicked men is again
mentioned, Isa. 33. 14. “Who among us shall
dwell with the devouring fire? Who amongst
us shall dwell with everlasting burnings?”
Here are N8r 191
are the same expressions, or expressions to the
same purpose with those we have already mentioned;
where Malachi says, The day that
cometh shall burn as an oven; and Paul and
Peter speak of the Lords taking vengeance in
flaming fire, on wicked and ungodly men. The
Prophet hayving this in his eye, cries out, Who
shall dwell with devouring fire! who shal dwell
with everlasting burnings! When the Lord
comes to render his rebukes with flames of fire,
who shall dwell in those flames? But lest the
Saints should be discouraged, he presently
addes, That though the sinners in Zion are
afraid, and fearfulness hath surprised the hypocrites;
yet (verses 15, 16, &c.) “he that walketh
righteously, and speaketh uprightly; he
that shaketh his hands from holding of bribes,
that stoppeth his ears from hearing of bloods,
and shutteth his eyes from seeing evil: he
shall dwell on high, his place of defence shall
be the munitions of rocks; bread shall be
given him, his waters shall be sure. Thine
eyes shall see the King in his beauty; they
shall behold the land afar off. &c.”
Thus the
righteous upright man, that is free from dissimulations,
is no hypocrite, that will not oppress
though he may gain much thereby, is so far from N8v 192
from so doing, as he disdains, he despises such
gain: and he that not onely refuses a bribe
when it is offered to him, but when it’s put into
his hand will not keep it, shakes his hand from
holding of it: and he to whom the cruel and
corrupt courses of man are irksome, even to
hear of it, or see it, and therefore he stops his
ears, and shuts his eyes from it: This man
shall hold proof in these times, and he shall
dwell on high; he shall have as sure a defence
in these times, as the munitions of rocks: for
he is fixed in the Rock Christ Jesus, that cannot
be moved; and sure provision shall be
made for him. And he shall see the King in his
beauty. The Lord Jesus, who shall then appear
in his glory, and his excellent beauty (as I
shall shew by and by) shall this mans eyes behold:
and these new heavens and new earth
that shall then come, which in the Prophets
days was very far off, shall this mans eyes see:
which land is described, vers. 29 &c. “Thine
eyes shall see Jerusalen a quiet habitation, a
tabenacle that shall not be taken down; not
one of the stakes thereof shall ever be removed,
netiehr shall any of the cord thereof be
broken: and the inhabitant shall not say, ‘I am
sick’
; and the people that dwell therein shall
be forgiven their iniquity.”
But to proceed.

Of O1r 193

Of this terrible day that shall come upon
wicked men, thereis a large description, in the
whole 24 Chapter of Isaiah: but I shall
mention but some of the passages of it, as
vers. 1. “Behold the Lord maketh the earth
empty, and maketh it waste, and turneth it
upside down, and scattereth abroad the inhabitants
thereof.”
Here the Prophet shews
how the Lord will depopulate the earth,
making it as it were empty; so great will be
the slaughter of wicked men: and then he
shews what changes and mutations he will
make in the earth; in that he will turn it upside
down, make it appear no more as it was
before; but make it anew, make new heavens
and a new earth. But how shall this be done?
That the world shall be made new, and emptied
of wicked men? Doth the Prophet declare,
as Peter doth, that it shall be done by
fire? Yes: At vers. 6. “The earth is defiled,
therefore hath the curse devoured the earth,
and they that dwell therein are desolate:
therefore the inhabitants of the earth are
burned, and few men left.”
Thus the Prophet
speaks of the destruction of the wicked
of the earth by fire. There are several other
expressions in this Chapter, that shew the
dreadfulness of this day; as vers. 19. “The O earth O1v 194
earth is utterly broken down, the earth is
clean dissolved, the earth is moved exceedingly.”
As Peter expresses himself, (Seeing
that all these things shall be dissolved, what
manner of persons, &c.) so doth the Prophet
here say, The earth is clean dissolved, &c.

But if any should ask the Prophet, Why,
what is the meaning of all these expressions, in
declaration of what shall come upon the
earth? What is to be done? Wherefore will
the Lord do all these things? The Prophet, at
the first verse, tells ye, and says, That in that
day “the Lord shall punish the host of the high
ones, that are on high; and the kings of the
earth upon the earth.”
So that this is the time
when he shall wound the Heads over many
Countries, when he shall strike thorow kings
in the day of his wrath, when he shall rule
them with a rod of iron, that will not stoop to
the golden scepter of his grace. Thus terrible
and dreadful will this day be to wicked men.
And if it should be said to the Prophet, Who
shall live when God doth this? He tells ye in
the midst of this declaration of the desolations
that are to come upon the inhabitants of the
earth, vers. 16. “We have heard songs, even
glory to the righteous”
; implying, that this
great day, which is the day of wicked mens greatest O2r 195
greatest distress, shall be the time of the Saints
greatest glory, joy, and exaltation. Now is
the time of their singing for joy of heart
come.

But again, there is another description of the
terribleness of this day, in the 50 Psalm, which
Psalm is a clear Prophesie of this day, (wherein
God will call that wicked crue that have nothing
to do to take his Word into their mouthes
to an account) where the Prophet speaks in
the same language with the Prophets and Apostles
already mentioned; and says (vers. 4.)
“Our God shall come, and shall not keep silence:
a fire shall devour before him, and it shall be
very tempestous round about.”
Here also is
this day represented to the terrour of wicked
men: But at the same time the Psalmist says,
that “to him that ordereth his conversation
aright, he”
(that is, the Lord) “will shew the
salvation of God.”
Such a man shall be saved,
when the wicked shall be devoured.

Again, the terribleness of this day is set out
in several other Scriptures: But having produced
so many already, I shall onely mention
one more, (and proceed to what I have further
to say) and that is Isai. 30. 30. “The Lord
shall cause his glorious voice to be heard, and
shall shew the lighting down of his arm, with O2 the O2v 196
the indignation of his anger, and with the
flame of a devouring fire; with scattering,
and tempest and hail-stones.”
Thus the Prophet
here sets out the terrour of that day when
the Lord shall at last be fully avenged on his
enemies: he shall then shew the lightning down
of his arm; it shall then appear rto be his arm
indeed, by which his enemies shall be overcome.
And he shall cause his glorious voice to
be heard, and manifest his indignation and anger
against the enemies of his people, with a
flame of a devouring fire, with scattering, and
tempest, and hail-stones. But who shall live
when God doth this? The Prophet (vers 26,
27.) tells us, that this day shall be the day
“when the Lord bindeth up the breach of his
people, and healeth the stroke of their wound;”

and that in it unto them “the light of the moon
shall be as the light of the sun, and the light
of the sun shall be sevenfold, as the light of
seven days.”
So that though it shall be terrible
to their enemies, yet it shall be the most glorious
and happie day to his people that ever
was since the beginning of the world: and because
it shall be so, it’s said, ( Isai. 24. forementioned)
“that they shall lift up their voice,
they shall sing for the majesty of the Lord;
they shall glorifie the Lord in the fires, even the O3r 197
the Name of the Lord God of Israel, in the
Isles of the Sea.”

And thus I have laid down that description
which is given in several Scriptures, of this
great day of the Lord; wherein he will by
fire, and by his sword, and by tempest, and
hail-stones, manifest his indignation and wrath
against the enemies of his people, so as multitudes,
multitudes shall be slain: So as the
earth shall be emptied of them. So many shall
be slain, as there shall be few men left. And
that when it’s thus the earth shall be turned upside
down, and there shall be new Heavens,
and a new Earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness.
For the wicked, and the wickedness of the
Earth, shall be so burnt up, as in that respect
i:t shall become a new earth and new heavens,
wherein righteousness shal remain and flourish.

And now having thus done, I should now
proceed to shew, that immediately upon this
day, when all the enemies of Christ are made
his footstool, that at this very time, shall Jesus
Christ
appear with his Saints; to raign on earth.

Of the time when the full deliverance of the
Jews and Gentiles shall be compleated.

But first a word or two about the time when O3 it O3v 198
it shall be, that Jesus Christ will work this full
deliverance for his Saints, from their enemies,
when this great day of his appearing shall be.

Now in general, the time (when this last
great overthrow of wicked men, and this wonderful
glorious and compleat deliverance of the
Saints) shall be after the Lamb hath overcome
the ten Kings. And after the Gospel hath been
preached to all Nations, for the bringing in of
Jews and Gentiles, and after Rome is burnt,
as we have already said.

But some may say, But how many yeers may
it be, before these things shall be done? If it
might be, we would know the direct time;
for it may be long before all these things may
be done, before the ten Kings are overcome and
before the Jews may be converted, and the Gentiles
fulness come in and before Rome is destroyed;
and long before that great day come: and
according to reason it will be a very long time,
if we should judge according to sense, but that
we know that beyond sense and reason, the Lord
can make a short work of it, and cut it short
in righteousness. But if the Scripture do give
any hint of the time, we desire to know it.

To this I answer, first, that I believe this is
enough to satisfie a Saint, and to make his
heart joyful, to know that the time of the prevailingvailing O4r 199
power of the Saints enemies over them
is come to an end, and that they shall never
overcome them any more; but the Lamb is already
seen to be come upon mount Sion, where
he hath called out his called, chosen, and faithful
ones, with which he will go on conquering
and to conquer, and by whom he will ruine
Rome, and execute upon his enemies the judgement
written. I say, this is matter of joy to a
Saint, to know that Christ is a doing these
things, though they do not know when he will
finish this or that particular work.

But secondly, and more particularly. For
the yeer in which, or neer to which this great
day shall be, wherein the enemies of the Saints
both Jews and Gentiles that shall be converted
shall be. I shall here propose my apprehensions,
and leave them to the judicious
wise and intelligent Christian to Dan. 12. 10.
judge of them.

And for this, I must have recourse to Dan 12.
a chapter which speaks plainly and particularly
of this great day of the final deliverance of the
Saints in general (though particularly it mention
but the Jews; for the one cannot be without
the other) as in v. 1. “At that time shall Michael
stand up, the great Prince, which standeth
for the children of thy people: and there O4 shall O4v 200
shall be a time of trouble, such as never was
since there was a Nation.”
This is that great
day we have spoken of, wherein there shall be
such a dismal, terrible time to wicked men in
general, as never was since the world began.
But it shall be, as I said, to wicked men, but
not to the converted Jews, nor Gentiles; not
to the Saints. And therefore it follows in this
verse, “And at that time thy people shall be delivered,
every one that shall be found written
in the book.”
When Michael the Prince,
i.e. Jesus Christ the great Prince of Israel;
even of all the Israel of God, shall stand up
for them in this great day, then will he vex
their enemies, put them to such trouble as there
never was the like. But all his own people
who have given up their names to him, who
are lifted in his book, shall be delivered. This
shall be the work of that great day, and that
which shall follow immediately upon it, follows
in v. 2, 3. of the chap. whereby it is evident
that this chapter speaks of this great day of
the deliverance both of Jews and Gentiles.
(Though to Daniel being a Jew there is no
mention made of the Gentiles, but of his people
onely.) Well, this being a prophecy of
this great day, let us now see what in this chapter
is spoken of the time.

Now O5r 201

Now I finde that this Chapter speaks of
three distinct periods of time, in which three
distinct remarkable things shall come to pass,
in order to the deliverance of the Saints.

And the first time mentioned, the 6 and 7
verses speak to: and in the 6 verse this question
is made, How long shall it be to the end
of these wonders? To which in the 7 verse a
double answer is given (which is confirmed
with a very solemn Oath) first, that it should
be for a time, times, and a half: and secondly,
that when he shall have accomplished to scatter
the power of the holy people, all these things
shall be finisshed.

Now for the first of these answers, because
I have had occasion already to open In my book
intituled,
The Resurrection

of the witnesses.

the meaning of it, and have shewed
that the same expressions in the Revelation,
and this here, agree in one,
and point at one and the same thing;
namely, the flourishing time of the
Beast, the prevailing time of the Beast, wherein
he shall have power to overcome the Saints,
and to trample them under foot; even fourty
two months, or a time, times, and half a time.
And having cleared this, and shewed when
that time did expire; and that after that time,
neither the Beast, nor the little Horn, prevailed any O5v 202
any more: I say, having spoken of these things
already, I shall refer the Reader thereunto;
where they shall finde, that in 16451645 the Beast
ceased to prevail against the Saints; and the
time wherein he should tread the holy Citie
under foot, then came to an end: and neither
he, nor his associates, shall ever prevail more.

And then this is the effect of the first answer
to the question, That there should be a time,
times, and an half; and then an end should
come; in which time, times, and half, the
Saints should be kept under by enemies; but
then an end should come, and deliverance
come.

And the second branch of the answer makes
this clearly to be the meaning of the former,
which is in these words: “And when he shall
have accomplished to have scattered the
power of the holy people, all these things shall
be finished.”
In which, first, is clear, that there
should be a time, when the power of the holy
people should be scattered; the Saints should be
destitute of power to oppose an enemy, and consequently
should be kept under by an enemy.
Secondly, This is clear in these words, that
there should be a time, when this should be accomplished
or compleated, (I mean, their
power being scattered;) there should be a time O6r 203
time when it should be fully done: for then a
thing is accomplished, when it is fully done as
much as can be done, or shall be done. And
thirdly, this is clear, being plainly asserted, that
when this scattering is accomplished, then
these things should be finished; that is, then
deliverance should come.

So then, this first period of time spoken of,
points at the great thing that should be done,
in order to the deliverance of the Saints: “The
taking away of the power of the enemy,
which he hath so long had to tread them under
feet”
: so that now he shall do so no more;
which indeed is a great deliverance to the
Saints: but yet there remains other things to
be done; they must be delivered, and shall in
due time, not onely from his prevailing power,
but from his opposing power.

But now, for the time when that shall be, I
must proceed to what follows in the Chapter;
and in vers. 8. Daniel says, that for the former
answer, he heard it, but understood it not;
and therefore being very desirous to know, he
again puts the question, “O my Lord,” says he,
“what shall be the end of these things?” It
having been told him, that Michael should
stand up, and his people be delivered, he is sirous O6v 204
sirous to know when it should be: but in the
9 verse it is said, “Go thy way, Daniel; for the
words are closed up, and sealed till the time
of the end.”
Herein is implied, that though
Daniel were told these things, yet they were as
a sealed book to him; and they must be so,
untill the time of the end. They are so darkly
and mysteriously declared, because they must
not be understood till the time of the end. The
words are closed up, and sealed, till the time of
the end: But then, “the wise shall understand,
but none of the wicked,”
as it is in the 10 vers.
And then in the 11 and 12 verses, this answer
is given to Daniel’s question about the time
when his people shall be delivered: “And from
the time that the daily sacrifices shall be
taken away, and the abomination that
maketh desolate set up, there shall be a
thousand two hundred and ninety days. Blessed
is he that waiteth, and cometh to the
thousand three hundred and five and thirty
days.”

And here are two other Periods of times,
wherein the great deliverances that are yet to be
wrought for (the holy people) the Saints, are
to come to pass.

But what these two Periods of time are, and
how we may understand these two verses, is the
great question.

Now, O7r 205

Now, as I promised, I shall lay down what
my apprehensions of them are, and leave it to
the Wise to judge. And thus: I apprehend
that by the time here mentioned, in which the
daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the
abomination that maketh desolate set up, is
meant that time when the Emperour Julian
the Apostata reigned: which Emperour, although
he had been a great professor of Christianity
during the reign of Constantius the
preceeding Emperour; he most wretchedly turned Pagan:
and then the abominations of the Heathens
were set up, and thei Temples and Idol-groves
were set wide open, in every City, which former
Emperours had caused to be shut up: and
Julian himself sacrificed to the Idols. And
thus the abomination of desolation was set up.
And then also Julian, to vex the Christians,
and to shew how little regard he had to the
truth of the Gospel, (which abolished Jewish
Worship) he commanded the Jews to sacrifice
again. And when they replied, that they ought
not to sacrifice but in the Temple in Jerusalem;
he then commanded that the Temple
should be built again, (and allowed that it
should be done at his own cost and charge,
allowing it out of the Publike Treasury:) which O7v 206
which the Jews (expecting a time to come
wherein the Temple should be built) very
readily went about, supposing that to be the
time. And when they had begun the work,
there was a great Earth-quake, which shook
the old Foundation of the Temple, and turned
all down to the ground, together with the
houses adjoyning thereunto: and not onely so,
but a fire came from heaven, which burnt all
the Tools and the Instruments which had been
brought thither to build the Temple. And
then, and not till then, was that Prophecie of
our Saviour fulfilled, that not a stone was left
upon a stone. And the Jews being astonished
hereat, never durst any more attempt to build
the Temple to offer sacrifice: And then, from
that time hitherto hath the daily sacrifice
ceased: for then it was taken away with a witness,
in a most remarkable and miraculous
manner. And this I am perswaded is the
time here spoken of in the Prophet Daniel;
and this is the judgement of M. Archer, and
others also. And this being granted, then we
must begin the One thousand two hundred and
ninety Prophetical days (which are yeers) that
Daniel here speaks of, at the yeer when these
things were done, which was about the second
yeer of Julian, (for he reigned not full three yeers) O8r 207
yeers) which was the 0366yeer three hundred
sixty six
.

And then to this yeer 03660366 if the yeers which the Prophet
speaks of, be added which are
1290
¦
it makes up just 16561656

So that in the 1656yeer one thousand six hundred
fifty and six
, by this account will be the second
period of time which the Prophet here speaks
of, in which there will be some glorious thing
done in order to the deliverance of the Jews:
which we may hope will be their conversion;
for what will so much tend to their deliverance
as their conversion? But their conversion, or
something that will tend to their conversion,
and deliverance, it will certainly be. Which
is cleer, because this is given as an answer to the
question that Daniel made, “When shall the
end of these things”
(that had been to him before
declared) “be?” Or “when shall Michael
stand up, and the children of my people be delivered?”
Now this time being pointed at in
the answer, it is certain that some glorious
thing shall then come to pass, in order to their
deliverance: and though what it will be, be not
certainly discovered, yet we may hope it will
be no less then their conversion. But this againgain O8v 208
is cleer, that though much may be then
done in order to their deliverance, that yet it
will not be the compleat deliverance, which
they and all the Churches of Christ shall have,
at that great day of their deliverance, already
mentioned; for that is reserved for that third
period of time mentioned in ver. 12. in these
words, “Blessed is he that waiteth, and cometh
to the thousand three hundred and five and
thirty days.”

Much may be done, and much will be done,
at the period of the one thousand two hundred
and ninety days: but how happy will he be that
shall live five and fourty years beyond that!
for that is the utmost period of time that is set
for the compleat deliverance of the holy people,
the Church, from all enemies whatsoever.
And blessed is the man that cometh to, not
onely the one thousand two hundred and ninety,
but to the one thousand three hundred and
five and thirty days. So then, the full and
compleat deliverance of the Church, when
this great day will come, when all the enemies
of the Church will be subdued, will be at the
period of the thousand three hundred and five
and thirty days.

Now P1r 209

Now if to the year 03660366
there be added 1335
¦
it makes up just 17011701

And in this year, or near this yeer, 1701one thousand
seven hundred and one
, I am perswaded
that day will be: having my ground of
this persewasion from this Scripture, as I have
laid it down, which I leave to the consideration
of prudent Christians. I shall now proceed.

And now I come to speak of those things
which are to follow immediately upon this
great day, of which first a word in general, and
then I shall descend unto particulars.

But in general thus:

Immediately upon the ruining of the enemies
of Christ and his Saints in the manner we
have spoken of, and upon the passing away of
the old Heavens and the old earth; shall
be fulfilled that which is spoken in Rev. 21. 1,
2, 3.
“And I saw a new Heaven, and a new
Earth, and the first heaven, and the first
earth were passed away: and there was no P more P1v 210
more sea. And I John saw the holy city
new Jerusalem, come down from God
but of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned
for her husband. And I heard a
great voice from heaven, saying, ‘Behold,
the tabernacle of God is with men, and he
will dwell with them, and they shall be his
people, and God himself shall be with them,
and be their God,’
&c.”

That which I take notice of in these verses,
of which to speak a word in general before I
descend to particulars, is this:

That the new Jerusalem here is said to
come dome down from God out of Heaven.
This glorious state and condition
in which the Saints shall be put after this
great day, is to be here on Earth; and
therefore it is said to come come down
from God out of Heaven.

First, in that it is said to come down, it
argues that it is not above, but below; for it
is to come down from above.

And secondly, In that it is said to be from
God out of Heaven, it speaks plainly
that it is not to be taken for that
Glory which the Saints shall have in the P2r 211
the Heavens By the Heavens above, I
mean that place which is far
above all Heavens, to which
the Aposte saies Jesus Christ
ascended, Eph. 4. 10. Of
which Heaven, the Lord says
it is his Throne, and the earth
his footstool, Isa. 66. 1. The
height and glory of which
place, the thoughts of men are
(alas) too shallow to apprehend.
But the Heaven above
it is called, in respect of the
height and transcendency of
the glory of it above the earth
that now is, or above the
new Heaven and the new
Earth that shall be in the time
we are speaking of; which
shall come down from God
out of Heaven, from that
inaccessible glory, and that
unapproachable splendor, that
none eye hath seen, or
can see; in the beholding
of which, the Angels do
veil and cover their faces,
1 Tim. 6. 16. Isa. 6. 1.
above
to all eternity with
God, but a glorious
estate which
comes down from
God out of Heaven
unto them, which
they are to injoy for
a thousand yeers
here below; in which
time the Tabernacle
of God shal be with
men, and they shall
be visibly seen to be
his people, and God
himself shall be among
them, and be
their God, and the
effect thereof shal be
glorious, as appears
by what follows. But
this onely is that in
general which I here
take notice of, that this new-Jerusalem-glory
is to be on earth, when there shall be a new
molding and a new making of the Heaven and
of the earth: and of the particular mutations
and changes that there shall then be, I shall
now speak.

P2
And P2v 212

Of the personal appearance
of Christ,
And
Of the Resurrection of his
Saints top Raign with
him on Earth.

And in the first place I shall speak of
the personal appearance of Jesus Christ
and the Resurrection of his Saints to
raign on earth with him. That Christ shall
personally appear, is a point that is I know
much controverted, and is very much doubted
by many Saints, who are eminently godly,
and whom I do very much honour and reverence:
who yet are confident that he will very
gloriously appear in the treading down his enemies,
in the ruining of the Beast, and the
setling of his people in peace, and filling of them P3r 213
them with his Spirit; but they question whether
out Lord Jesus shall any otherwise appear,
then to be their spiritual eyes, and then as now:
for now they spiritually discern him in his present
footsteps in the world.

And it being thus dubious to many, I was
inclining to be silent in it, but that the light
shining so clearly to me in the following Scriptures
which I shall mention, hath such power
and force with me as I cannot but hold it forth,
leaving it to the more serious consideration of
intelligent Christians.

And the Position I shall lay down, is
this:

That our Lord Jesus Christ, having subdued
his enemies, shall personally appear on
earth, and shall raise up the Saints before
departed out of this world, to come and
reign with him on earth.

To prove this, we have several Scriptures;
and I shall begin first with that known clear
place, Revel. 20. The description of the
total overthrow of the Beast, and all the Armies
that were gathered together with him, to
make war against Jesus Christ and his Saints,
being laid down in the Preceding Chapter; in P3 this P3v 214
this Chapter follows a declaration of what
things will succeed it: and that which is to
this purpose, is in the 4, 5, & 6 verses. “And
I saw thrones, and they sate upon them, and
judgement was given unto them. And I
saw the souls of them that were beheaded
for the witness of Jesus, and for the Word of
God, and which had not worshipped the beast,
neither his image, neither had received his
mark upon their forheads, or in their
hands: and they lived and reigned with
Christ a thousand yeers. But the rest of
the dead lived not again until the thousand
yeers were finished. This is the first resurrection.
Blessed and holy is he that hath
part in the first resurrection, on such the second
death hath no power; but they shall be
priests of God and of Christ, and shall reign
with him a thousand yeers.”

In these verses, this is laid down, That the
Saints of God which had been Martyrs, and
sufferers under the Beast, should be raised
from the dead, and be advanced to sit upon
thrones; and judgement should be given unto
them: and they should live and reign with
Christ a thousand yeers. But though the
Saints should be thus raised, that yet this is
not the General Resurrection, wherein all the just P4r 215
just and unjust shall be raised: no; for the
text expresly says, that the rest of the dead
were not raised, until this thousand yeers were
finished; and therefore this resurrection which
shall be when Christ and his Saints must reign
on earth, is called The first resurrection: and
it’s said, that no wicked one shall have part
herein; but onely they that are holy and blessed,
and who shall never die the second death, but
shall be priests of God and of Christ, and
shall reign with him a thousand yeers; and
others are not to be raised till the end of the
thousand yeers.

What can be more clearly asserted? or
what is more clearly asserted in Scripture, then
this truth is in these three verses? It is so clear,
as I must profess, that, for my part, had I no
other Scripture to back it, yet having no Scripture
contradicting, I am perswaded that I
should not dare to deny it. But we have, besides
this, several other Scriptures to this same
purpose.

The next I shall mention shall be that Rev.
5. 9, 10.
where we finde that the four Beasts,
and the Elders, which were the representatives
of the Churches of the Saints, and which were
redeemed unto God by the blood of the Lamb,
out of every kindred, and tongue, and nation, P4 and P4v 216
and people; that they singing to the Lamb,
praise him, saying, “For thou hast made us
unto our God kings and priests, and we shall
reign on the earth.”
This is spoken in the future
tense, as being to come; We shall reign
on the earth: which that they may do, they
must be raised from the dead, as it is clearly
said in the fore-mentioned place they shall.

And it is likewise as clear, Dan. 12. 2.
where it is said, that when Jesus Christ shall
stand up to save his people, and to perplex and
destroy his enemies; it is said, that at that time,
“many of them that sleep in the dust of the
earth shall awake.”
Observe; this is a time
when many of them shall be raised, but not all.
But whereas it follows, that some of them shall
be raised to everlasting life, and some to shame,
and everlasting contempt; but it’s said,
Blessed and holy is he that hath part in the first
resurrection, for on such the second death hath
no power: the truth in both these Scriptures
may very well consist together. For though
John there mention onely the resurrection of
Saints, yet doth he not say that others are not
raised to shame, to be sent into shame and confusion
presently, as doubtless they shall: For some P5r 217
some particular persons may be raised to be
judged and condemned, for their wickednesses,
and cruelties, and outrages against Saints, and
sent presently into the place of torment, as the
Beast and the False Prophet are said to be,
though there be no mention of it, Rev. 20.
but the Saints onely are said to live; “They
lived and reigned with Christ, &c.”
And
whereas it is said, that “blessed and holy is he
that hath part in the first resurrection”
; that
croseses not this in Daniel: for if some of the
wicked be then raised to be judged, yet have
they no part in the first resurrection; for, the
dead in Christ shall be raised first; and it’s they
onely, being blessed and holy, that shall then
live and reign with Christ: but none others
shall, and so have not others any part in this
resurrection.

And another clear place that speaks both of
the personal appearing of Christ to reign on
earth, and to judge those that shall then be
raised, is that in 2 Tim. 4. 1. “I charge thee
before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ, who
shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing,
and his kingdom.”
Here the Apostle
speaks expresly of a time coming, wherein Jesus
Christ
must appear, and take his kingdom.
Now he always hath his kingdom in the heats of P5v 218
of his people, and appears to them always in
the Spirit: but this is another manner of appearing
and another manner of taking his kingdom,
which Paul here speaks of: for at this appearing,
and at this kingdom, he must judge the
quick and the dead. Those his enemies that
are then alive, he will judge; and some of
those that were then dead, he shall judge, (but
the rest shall not live again, until the thousand
yeers are finished;) and his Saints that were
dead, he shall raise, and give them everlasting
life, and grant them to reign with him a thousand
yeers.

Again, Zech. 14. 5. The Prophet in that
Chapter speaking of that time when the Lord
shall be King over all the earth, and there shall
be one Lord, and his Name one; says he there,
“And the Lord my God shall come, and all the
saints with thee.”
This is to be at that time,
when all the Nations must yeeld obedience to
Christ; and whosoever of all Nations refuses
to worship him, shall be plagued with a fearful
plague, as appears in that Chapter.

Thus is the Position that I have laid down,
in these Scriptures clear, That Jesus Christ shall
come with his Saints to reign on earth.

But again, we have Paul speaking of it,
1 Thess. 3. 13. where he prays that the Thessalonianssalo- P6r 219
may be established in holiness before
God even our Father, “at the coming of our
Lord Jesus Christ with all his Saints.”
Here
the Apostle expresly speaks of the coming of
our Lord Jesus with all his Saints: which confirms
what is said, That there is a time to come
(for it is not yet come) wherein Jesus Christ
will come on earth, and bring his Saints with
him.

And this is that which is also hinted at, Isa.
26. 19.
“Thy dead men shall live, together
with my dead body shall they arise. Awake
and sing, ye that dwell in the dust: for thy
dew is the dew of herbs, and the earth shall
cast out the dead.”
This is brought in as a
comfortable promise to the Saints, who are
complaining in the former part of the Chapter,
that though they have laboured, yet have they
not wrought any deliverance in the earth, neither
have the inhabitants of the earth fallen:
which seems to look like the times that were
before the 1645yeer 1645, when Jesus Christ
began to set his people at liberty from their
enemies: then they laboured, but all in vain, to
free themselves from being under the power of
the Beast: they laboured, but they had not
wrought any deliverance in the earth, neither
were the inhabitants of the world fallen; but now P6v 220
now this is brought in as a comfortable promise
to the Church, who are complaining of these
things; “Thy dead men shall live, together
with my dead body shall they arise. Awake,
and sing, ye that dwell in the dust, &c.”
implying,
that though these were their complaints
for a time, that yet it should not be so always;
there should a time come, when their dead men
should live, and, together with the body of
Christ, should be raised, (he being the first-
fruits of the resurrection from the dead:) and
they that slept in the dust should awake and
sing, and the earth should cast out the dead:
and this should be a joyful and comfortable
time, which should make amends for all their
sufferings. And about this time, he speaks of
the Lords coming out of his place, to punish
the inhabitants of the earth for their iniquity,
and for all the blood of his Saints which they
have spilt; as appears, vers. 21. And it’s certain
that the raising of the Saints to live and
reign with Christ, will soon follow upon
this.

Again, of this appearing of Christ it is that
the Prophet speaks Isai. 33. 17, 18. when he
speaks of him that is fire-proof, that shall dwell
with devouring fire, and everlasting burnings;
and says he to such a one, “Thine eye shall see the P7r 221
the King in his beauty.”
This is the time when
he shall appear in his glory and beauty indeed;
and his Saints shall visibly see him; and then
their eyes shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation,
&c. as it follows in that Chapter.

And further, of this visible and corporeal
coming of our Lord Jesus, doth the Angels
speak, Acts 1. 10, 11. when that our Lord
being with his disciples upon the mount called
Olivet; while they beheld, he was taken up,
and a cloud received him out of their sight:
and, saith the text, “While the disciples looked
stedfastly toward heaven, as Jesus went
up, behold, two men stood by them in white
apparel, and said unto them, ‘Why stand ye
looking up into heaven? this same Jesus
which is taken from you into heaven, shall
so come in like manner as you have seen him
go into heaven.’”
Now they visibly and corporeally
saw him go into heaven, and in the
same manner did they (and we are to) expect
that he shall come again. And what but this
doth our Saviour himself mean, when he says
to Philip, (who wondered that he should
know him when under the fig-tree) “Thou
shalt see greater things then these: for I say
unto you, Hereafter you shall see heaven
open, and the angels of God ascending and descend- P7v 222
descending upon the Son of man.”
Certainly
there is a truct in all these things, and
we shall see greater, and more glorious and
admirable things then yet we have seen.
And though the time be not yet come, yet certainly
it will come.

Again, in Act. 3. 19 20, 21. Peter tells us,
that “when the times of refreshing shall come
from the presence of the Lord”
(which time
Saints have long waited for) “that he shall
send Jesus Christ: whom the heavens must
receive, until the time of the restitution of
all things.”
That is, until he make new Heavens,
and new Earth, restore all things. The
Heavens, says he, must retain him until these
times, which were spoken of by all the holy
Prophets which have been since the world began.
But then Jesus Christ shall appear in
that presence which the heavens now do retain;
which is his corporeal presence, (for it
cannot be said of his spiritual presence, which
is alway with us) for which appearing his
Saints wait.

And thus have I laid down the several
Scriptures which do cleer this truth, wherein
it is abundantly proved, by several testimonies;
whereas two or three Scriptures might have been P8r 223
been authority sufficient to prevail. But the
Scripture is full in speaking of it: and indeed,
it was much in the hearts of the Saints in the
primitive times, as appears by their frequent
expressions of it, upon all occasions; even of
this coming of Christ. As 1 Thes. 5. 23. “And
the very God of peace sanctifie you wholly,
and I pray God your whole spirit, and soul,
and body, may be preserved blameless, unto
the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.”
And
1 Tim. 6. 14. “I charge thee, to keep this
commandment without spot, unto the appearing
of the Lord Jesus Christ; which in his
time will appear, who is the onely Potentate,
the King of Kings, and Lord of Lords, &c.”

And 2 Cor. 1. 14. “Ye also are our rejoycing,
in the day of the Lord Jesus.”
And 1 Thes.
1. 9, 10.
“And how ye turned to God from
Idols, to serve the living and true God,
and to wait for his son from heaven; whom
he raised from the dead, even Jesus which
delivered us from the wrath to come.”
And
1 Thes. 2. 19. “For what is our hope, or joy,
or crown of rijoycing? Are not even ye in
the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ, at his
coming?”
And 2 Thes. 2. 1, 2. “We beseech
you by the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ,
and by our gathering together unto him, that you P8v 224
you be not soon shaken in minde, &c.”
And
2 Tim. 4. 8. “Henceforth there is laid up for
me a Crown of rigteousness, which the
Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me at
that day; and not to me onely, but to them
also that love his appearing.”
Thus these
Saints had much in their eye the day of Christ,
the coming of Christ, the appearing of Christ.
And the Apostle makes it a principal piece of
Religion: For speaking of the Thessalonians,
when they were converted, he says, “They turned
from Idols”
; what to do? “To serve the living
and true God”
; and what? “To wait for
his Son from heaven.”
Though that day was far
off, as the Apostle himself elsewhere informs
them, yet they did so firmly believe this, his
coming from Heaven, and their being gathered
unto him, as they might truly be said to be waiters
for it.

Of the Manner of the coming of Christ
and his Saints, and with what
bodies they shall come.

But now this Question may be propounded,
It being granted to be an undoubted truth, that
Jesus Christ shall personally appear on earth
and that the Saints departed shall be raised from Q1r 125225
from the dead, to raign with him in that
day, With what bodies shall Christ and his
Saints come? And how shall they be
raised up? Doth the Scripture say any thing
to that?

I answer, Yes: For hitherto I have quoted
the Scriptures, that speak onely of his coming,
and the Saints being raised; but there are other
Scriptures, which speak of the manner
how, as that Rev. 1. 7. “Behold, he cometh
with clouds, and every eye shall see him,
&c.”
And Luke 21. 26, 27. “For the powers
of the heaven shall be shaken; and then shall
they see the Son of man coming in a cloud,
with power and great glory.”
And Mat. 24
30, 31.
“And they shall see the Son of man
coming in the clouds of heaven, with power
and great glory. And he shall send his Angels,
with a great sound of a trumpet, and
and they shall gather together his elect, &c.”

And v. 27. “As the lightening cometh out of
the east, and shineth even unto the West;
so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.”

So that it is cleer, that as the Angels told his disciples,
when they saw a cloud to receive him
out of their sight, that he should so appear out
of the clouds, in like manner as they had seen
him go into Heaven; and as Angels then attendedQ tended Q1v 226
him: so will Angels much more at his
appearing, attend him; and he shall come with
power and great glory.

Now we know, that as the Apostle says of
the Resurrection of the body, that it’s; raised
spiritual: it’s sown a natural body, it’s raised a
spiritual body; it’s sown in corruption, it’s
raised in incorruption; it’s sown in dishonour,
it’s raised in glory; it’s sown in weakness, it’s
raised in power. So we know was the body
of Christ after his resurrection: it was not a
natural body, but a spiritual; it was not corruptible,
but an incorruptible; it was not mean
nor weak, but glorious, and powerful: and
being thus a spiritual body, and incorruptible,
&c. it was quick in motion; upon a sudden
appearing to his Disciples, and suddenly gone
from them again. And it was passable to all
places: it appears to the Disciples when the dores
are shut, and ascends up into the Heavens in
their sight.

These things a natural body cannot do, but
a spiritual and a glorious can. And therefore
he is said to come as the lightning that quickly
shineth from one end of the Heaven to the
other; so can the body of Christ, when he appeareth,
quickly pass from one end of the
Heaven to another, to be visibly seen of all his Saints, Q2r 227
Saints, to their joy, but to the terrour of their
enemies: and so he will come in the clouds,
and every eye shall see him, with power and
great glory.

And as the Scriptures speak thus of Christ
in his coming, so there are Scriptures which
speak of the Saints, in their appearing with
him; As Col. 3. 4. “When Christ who is our
life shall appear, then shall we appear with
him in glory.”
Thus the Saints then, were
fully perswaded of the appearing of Jesus
Christ
, and spake often of it: and knew that
at his appearing, as he should appear in power,
and great glory; so they should appear with
him in glory. And so again, 1 Joh. 3. 2. “Beloved,
now are we the sons of God, and it
doth not yet appear what we shall be: but we
know, that when he shall appear, we shall be
like him; for we shall see him as he is.”
And
so again, Phil. 3. 20, 21. “For our conversation
is in heaven, from whence also we look
for the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ; who
shall change our vile body that it may be fashioned
like unto his glorious body, according
to the working whereby he is able to
subdue all things unto himself.”
Thus in this
manner, shall the Saints that come with him,
appear with him in glory: and their bodies beingQ2 ing Q2v 128228
raised, shall be fashioned like unto his glorious
body.

And now I shall conclude all that I have
said touching this glorious appearing of Christ
on earth, and the Saints raigning with him on
earth, with that precious Counsel of our blessed
Saviour, worthy the dayly observation of
all Saints, (as the use which is to be made of
all that which is in Scripture spoken of this appearing
and kingdom of Jesus Christ) which
we have, Luke 21. 36. “Watch ye therefore,
and pray always, that ye may be accounted
worthy to escape all these things that shall
come to pass, and stand before the Son of man.”

Knowing what he hath said, Rev. 22. 20. “He
which testifieth these things, saith, ‘Surely I
come quickly. Amen. Even so, Come Lord
Jesus
.’”

Of the ceasing of wars, and the perfect
peace and tranquility that shall
be enjoyed for a thousand
yeers.

I now proceed, in the further description of
this new world, the Heavens, and the new
Earth, which is to follow upon that great day
we have spoken of.

And Q3r 129229

And in the next place, shall shew how that
after this time, and during this thousand yeers
of the Saints raigning with Christ on earth,
all wars shall cease. All the enemies of the
Church being thus gloriously overcome, as
hath been shewed, there shall be no enemy left,
that shall ever stir, To much as to prepare to
make war against the Saints any more. And
this is cleer, Micah 4. 3. and Isa. 2. 4. Where
it is said, that in the last days, when the mountain
of the Lords house shall be established in
the top of the mountains, that then “they shall
beat their swords into plow-shares, and their
spears into pruning-hooks: Nation shall not
lift up sword against Nation, neither shall
they learn war any more.”
There shall be such
peace and tranquility, and this peace so firm,
and they so certain of the abiding of it, as that
they shall see, that they shall have no need of
using swords and spears any more; And therefore
they shall beat these instruments of war,
which they shall no more use, into instruments
of husbandry, which they, then living in peace,
shall have occasion to use. For they shall sow
seed, and reap it; and plant vineyards, and drink
the fruit thereof. And therefore Micah thus
expresses the peace they shall have ( Mic. 4. 4.)
“They shal sit every man under his vine & underQ3 der Q3v 230
his fig-tree, and none shall make them afraid.”
They shall have no fear of war; none
shall make them afraid: Such peace shall they
have. And Isa. 33. 20. the Prophet speaking
of these peaceful times, speaks thus: “Thine eys
shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation, a tabernacle
that shall not be broken down; not
one of the stakes thereof shall ever be removed,
neither shall any of the cords thereof
be broken.”
Which fully manifesteth what security,
or rather what stability there shall be in
these times of peace. Again, Isa. 32. 18. the
peace of these times is thus exprest: “And my
people shall dwell in a peaceable habitation,
and in sure dwellings, and in quiet resting
places.”
And Isa. 60. 17, 18. it is further
exprest thus: “In that day” (saith the Lord to
his Sion) “I will make thy officers peace, and
thine exactors righteousness: violence
shall no more be heard in thy land, wasting
nor destruction within thy borders: thou
shalt call thy walls salvation, and thy gates
praise.”
Thus with full, and emphatical expressions,
is the peace and tranquility of the
Church in these times set forth. There are
many other passages to this purpose; but these
being sufficient, I shall adde no more in this
place, but proceed.

Of Q4r 231

Of the binding of Satan for a thousand
yeers.

And the next thing I shall speak of, as that
which is to be done immediately upon this
great day of the overthrow of the Saints enemies,
and the setling of them in peace, shall be
this: That not onely the external and visible
enemies of the Saints shall be subdued, and
put under the Mal. 4. feet of Christ and his
Saints; but that also their internal and
invisible enemies shall be chained up: for now
the Saints wrestle, not onely with flesh and
blood, but with principalities, and powers, and
spiritual wickednesses in high places; and now
their adversary the devil goeth about as a roaring
lion, seeking whom he may devour: but
then, this adversary of theirs shall have no
power to oppose them for this thousand yeers:
but he shall be bound up: for so says the holy
Spirit, Rev. 20. 1, 2, 3. “And I saw an angel
come down from heaven, having the key of
the bottomless pit, and a great chain in his
hand; and he laid hold on the dragon, that
old serpant, which is the devil and Satan,
and bound him a thousand yeers, and cast
him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up, Q4 and Q4v 132232
and set a seal upon him, that he should deceive
the nations no more until the thousand
yeers should be fulfilled: and after that, he
must be loosed for a little season.”
Here we
see, that for this thousand yeers, after the destruction
of the Beast, and False Prophet, and
the Kings of the earth, and all other enemies of
the Saints; that grand enemy of the Saints
is laid lowe also, even that roaring lion. And
that ye may be sure ’tis he that is thus clapt under
hathces, he is here set out under those several
denominations that the Scripture in several
places gives him. And first, he is stiled
the Dragon: but lest it should be doubtful
what the dragon is, it follows, that he is that
old Serpent: and lest this be not plain enough,
it is further said, Which is the devil, and Satan.
Thus this enemy of the Saints is, we see, to be
bound up also; and therefore it is said, that an
angel, having a great chain in his hand, laid hold
of him, and bound him for a thousand yeers:
and he did not onely binde him, but cast him
into the bottomless pit: nay, and not onely so,
but he shut him up in the pit, and set a seal
upon him; importing the doing of it to purpose,
the doing of it securely; that so he might
deceive the Nations no more, until the thousand
yeers were finished. Thus it is clear, that, in this Q5r 133233
this thousand yeers, this great enemy of the
Saints shall have no power to molest them.
And this is that which Paul also speaks of,
Rom. 16. 20. “The God of peace shall tread
Satan under your feet shortly.”
In that the
Apostle speaks of the doing of it in the future
time, as that it shall be done shortly; it is clear,
that he means not that treading down of Satan
which was then already done, even that which
Christ had done upon the Cross, when he conquered
sin and Satan, and so, in a sence, trod
Satan under the feet of his Saints; but of a
further treading of him under feet, which was
to be done in future times. But yet we have not
seen Satan troden any more under feet then he
was in the Apostles times: for greater was his
prevalencie in the midnight of Popery, then in
the Apostles time is was: Therefore this treading
under foot of Satan, of which Paul speaks.
is yet to come: and doubtless the Apostle
speaks of this time when Satan shall be bound
up, and shut up in the bottomless put, and sealed:
And when this time is come, will this prophecie
of Paul be made good, “The God of
peace shall tread Satan under your feet
shortly.”

And Q5v 234

And now, having thus far described this new
world, shewing how it shall be setled in peace
by the God of peace, and that Satan shall be
troden under the feet of his Saints; I shall
now proceed to declare the great and glorious
priviledges that shall then and in this kingdom,
be conferred upon the Saints.

And they may be referred to two Heads:

  • 1. Spiritual, and internal.
  • 2, Outward, and external.

Of the spiritual priviledges and prerogatives
that Saints shall then enjoy.

And first, I shall speak of the spiritual priviledges
and blessings which the Saints shall
then enjoy: for therein shall be their greatest
joy and glory; and without which, the other
sort of blessings would be rather hurtful then
profitable to them. Now the fountain of all
their spiritual advantages and priviledges, will
consist in the abundant pouring out of the Spirit
upon them: of which I shall first speak,
and then of the particular effects and benefits
of it. And of this abundant pouring out of
the Spirit, the Scripture speaks plentifully in several
places; as Isa. 44. 3. “I will pour water upon Q6r 235
upon him that is thirsty, and floods upon the
dry ground: I will pour my Spirit upon thy
seed, and my blessing upon thine off-spring.”

Thus abundantly will the Spirit be poured out,
as he here promises that he will pour it out by
floods: it shall not be by drops, or by small
streams, but by floods shall it be poured out,
upon those that are dry and thirsty. But how
do some Saints now thirst after these waters of
life; being as dry and parched ground, for
want of it! But alas! they have but now and
then some drops; or at most, some small streams
of it, that doth a little refresh them, and
quicken them. But where is the soul that hath
those floods of the Spirit yet poured upon it?
How do the best of the Saints complain for want
hereof? But the time is coming, when they
shall have no cause to complain: for they shall
have floods of the Spirit poured out upon
them. And this is the time which is also spoken
of, Isai. 32. 15. when “the Spirit shall be
poured out from on high; and the wilderness
shall be a fruitful field, and the fruitful field
be counted for a forest.”
Here the holy Ghost
says, that at this time the Spirit shall be so
abundantly poured out upon the Saints, as that
those that were lookt upon as a wilderness for
barrenness, shall now become a fruitful field; and Q6v 136236
and those that were formerly a fruitful field,
should be accounted as a forest, in comparison
of the fruitful fields that shall then be.

Again, Joel 2. 28. “And it shall come to
pass, that I will pour out my Spirit upon all
flesh; and your sons and your daughters
shall prophesie: your old men shall dream
dreams, and your young men shall see visions:
and also upon the servants, and upon the
handmaids, in those days, will I pour out my
Spirit.”
This prophecie is clearly a prophecie
of this time: for it is expresly said, that this
shall come to pass in that time, when the Lord
will plead with all Nations, for the controversies
which his Sion hath against them; which
now he will do, in these later days; and which
never yet hath been so fully done, as he then will
do. And he says, that when he doth this, his
people shall never be ashamed any more: which
time is yet to come, therefore this promise hath
not yet been fulfilled. Besides, it’s clear that
this promise was never yet fulfilled: for when
was ever this promise in the fulness, in the altitude
and latitude, fulfulled? When was the
Spirit poured upon all flesh? When was the
Spirit generally poured out? Was it ever
poured out upon all flesh? The greater number
of people may, indeed, receive denominationnation Q7r 137237
of All the people: but the least number
of people, as one of an hundred, or one of a
thousand, cannot be said to be All. But when
was the Spirit poured out so much as upon one
of a thousand? Again, when was the Spirit
so abundantly upon all ages, degrees, and
sexes, as that all might prophesie, that is, (in
the lowest sence) be able to speak to edification,
exhortation, and comfort? How few of those
that are Saints, have the spirit of Prophecie in
this sence, to any purpose, upon them, carrying
of them forth to publish the Gospel, for the
edifying, comforting, or conversion of others?
The number of those is very small; witness
the complaints of many Country-towns and
Parishes, even within this Kingdom, which
they make for the want of faithful able men to
preach the Gospel among them. And if there
be very few men that are thus furnished with
this gift of the Spirit; how few are the women!
Not but that there are many godly women,
many who have indeed received the Spirit: but
in how small a measure is it? how weak are
they? and how unable to prophesie? for it is
that that I am speaking of, which this text says
they shall do; which yet we see not fulfilled.
Indeed, they have tasted of the sweetness of the
Spirit; and having tasted, are longing for more, Q7v 238
more, and are ready to receive from those few
that are in any measure furnished with the
gifts of the Spirit for prophesying; but they
are generally very unable to communicate to
others, though they would do it many times in
their families, among their children and servants:
and when they would be communicating
to others into whose company they come,
though sometimes some sprinklings come from
them, yet at other times they finde themselves
dry and barren. But the time is coming,
when this promise shall be fulfilled, and the
That all
ages, sexes
& degrees
shall have
the spirit of
Prophecie
in these last
days.
Saints shall be abundantly filled
with the Spirit; and not onely men,
but women shall prophesie; not onely
aged men, but young men; not
onely superiours, but inferiours; not
onlely those that have University-
learning but those that have it not;
even servants and handmaids.

For this by the way let me say, There is
nothing absolutely necessary to the making of
a convert, and of a convert, a publisher of the
Gospel, which a soul that is but furnished onely
with Understanding and Reason is not capable
of, if the Spirit be poured out upon it; whether
it be a Heathen (so called for distinction
sake) or one brought up in the profession of Christi- Q8r 239
Christianity; or whether it be learned, or unlearned;
or whether it be male, or female: I
say, a soul indued with Understanding and Reason,
is capable of Religion, and all religious
performances, if it be indued with the Spirit;
and there is not other thing absolutely necessary
thereunto. And when the Spirit shall be more
abundantly poured out upon Saints, this shall
be made evident; so that, according to this
gracious promise, sons and daughters, servants
and handmaids, old men and young men shall
prophesie.

But some may say, This promise was fulfilled
in the Apostles times; and the Apostle
Peter expresly cites it, Acts 2. 18. when the
Spirit was thenthen poured out uponupon them.

But to that I answer, It is true, the Apostle
Peter cites it there; but it doth not therefore
follow, that this promise was then fulfilled;
neither was it; but the Apostle cites it upon
this occasion: The twelve Apostles having
then received the promise of the pouring out of
the Spirit, it carried them forth powerfully,
and wonderfully, and in an extraordinary
manner, to speak forth the things of God;
which when those that were in Jerusalem,
both strangers and others, saw and heard, they
began to marvel at it, and to say, that they were Q8v 140240
were full of new wine. But the Apostle Peter
understanding this, stands up, and tells them,
that they were not drunken, as they supposed;
but cites to them this Scripture, whereby he
would have them to understand, that this need
not be so strange to them, which they then saw
and heard in them, if they considered what was
promised long ago in the Prophet Joel, That
the Spirit should be abundantly poured out
upon all flesh: and considering this, they need
not wonder thus to see the Spirit now poured
out upon a few men. But though the Apostle
thus, to this end, there cites this Scripture, yet
was it not then in the kargness of it fulfilled:
For in those times, though some men, young
and old, and some women, some of their sons
and daughters did prophesie; yet were it very
few, in comparison of those that did not: and
therefore it could not be said, that the Spirit
was then poured out upon “All flesh”; but that time
is to come, and is to be in that day we are
speaking of, wherein indeed the Spirit shall be
poured out upon all flesh in an abundant manner,
and come no whit short of what this
Scripture imports. So that, though for the
time which hath been ever since the Apostles
days, to this present time, it may be said of the
Church, of the Saints of God, that they have lien R1r 241
lien among the pots, (that I may allude to
that of the Psalmist, Psal. 78. 13.) in respect
of that obscurity, and deformity, in which they
have been, for want of that spiritual glory,
which the abundant pourings out of the Spirit
will put upon them: yet at this time (to use
the Psalmists expression) they shall be “as the
wings of a dove, covered with silver,
and her feathers with yellow gold”
: that
soil, filthiness, corruption, and deformity that
hath appeared in them, wherein, in many respects,
they have seemed to be as worldlings
are, covered over with earth, and sullyed with
the blackness of corruption, as having a lien among
the pots, all this shall be done away,
and as innocent doves, they shall mount up, and
shine in splendor, and purity; when more
abundantly the Spirit shall be poured out upon
them.

And this time it is that is spoken of, Isa. 52.
1, 2.
Where the Lord is speaking thus to the
Church. “Awake, awake, put on thy strength,
O Sion; put on thy beautiful garments, O Jerusalem
the holy city: for henceforth there
shall no more come into thee the uncircumcised
and the unclean: Shake thy self from
the dust, arise, and sit down, O Jerusalem,
and loose thy self from R the R1v 242
the bands of thy neck, O captive daughter
of Sion.”
It’s the presence of the Spirit in the
fulness of it, that beautifies the Saints, and
cloaths them with beautiful garments, and is
their strength: and by it they arise, and mount
up above the world, and shake themselves
from the dust; and are losed from all their
bonds, and are made free.

This time is also spoken of, Isa. 60. 1, 2.
Where the Lord speaks thus to his Church:
“Arise, shine; for thy light is come, and the
glory of the Lord is risen upon thee: for behold,
darkness shall cover the earth, and
gross darkness the people; but the Lord
shall arise upon thee, and his glory shall be
seen upon thee. And the Gentiles shall come
to thy light, and kings to the brightness of
thy rising.”
And v. 19, 20. “The sun shall be
no more thy light by day, neither for brightness
shall the moon give light to thee: but
the Lord shall be unto thee an everlasting
light, and thy God, thy glory. Thy sun
shall no more go down, neither shall thy
moon withdraw it self; for the Lord
shall be thine everlasting light, and
the days of they mourning shall be
ended.”
How glorious shall the Church be,
when thus, the glory of the Lord shall be seen upon R2r 243
upon them in such fulness! It is true, there is
in every true Saint, and hath been, in the darkest
times of Popery, in the times of their greatest
weakness, and darkness, some true glory:
But how hath it been besmeared and eclipsed
with their weaknesses, and corruptions that
have appeared in them? But now the Spirit
shall be poured so abundantly upon them, as
they shall arise and shine. Now the Sun and
Moon shall be no more their light; those
means, and appointments wherein formerly
they received light, and saw some brightness;
they shall now be no lights comparatively: for
being compared with those full pourings out
of the Spirit, that they shall then have, and
those immediate inlightnings they shall then
receive from God, they shall be no lights, and
be of no use unto them; because the Lord will
be their everlasting light, and their God their
glory. And it being so, their Sun shall no
more go down, nor their Moon withdraw its
self; and the days of their mourning shall be
ended. They shall no more have a midnight
of Popery overspreading them, nor no more
be burthened and bowed down by corruptions,
nor no more be afflicted by their enemies.
Their mourning dark days are past away, and
they shall live in joy, light, and glory for ever.

R2 But R2v 244

But thus having spoken in the general of the
happy condition in which the Saints shall be,
in regard of the fulness of the Spirit which
shall be poured out upon them; I shall now
proceed to the particular efefcts which the Spirit
shall then work in them; as the Scripture
declares, that the Saints in these days shall be
filled with the Spirit.

  • 1

    By which they shall be filled with
    knowledge.
  • 2

    By which they shall be in an humble
    frame.
  • 3

    By which they shall be filled with love.
  • 4

    By which they shall be filled with a holy
    filial fear.
  • 5

    By which they shall be enabled to worship
    the Lord acceptably.
  • 6

    By which they shall be all united.
  • 7

    By which they shall be enabled to act
    justly and righteously.
  • 8

    By which they shall be put into a meek
    and sweet frame.
  • 9

    By which the weak shall be made strong.
  • 10

    By which they shall be enabled to
    speak a pure language.
  • 11

    By which their minds and affectations
    shall be raised and made heavenly
  • 12

    By which their wills shall be swallowed
    up in the will of God.
  • 13 By R3r 245
  • 13

    By which they shall walk in the integrity
    and singleness of their hearts.
  • 14

    By which they shall be enabled to
    mortifie all corruptions.
  • 15

    By which they shall appear very glorious
    in the eyes of all.
  • 16

    By which they shall be enabled to
    make a holy use of all the creatures. And,
  • 17

    By which they shall abundantly be filed
    with divine joy.

I shall begin with the first; That the Saints
having an abundant measure of the Spirit, shall
then be filled with knowledg. How Saints
shall be fil’d
with knowledge.
And
this appears cleerly in that known
place, Isa, 11. 9 “For the earth shall
be filled with the knowledge of
the Lord, as the waters cover the sea.”
This
whole chapter is a cleer Prophecie of this time,
when there shall be new Heavens, and a new
earth; and an universal rectitude shall appear
in all the world: as appears in that chapter.
Then shall knowledge abound in the world:
the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of
the Lord. It is not said, With humane knowledge
of the Lord; yea, so full of divine
light and knowledge shall they then be, as they R3 shall R3v 246
shall have no cause to complain, that they have
but little, and they want more; for if the Sea
may be said to want waters, then may they
complain; but they shall have no cause: for they
shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord,
as the waters cover the Sea, in this day when
Jesus Christ and his Saints shall gloriously
reign on earth. And then in a most eminent
manner shall that part of the new Covenant be
made good, which saith they shall no more
teach every man his neighbour, saying, “Know
the Lord; for they shall all know me, from the
least of them, to the greatest of them, saith the
Lord,”
Jer. 31. 34. Though it is true that in a
sence this is now made good to the Saints; for
the least of Saints hath a true knowledge of
God, though but in a weak degree; but
then most eminently shall this promise be
made good.

Again, Isai. 54. 13. in which Chapter,
the Lord makes many glorious promises of
what he will do for his people, in this time
wherein he will put more glory upon them,
then ever he hath yet done. At the thirteenth
verse it’s said, “And all thy children shall be
taught of the Lord, and great shall be the
peace of thy children.”
Thus with an abundant
measure of divine knowledge, shall Saints R4r 247
Saints be filled in that time.

But secondly, being thus filled with the Spirit,
they shall be thereby made fully sensible of
their own unworthiness, and so walk humbly
That Saints
shall be in
an humble
frame in
those times.
before the Lord. For when
they shall consider in that time,
what great and glorious things
God hath done for them; how he
hath magnified his grace to them,
in giving of them full deliverance; and times of
peace and joy, for all their times of sorrow;
and doubling their joys for their sorrow, (as
Isai. 61. 7.) so as they never underwent so
many sorrows, but they shall partake of double
joys; and that everlastingly: and when
they shall consider that all this is from free
love, and tender mercy to an unworthy people,
it will put them into a very humble posture.
And this is clear, Ezek. 16. 60, 61, &c.
where the Lord having promised, that notwithstanding
all the unworthinesses of his people
which are there enumerated, yet he will
do glorious things for them; but he tells them,
that when he doth so for them, that then they
shall be ashamed of their ways, and remember
them, and be confounded, and never open
their mouth any more, because of their shame,
when he is pacified toward them. The considerationR4 side- R4v 248
of the grace of God to such as were
unworthy, shall so melt and humble their
hearts before him, the Spirit being abundantly
in them, as they shall never be lifted up in the
pride of their hearts any more. The like we
have, Ezek. 36. which is a Prophecie of this
time; where, at vers. 27. God promises to
pour out his Spirit upon them: and when he
hath so done, at the 31 verse he says, That
then “they shall remember their evil ways,
and doings that were not good, and loath
themselves in their own sight, for thei iniquities
and their abominations.”
Though
these be times in which Saints shall be advanced
The higher
the Saints
are, the more
humble.
higher then ever they were;
yet, being filled with the Spirit,
they shall walk more humbly then
ever, and be more little in their
own eyes then ever. The truth is, none but
such as are humble, shall be the Citizens of this
New Jerusalem: and theremore, Mal. 4. 1.
it is said, that when that day cometh, it shall
burn as an oven; and all the proud shall be
burnt up: no proud men must be left; it shall
be onely such as walk humbly before the Lord,
that shall live in this Kingdom.

But thirdly, The Spirit being thus abundantly
poured out upon the Saints, they will be thereby R5r 249
thereby filled How Saints
shall then be
filled with
Love.
with love, and that
in a most eminent manner; so that,
as David, being filled with the
Spirit, says, “I will love thee, O
Lord my strength”
; so shall they also most
truely and cordially say it, with wonderfully-
raised and inflamed affections. For where
much of the Spirit is, there must needs be much
Love; for the Spirit of God is the spirit of
Love it self. And because of the great love
that Saints shall have to God, it’s said, Psal.
149. 3.
that “the children of Sion shall be
joyful in their King”
: he alone indeed shall
be the joy of their hearts; in him and in nothing
else, will they be satisfied: It is not their
corn, and wine, and oyl; it is not all the outward
enjoyments which they shall then abundantly
have; but it is the Lord alone, that will
be their greatest joy and pleasure: and therefore,
Mal. 3. 1. it’s said, “The Lord, whom ye
seek, shall suddenly come to his temple;
even the Messenger of the covenant, in
whom ye delight.”
There Jesus Christ is set
forth as the object of the Saints love and delight.
It’s true, he is so now; but in that day,
will most eminently be so. And it’s evident it
will be so: for, if we compare Rev. 19. 7, 8.
with Rev. 21. 2, 3. we shall finde, that then the R5v 250
the Saints are solemnly taken, to become the
Bride, the Lamb’s wife; which argues that ardent
and entire affection shall then be in the
Saints to Christ. But then, O what mutual
exchanges of love will there be between Christ
and his Saints! And therefore the Lord thus
highly and wonderfully expresses himself,
Zeph. 3. 16, 17. (which I can never read but
with great admiration) “In that day shall it be
said, Fear thou not, Sion: for the Lord thy
God in the midst of thee is mighty: he will
save thee, he will rejoyce over thee with
joy; he will rest in his love; he will joy over
thee with singing.”
What high and marvellous
expressions are these, that the most high
and holy One should thus express his love to
poor, empty, unworthy, nothing creatures!
What, that he will rejoyce over them! Shall
they be a joy to him! Nay more, that he will
not onely love them, but rest in his love; as being
that wherein he can acquiesce, rest, besatisfied:
And what? be so well satisfied therein,
as to joy over his Sion with singing. O wonderful!
what can be more said! Who can
sufficiently admire at the height, and depth,
and breadth, and length of this love of God,
which passeth knowledge! And how great
must the love of Saints be, when they come more R6r 251
more fully to apprehend this! For this love begets
their love: His love to them, is the spring
of their love to him.

But fourthly, Being filled with the Spirit,
they shall be thereby What holy
sweet, & filial
fear shall
be in the
Saints then.
filled with a
holy fear of the Lord: Not that any
distracting disquieting fear shall be
upon them, or any slavish fear; but
a holy filial fear shall abide upon
them; such a fear as will well become the sons
and daughters of the Almighty; whereby they
shall be the better fitted to serve and honour
their God and Father. And of this the holy
Ghost speaks, Isa. 60. 5. where speaking of
these times, wherein God will do such glorious
things for his people, he saith, “Their heart
shall fear, and be enlarged.”
It shall not be a
fear that shall disturb the Saints, or make them
walk heavily, or straiten them in their services;
but an enlarging fear: Their heart shall fear,
and be enlarged. Such a holy fear the Spirit
always puts into the hearts of the Saints, to
make them fit for the service of God. And
therefore the Psalmist hath this expression,
Psal. 2. “Serve the Lord with fear, and rejoyce
with trembling”
: implying, that such
service, and such joy, is most acceptable, is
sweetest, is best. And so again the Prophet Hosea R6v 252
Hosea speaking of this glorious time, Hos. 3. 5.
says he, “They shall fear the Lord, and his
goodness, in the later days.”
It is not, that
they shall fear the Lord and his wrath: that
they shall fear the indignation of the Lord:
no; they shall have no cause so to fear, his
love shall be so visibly and gloriously manifested
to them; but they shall fear the Lord,
and his goodness: a holy reverential fear, under
the sence of goodness, shall be in their hearts.
And that such sercvices as have most of this holy
fear in them, are most spiritual, and most
sweet, is well known to the experience of
Saints. And that such a fear shall be in the
hearts of Saints in that time we are speaking of,
is also exprest, Jer. 33. 9. “And they shall
fear and tremble, for all the goodness and
for all the prosperity that I procure unto
them.”
The manifestation of goodness and
love shall beget in them in whose heart the Spirit
is, a holy fear and trembling before the Lord.

But fifthly, Being thus filled with the Spirit,
they shall be enabled to worship the Lord acceptably
How Saints
shall then
purely worship
God.
and purely. The worship
of God shall then be totally
freed from mens inventions; and
they shall them worship God according
to his own will: For, what his will about R7r 253
about his Worship and service shall them be,
shall be clearly known among his people and
be visible to all that truely desire to worship
him; as appears, Isa. 2. 2, 3. and Mic. 4.
1, 2.
“It shall come to pass in the last days,
that the mountain of the Lords house shall
be established in the top of the mountains;
and all nations shall flow unto it: And many
people shall go and say, ‘Come ye, and let us
group unto the mountain of the Lord, to the
house of the God of Jacob; and he will teach
us of his ways, and we will walk in his
paths. For out of Sion shall go forth the law,
and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem.’”

Here it is evident, that he will then clearly discover
his will about his Worship to his people;
and that his people shall purely worship him.
A parallel place to this, we have, Zech. 8. 20,
21, 22.
“And there shall come people, and
the inhabitants of many cities: and the inhabitants
of one city shall go to another,
saying, ‘Let us go speedily to pray before the
Lord and to seek the Lord of hosts: I will
go also.’
Yea, many people, and strong nations,
shall come to seek the Lord of hosts in
Jerusalem, and to pray before the Lord.”

What is meant by “Jerusalem” here spoken of?
Whether it may be mystically, or literally taken, I will R7v 254
I will not here dispute: but whether it be taken
mystically, or literally; this is cleer,
that in this time, the multitudes of the
Saints of God in all Nations, shall cleerly
know the minde of God about his
worship, and by the Spirit shall be enabled
purely to perform it.

But here some may quesion, what Ordinances
shall be used at that time? And how shall
Saints then worship God?

To which in answer, I say, That what Ordinances
there shall then be used, is hard to be
determined; in regard the Scripture speaks
not directly, and particularly, what the Ordinances
are, that shall then be used: but as the
practice of some of them is to be referred for
those times onely, so likewise is the cleer knowledge
of them; not to be had till those times.

And for my part, I shall not dare, not presume
to speak any thing about the Ordinances,
or manner in Worship, that shall be in
these times, but what the Scripture cleerly holdeth
forth; which is doubtless sufficient for us to
know.

And first, to speak of what shall not then be
practised. I finde it implyed by Paul, 1 Cor. 11. R8r 255
11. 26.
That the Ordinance
of the
Supper shall
then cease.
that the Ordinace of
breaking bread shall not be then
practised: for he says there, that
in that Ordinance, they do shew
forth the Lords death till he come; implying,
that when he cometh, and is present with his
people, it shall not be then practised; they
shall not need to do that in remembrance of
him, as now they are commanded to do.

But whether any other Ordinance shall
cease, or not, the Scripture is silent. And the
Scripture being silent, who dares say that any
other shall cease? Though on the other hand,
there be no ground to say, that such or such an
Ordinance shall continue; if the Scripture say
it not.

But secondly, This the Scripture cleerly
speaks, that that part of the worship of God
which consisteth in How God shall
then be worshipped
in prayer
and praises.
Prayer and
Praise, shall continue. So that it
concerns all to beware how they
say that it shall cease: for that
these shall continue, is cleer, in the forementioned
place, Zech. 8. 20, 21. Where it is said,
that “many people shall go to seek the Lord of
hosts, and to pray before the Lord.”
And Isa.
12. 1, 4 5.
“In that day thou shalt say, ‘O
Lord, I will praise thee:’
and ye shall say,
Praise the Lord, call upon his name, declare his R8v 256
his doings among the people; make mention
that his Name is exalted. Sing nunto
the Lord; for he hath done excellent things;
this is known in all the earth. Cry out, and
shout, thou inhabitant of Sion; for great is
the holy One of Israel in the midst of thee.”

And Isa. 65. 24. “In that day it shall be, that
before they call, I will answer; and while they
are yet speaking I will hear.”
And Jer. 33.
11.
“In that day there shall be heard the
voyce of them that rejoyce, and say, Praise
the Lord of Hosts; for the Lord is good, for
his mercy endureth for ever: and of them
that shall bring the Sacrifice of praise
into the house of the Lord.”
Thus is it cleer,
in these Scriptures, that this part of the worship
of God, which consisteth in Prayer, and praise,
shall then continue.

But thirdly, There are some things about the
worship of God that shall be in these times,
which the Scripture speals of, but not
cleerly; as that there shall be an observation
of That there shall then
be an observation of
new Moons and Sabbaths,
and a keeping
a feast of tabernacles,
wherein God shall be
worshipped.
new Moons, and of
Sabbaths, wherein God
shal be worshipped; and
a keeping of a feast of
tabernacles; As Isa. 66.
23.
“And it shall come
to pass, that from one new S1r 257
new moon to another, and from one Sabbath-
to another. shall all flesh come to worship before
me, saith the Lord.”
And Zech. 14. 16.
“And it shall come to pass, that every one
that is left, of all the nations which came
against Jerusalem, shall even go up, from
yeer to yeer, to worship the King, the Lord
of hosts; and to keep the feast of tabernacles.”
Here it is expresly said, that from
one new Moon to another, and from one Sabbath
to another, all flesh shall come to worship
before the Lord. But what Sabbaths
these shall be, and what worship shall be performed
on these Sabbaths, the Scripture speaks
not cleerly of. And here it’s said, that there
shall be an yeerly keeping of the Feast of Tabernacles,
wherein they shall worship the
King, the Lord of hosts; but what feast of
Tabelnacles this shall be, and for what particular
end it shall be observed, is doubtful. We
know that under the Law, the Feast of Tabernacles
was kept at the ingathering of all the
fruits of the fields; wherein they were all to
rejoyce before the Lord. But this rejoycing
Feast, that shall then be kept, may be for higher
things then these: but positively to say this,
or that, we may not; for the Scripture is therein
silent.

S But S1v 258

But fourthly, The Scripture cleerly declares,
That in that time, they shall have the Lord himself
to be to them That Saints shall then
have no need of a Temple,
no need to be
taught by others; the
Lord shall be in stead of
a Temple to them.
in stead
of a Temple: As Revel.
21. 22.
“And I saw no
Temple in the new Jerusalem;
for the Lord
God Almighty, and the
Lamb, are the Temple of it.”
The Temple
in this place, is to be understood as the place
where they were wont to resort for knowledge:
for in the Temple was the Ark of the Testament;
there the Will of God, and the Laws
of God, were to be understood. And therefore
David, Psal. 73. 16, 17. professes his
ignorance, until he went into the Sanctuary,
and there received knowledge. But in this
time, there shall be no need of a Temple for
this: “For the Lord God Almighty, and the
Lamb, are the Temple of it.”
And it follows,
vers. 23. “And the city had no need of the
sun, neither of the moon to shine in it; for
the glory of God did lighten it, and the
Lamb is the light thereof.”
They shall then
have no need of those men, that shine as the
Sun and Moon to the Church, to inlighten others:
no, but then, as I have said, They shall
be all immediately taught of God; and they shall S2r 259
shall not need to teach one another, saying,
Know the Lord; but the glory of the Lord,
and the Lamb, shall lighten them.

And thus, as far as I have been enabled, and
the Scripture giving clear testimony, have I answered
that Question, What Ordinances shall
be used at that time, and how shall Saints then
worship God? I proceed.

Sixthly, The Saints being filled with the Spirit,
they shall then be enabled to worship the
Lord with one The Saints
shall then all
worship the
Lord in one
way.
minde, and one
heart, and in one way. It shall not
be then, as now in these dark times
it is, wherein one is of this minde
and another of that minde, and a
third of a third minde, about several parts of
the Ordinances of God: and these divisions
in Affection also. But then it shall not be so;
and therefore we finde mention made but of
one street in the New Jerusalem, Rev. 22. 2.
implying, that they shall all walk in one way.
And Zeph. 3. 9. the Lord says, that “he will
turn unto the people a pure language, that
they may all call upon the Name of the Lord,
and serve him with one shoulder.”
And this S2 ap- S2v 260
appears also in that fore-mentioned place,
Zech. 8. 20, 21. where it is said, that “the inhabitants
of one city shall go to another, saying,
‘Let us go speedily to pray before the
Lord, and to seek the Lord of hosts: I will
go also.’
Yea, many people, and strong nations,
shall come to seek the Lord of hosts.”
Where
it is clear, that all people in all Cities and Nations,
shall be of one minde in the Worship of
God. And Jer. 32. 39. the Lord there says,
that in that time he will give his people one
heart and one way.

And seventhly, The Saints being thus in that
time abundantly filled with the Spirit, all
Justice and
righteousness
shall flourish
in those days.
just and righteous things shall be
done by them. And this is clear,
Isai. 60. 18. “Violence shall no
more be heard within thy land,
nor wasting nor destruction within thy borders.”
Though there hath been violence in the
Land formerly, yet then there shall be no more;
but (vers. 21.) “Thy people shall be all righteous,
they shall inherit the land for ever;
the branch of my planting, that I may be
glorified.”
And so in full of the spirit of judgement
and righteousness shall the Saints then be,
as it is said, Isai. 32. 16. that “judgement shall
dwell in the wilderness, and righteousness remain S3r 261
remain in the fruitful field.”
In the verse
before, it is said, that the Spirit shall be so
poured out, as that those that had been as a
barren wilderness, should now become as a
fruitful field: and in this verse it is said, that in
all (whether they were such as had been a wilderness,
or such as had been a fruitful field)
judgement and righteousness should dwell.

And to this same purpose is that, Isai. 1.
26, 27.
“Afterward thou shalt be called the
citie of righteousness, the faithful citie.”

The like is said of it Jer. 31. 23. “They shall
use this speech of thee, The Lord bless thee,
O habitation of justice, and mountain of
holiness.”
How full are these expressions,
shewing how glorious for holiness this new
world shall be! And for this cause it is, that
when these new heavens and new earth are
promised, they are distinguished from the
old, or former heavens and earth, by this character:
Wherein Dwelleth
Righteousness.
Thus the
Saints in these times shall be so full of righteousness,
and judgement, as they shall receive
their very denomination from it. And as it is
said of the Lord God Almighty, that his Name
is holy; so it is said of them, They shall be
called The city of righteousness, the faithful S3 city, S3v 262
city, the habitation of justice, the mountain of
holiness: so gloriously shall they then shine in
righteousness and justice.

Eigthly, By this abundant pouring out of
the Spirit upon the Saints in that time, they
shall be put into a very The meekness
of the
Saints in
those days.
meek and
sweet frame of spirit. In Psal. 149.
(which is a place I have already
cited, shewing that it is a Prophesie
of these times) at vers. 4. it is said, that the
Lord will beautifie the meek with salvation:
whereby it is cleer, that they shall be meek spirits
that shall then be beautified with salvation,
that shall be members of that kingdom. And
indeed, it must needs be so, for their Saviour is
so: they do learn, and shall learn of him, to
be meek, and sweet, and lowly in their hearts
and carriages: but not so, but as that this meekness
shall be consistent with courage, stoutness,
and valour also, when God calls them to exercise
it: And therefore as our Saviour is a Lamb,
and a Lion; so they shall be meek as
How a lamb-
like and a Lion-
-like nature may
be consistent.
Lambs, and yet as bold as
Lions; and not fear to do the
work about which they are set,
as appears, vers. 6. 7. where it
is said, “They shall have the high praises of
God in their mouthes and a two-edged sword in S4r 263
in their hands, to execute vengeance upon
the heathen, and punishments upon the people;
to binde their kings with chains, and
their nobles with fetters of iron.”
Thus meek
and sweet in spirit shall the Saints be; and
withal, full of life and courage. Again, that
the Saints shall be full of meekness at that time;
appears by that speech of our blessed Saviour,
Matth. 5. 5. “Blessed are the meek; for they
shall inherit the earth.”
Now the Saints could
never be said so fully to have this promise made
good to them, as they shall in that time: for
many of the Saints, in a sence, never inherited
the earth: And as their Saviour spake of himself,
in the days of his humiliation; so may it
be said of them, in these days of their humiliation,
That they have not (many of them) where
to lay their heads: And, for the most part,
wicked men have possest the earth; but many
of them never had any inheritance in it. And
I am perswaded that our Saviour had this time
in his eye, when he said, “Blessed are the meek;
for they shall inherit the earth.”
So that
though yet this promise was never fully made
good, yet there is a time coming, wherein it
shall be clearly and fully made good. And of
this time also speaks David, when he says,
Psal. 37. 11. “But the meek shall inherit the S4 earth, S4v 264
earth, & shal delight themselvs in the abundance
of peace.”
He had said, in the two former
verses, that evil doers should be cut off; and that,
though the wicked did flourish for a while, yet
it was but for their time; and after that, they
should be no more: And in vers. 13. that
though the wicked plot against the just, “yet
the Lord shall laugh at him: for he seeth that
his day is coming.”
In all which, he speaks of
a time, and a day, when the wicked shall be
wholly cut off; but, saith he, “the meek shall
inherit the earth, and shall delight themselves
in the abundance of peace.”
And vers.
18. “The Lord knoweth the days of the upright,
and their inheritance shall be for ever.”

So that it’s clear, that those that shall inherit
the earth at that time, and be delighted in the
abundance of peace, shall be of meek and
sweet spirits.

And again, ninthly, When the Spirit shall
be thus abundantly poured out upon the Saints
in these times, there shall be then no such complaining
among Saints, as there hath been formerly;
and yet is, That Oh they are
weak, Saints sh all
then have no
cause to complain
of weaknesses.
and they are ignorant,
and they are foolish, and they
are dull, and slowe, and lame in
duties; and many times they are dumb, S5r 265
dumb, or at least stammerers, when they come
to pray, or prophesie: but the Spirit then shall
be so abundantly poured out upon them, as it
shall remove all these impediments from them;
as appears, Isai. 35. 1. “The wilderness and
the solitary place shall be glad, and the desart
shall rejoyce, and blossom as a rose.”
This
is spoken of the pouring out of the Spirit upon
those that were as a barren wilderness, which
shall make them thus to blossom as a rose.
Well: but what follows? Vers. 5. “Then the
eyes of the blinde shall be opened, and the
ears of the deaf shall be unstopped: then
shall the lame man leap as an hart; and the
tongue of the dumb shall sing.”
Here then we
see that all these complaints shall be removed.
They that complained of ignorance, their complaint
shall be removed: “the eyes of the
blinde shall see.”
They that complained of
deadness and dulness, their complaint shall be
removed: “the ears of the deaf shall be unstopped.”
They that complained of weakness
and lameness in duties, their complaint shall be
removed: “then shall the lame man leap as an
hart.”
A hart is a swift creature: they shall have
more then ordinary abilities, and strength, and
activity, which before were lame and weak:
“The lame man shall leap as an hart.” And answer- S5v 266
answerable to this, is that passage Isa. 32. 3, 4.
“And the eys of them that see, shal not be dim;
and the ears of them that hear, shall understand
knowledge; and the tongue of the
stammerers shall be ready to speak plainly.”

Thus all these weaknesses and infirmities shall
be removed, and Saints shall be compleatly furnished
with abilities, whereby they shall be
enabled to serve and worship the Lord; and they
shall no more do it stammeringly, and brokenly,
as formerly they did. And this is to be
done, as appears, vers. 1. at that time, when “a
King shall reign in righteousness, and Princes
shall rule in judgement”
: When the Lord
Jesus Christ, shall be King, and of his Saints
he shall make Psal. 45. 16. in all the
earth. Then, then it is, that all
these infirmities shall be removed from all his
people. This likewise is tha which is spoken
of, Zech. 12. 8. “In that day he that is
feeble among the Saints; shall be as David;
and the house of David, as God; as
the Angel of the Lord before them.”
Such
strength and power will he put upon all his
people.

Tenthly, When the Spirit shall be thus abundantly
poured out upon his people, they shall S6r 267
shall all speak They shall
speak a pure
language.
a pure language
a spiritual language; having a
holy, heavenly stile. For as in
their actions, and doings, there will be a glorious
reformation; so also in their words: and
therefore, Zeph. 3. 9. the Lord saith, That in
that great day, when all the earth shall be devoured
with the fire of his jealousie; that then,
“He will turn to the people a pure language,”
or a pure lip (as the word is) which implyeth
pure speech. There shall be no foolish, defiled
speech coming from them. No, they shall
have a pure lip, and call upon the Lord; and
this pure language, or this pure lip, is that
which is called, “The langugae of Canaan”,
Isa. 19. 18. Where it is said, That the Egyptians
being converted unto the Lord, they that
are in the Land of Egypt, shall also speak the
language of Canaan, or the lip of Canaan:
or with this pure lip, or this pure speech, which
the Lord shall give to his people.

And that by a pure lip, is meant a pure
speech, is cleer, Prov. 22. 11. Where Solomon
hath this expression: “He that loveth pureness
of heart, for the grace of his lips the king
shall be his friend.”
Implying, that from a
pure heart proceedeth gracious language; such
a man hath grace in his lips, a pure lip. Thus in S6v 268
in an eminent manner, shall Saints then have
grace in their lip, have a pure language, when
the Spirit shall be so glorously poured out upon
them.

Eleventhly, When the Spirit shall be thus
abundantly poured out upon the Saints, their
mindes, and affections shall be raised, and put
into a The Saints
shall be in a
rais’d, high,
and heavenly
frame.
heavenly posture. It
will be much below them, to
have their mindes set upon vanitie:
and though it be certain, that
they shall injoy all outward injoyments
to the full, yet they shall not manifest
that vanity in the use of them, as now appears
in most people; as to observe the fickle,
nice, phantastical, and foolish customs, or fashions
of the time; in their cloathing, househould
furniture, and deportments towards each
other; wherein much vanity and foolery ofttimes
appears. No, these things will be far
below them, It will be far
below the Saints
to minde vain
fashions and fooleries.
to have such unsetledness,
and such vanity, in
these respects appearing in
them. But they being filled
with the Spirit, will manifest
more gravity, sobriety, and composedness
of Spirit; and will not minde such vanity.

Not S7v 269

Not that the wearing rich apparel, or having
rich furniture, and utensils in the house,
is a sin, or unbecoming a Christian; for riches
they shall then plentifully injoy: But deforming
apparel, and the fickleness of the
minde and fancie about these things, is I fear
the sin of (I am sure it is very unbecoming to)
Saints. For Saints to be thus light, and vain,
and every day to be minding the new fashion,
and altering their apparel several times before
it is worn out; How uncomely is it! And
how unsuitable to their high calling! as if they
had not things of a higher nature to minde!

Not that in speaking thus, I do commend
those that keep themselves in such fashions as
wherein they appear ridiculous to all others, being
altogether out of use; nor do I say, that it
is an evil to come into a fashion after it hath
been some time used, if it be sober. No, I
say not so; for I know no Scripture that so
says.

But I say, that it becometh Saints to be
more composed then others, and not to be so
forward as others, in minding such vanities;
and not to put themselves into immodest habits;
but to to what in them lies; to restrain
the exorbitances of the times in such things.
And this I say, That they do discover that they have S7v 270
have very little of the Spirit, that are not able
to deny themselves, not sometimes, in very fooleries
in this kinde. Not but that rich apparel
may be worn, and comely ornaments may be
used. Holy women Gen.
24. 22, 30,
47.
have been and
may be adorned with Bracelets, and
Rings, and Jewels: But fooleries,
and immodest apparel, &c. must be avoided;
and when the Spirit is more abundantly poured
out, it will be so; And they will be very regardless
of these vanities; and be more grave,
composed, and discreet in their carriages. For
then, in all their clothing, furniture, and necessary
utensils, shall appear, not vanity, but Holiness
to the Lord. They shall be so clothed,
and have such furniture, as shall manifest, that
they are not a vain people, but a holy people:
As appears, Zech. 14. 20, 21. For they
shall make an holy use of all the blessings
which God shall multiply upon them: They
shall no more abuse them, but they shall be
sanctified to their uses, so as all shall have
this inscription upon them, (in respect of
their holy use of them) “Holiness
Unto The Lord.”
Thus Saints
shall not minde vanity in these times; But
shall have their Spirits raised, and lifted up, into
an heavenly and holy frame.

Again, S8r 271

Again, twelfthly, Another effect of this more
abundant pouring out of the Spirit upon the
Saints, will be this, that they shall be more fully
centred in the will of God; and it shall be
their resting place: his How Saints
shall will the
will of God.
Will will
be their Will, and be the satisfaction
of their spirits. This the Spirit
always works in the hearts of the Saints, where
he comes: and the more of the Spirit a Saint
hath, the more of this appears in him. But in
those times we are speaking of, when the Spirit
shall be thus gloriously seen upon the Saints;
then, in a mose eminent manner, shall
this appear in them: all the will of God shall
be sweet unto them. And this is intimated, in
that excellent pattern of Prayer which our
Lord and Saviour hath communicated unto his
people, in these words, “Thy kingdom come,
thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven”
:
Where our Lord would have us to pray for the
coming of this his Kingdom, and for the doing
of his will on earth, as it is done in heaven:
which will be, when that his Kingdom cometh.
For though now many know their Lords will,
and do it not; yet it shall not be so then; but,
knowing his will, they shall do it, and delight
in the doing of it: for his will is their will;
and theirs it is, because it his: so that they shall all S8v 272
all pray, and say, “Thy will be done”; and shall
have strength to do it. His will shall be done in
earth, as it is in heaven, in that day.

Again, in the thirteenth place, The Saints, in
this time, being filled with the Spirit, shall
Saints shall
then walk in
the integrity
and singleness
of heart.
all walk in the uprightness of
their hearts. Integrity and singleness
of heart shall appear in them;
and hypocrisie, and double-
mindedness, shall be loathsome to
them, and be utterly contrary to their natures.
They are children that will not lye: and none
but such, shall be inheritors of this kingdom;
as appears, Psal. 24. 4. where the Psalmist
says, thast none shall enter into this holy hill,
but he that hath clean hands, and a pure heart;
who hath not lift up his soul unto vanity, nor
sworn deceitfully. And so also Psal. 15. 2.
the Psalmist again saith, that he that walketh
uprightly, and worketh righteousnesses, and
speaketh the truth in his heart, shall dwell in it.
So that such, and none but such, shall possess
this Kingdom. And Psal. 37. 18. this is
again confirmed: “The Lord knoweth” (saith
the Psalmist) “the days of the upright, and
their inheritance shall be for ever”
: they
shall possess this inheritance. And of the upright
ones is it said, Isai. 33. 15. that they shall T1r 273
shall dwell on high, and shall see the King in
his beauty. This is their Character: “They that
walk in righteousnesses and speak uprightnesses,”
v. 15.

And in the fourteenth place, The Spirit being
thus abundantly poured out upon the Saints,
they shall thereby be enabled to mortifie all
corruption, so that it shall not at corruption
shall not at
all break
out in the
Saints then
all
break out in them: for though it be
true, that “all that is born of the flesh,
is flesh”
; and those that are in the
state of mortality, shall carry flesh
about them: yet they being all new born, shall
be then so filled with the Spirit, as that they
shall mortifie all the deeds of the body; and
the Spirit alone shall live, and act, and sway,
and bear rule in them; and they being born of
God, shall not sin, but shall hate every false
way, and not suffer the least evil motion to take
place: for indeed, it is not possible it should,
they being so full of the Spirit: for Saints do
experiment this now, that when the Spirit, in
the power, and life, and glory of it, doth abide
in them, (as some tastes of it some Saints
sometimes have) O then, not the least evil
motion will take place in their hearts; there is
an utter antipathy in their spirits, at that time,
to every thing that is not pure: But when this T is T1v 274
is withdrawn, then they are often foiled with
temptations, and vanity hath too much place
with them, until a fresh supply of the Spirit
come and mortifie it. But when the Spirit
shall be so abundantly poured out upon the
Saints as the Scripture declares, What a wide
difference will there be, between their condition
now, and their estates then! Then shall they
always walk up and down in the strength and
power of the Spirit, and never want its presence;
and then it shall be their continual delight,
to walk in the paths of holiness; and
nothing will be more irksome and more loathsome
to them, then any sin, or sinful thought.
And though by the first Adam sin came into
the world, so that all are born sinners; yet
being new born, the second Adam shall save
them from all sin; and that not onely from the
guilt of sin, but sprinkle clean water upon
them, (pour out the waters of the holy Spirit
upon them) and they shall be clean
from all the filth of sin, in a more eminent
and glorious manner then ever they have been:
so that corruption shall not then break out, and
uncleanness shall not then appear in them; and
this appears, Isa. 62. 12. “And they shall say
to the daughter of Zion, ‘Behold, thy salvation
cometh; behold, his reward is with him, T2r 275
him, and his reward before him’
: and they
shall call them, ‘The Holy People,’
the redeemed of the Lord: and
thou shalt shalt be called, Sought out, a citie not
forsaken.”
And Joel 3. 21. “For I will cleanse
their blood that I have not cleansed: for
the Lord dwelleth in Zion.”
And Isai. 1. 25.
“And I will turn my hand upon thee, and
purely purge away thy dross, and take away
all thy tin.”
And in Isa. 60. 21. and Jer. 21. 23.
places already mentioned.

Again, in the fifteenth place, the Spirit being
thus abundantly poured out upon them, it
shall make them appear very Great spiritual
glory
will then
appear in
Saints.
glorious
in the eyes of all: for herein
will their greatest glory othen consist;
this is that which will make Sion
the praise of the whole earth, That
she shall be thus gloriously adorned with the
Spirit, which is that glorious apparel which
maketh the Kings daughter all glorious within,
as well as without; Psal. 45. 13. “The Kings
daughter is all glorious within; her clothing
is of wrought gold.”
And therefore it is, that,
Rev. 21. this New Jerusalem is thus described:
The building of the wall of this beloved
City, (which vers. 2 is said to be prepared as
a Bride adorned for her husband:) I say, the T2 build- T2v 276
building of the wall of this City is said to be
of Jasper, and the City is said to be of pure
gold, like unto clear Glass; and the foundation
of the wall of the City, to be garnished
with all manner of precious stones: the first
Jasper, the second Saphir, the third a Chalcedony,
the fourth an Emerauld, the fifth Sardonix,
the sixth Sardius, the seventh Chrysolite,
the eighth Beryl, the ninth a Topaz, the tenth a
Chrysoprasus, the eleventh a Jacinct, the twelfth
an Amethyst. And the twelve gates are said to
be twelve Pearls; every several gate of one
Pearl: and the street of the City to be of pure
Gold, as it were transparent Glass. All which
serves to set out that lustre and glory which
shall appear in the Saints, the beloved City of
God, by reason of that abundant measure of
the Spirit which they shall enjoy in that day.
And expressions to the same purpose we have,
Isa. 54. 11, 12. “O thou afflicted, and tossed
with tempest, and not comforted; behold, I
will lay thy stones with fair colours, and lay
thy foundations with Saphirs; and I will
make thy windows of Agates and thy gates
of Carbuncles, and all thy borders of pleasant
stones.”
The Saints of God, which for a
long time have been afflicted, and tossed with
tempest, and not comforted, both by reason of enemies T3r 277
enemies from without, and corruptions from
within, so that no berauty nor comeliness hath
appeared in them, shall then be so freed both
from outward afflictions, and (by the plentiful
enjoyment of the Spirit) from inward corruptions,
as they shall appear very glorious, all
fair, and richly garnished, and adorned with
the choicest spiritual jewels. And therefore
not without cause doth David say ( Psal.
87. 3.
) “Glorious things are spoken of thee,
O city of God.”

Again, in the sixteenth place, The Spirit being
thus abundantly enjoyed by the Saints in
these times, they shall thereby be enabled to
make a holy use of all the creatures which
Saints shall
not sin at all
in the use of
the creatures.
they shall then enjoy. And that
which was said of those holy men
of old, shall be then truly said of
them; they shall visit their Job. tabernacles,
and not sin; and they
shall walk within Psal. 101. 2. their house
with a perfect heart. They shall
indeed build houses, and inhabit them; and
plant vineyards, and eat the fruit of them; but
they shall not defile their houses by sinning in
them, nor shall they sin in using the creatures
which they shall enjoy: their corn, and wine,
and oyl, and stocks, and herds, and fruits of T3 the T3v 278
the trees, and of the field, which they shall enjoy,
shall in no sort be abused by them: for the
Spirit shall guide them to use all the creatures
in a holy manner, enabling of them to receive
them with prayer and thanksgiving; as Joel
2. 26.
“And ye shall eat in plenty, and be satisfied,
and praise the Name of the Lord
your God.”
And Isa. 62. 8, 9. “Surely I will
no more give thy corn to be meat for thine
enemies, and the sons of the stranger shall
not drink thy wine for the which thou hast
laboured: but they that have gathered,
shall eat it, and praise the Lord; and they
that have brought it together, shall drink it
in the courts of my holiness.”
And as they
shall thus praise the Lord for all his mercies;
so doubtless shall they pray unto him for a
holy use of them, though the Scripture do not
particularly speak of it: for at this time though
they shall be assured of all mercies of all sorts;
yet shall it be no A full assurance
of having mercies,
is no hinderance to
a real Saints praying
for mercy.
hinderance
to their praying for them, as
to make them argue thus:
Why I am sure I shall have
these and these mercies, whether
I pray for them or not; and therefore what
need have I to pray for them? No; but as
now those that have most true and real assurancerance T4r 279
of mercies, are most in prayer, as the
Lord Jesus himself was, and as Paul was; so
shall it be in these times, when the spirit of
grace and supplication shall be most abundantly
poured out, so that all creatures shall be
sanctified to them, being received with prayer
and thanksgiving. “They shall eat and be satisfied,
and praise the Lord.”

And in the seventeenth place, The Spirit being
then thus abundantly showered down upon
the Saints, it shall fill them with
holy Saints shall
be filled with
joy, joy without
any mixtures of
sorrow at all.
joy, and gladness of heart:
for it is the very nature of the
Spirit, to be a Comforter; and
therefore where much of the
Spirit is, there must needs be
much joy; and so indeed there shall be: and
therefore it is said, Isai. 65. 18, 19. “Be ye
glad and rejoyce for ever in that which I
create: for behold I create Jerusalem a rejoycing,
and her people a joy. And I will
rejoyce in Jerusalem, and joy in my people:
and the voice of weeping shall be no more
heard in her, nor the voice of crying.”
It’s
true, that to compleat this joy, they shall have
many external or outward mercies: but the
pouring out of the Spirit is the main ingredient
of their joy; and without it, their joy in all T4 other T4v 280
other enjoyments, could be no joy, no true joy.
The voice of weeping, nor the voice of crying,
shall be no more heard among them: and it is
true, that in respect of outwards also, there
shall be no cause for weeping or crying: they
shall not then lose their dear relations, and
other outward enjoyments, to their grief, (as I
shall shew by and by) but shall comfortably
enjoy them. But the top-flower, the crown of
all their joys, shall be spiritual, even those spiritual
enjoyments which they shall then be
made partakers of. And in that respect chiefly
it is said, Isai. 35. 10. “That the ransomed of
the Lord shall return, and come to Zion with
songs, and everlasting joy upon their heads:
they shall obtain joy and gladness, and sorrow
and sighiung shall flee away.”
And therefore
also it is said, that “God shall wipe away all
tears from their eyes,”
Rev. 7. 17. They shall
be no more afflicted, and tossed with tempest,
and not comforted, as they have been, for want
of spiritual enjoyments: no; but they shall
have such full supplies of the Spirit, in all cases,
and upon all occasions, as they shall not have
cause to bewail, and mourn, and sigh, for the
want of it: No; but the Spirit shall be as
bread to strengthen them; and they shall walk
in the strength thereof: and as new wine, to refresh, T5r 281
refresh, and make them cheerful. Zech. 9. 17
“For how great is his goodness and how great
his beauty? Corn shall make the yound
men cheerful, and new wine the maids.”

Thus with holy joy and gladness, shall the
hearts of Saints be then filled. And everlasting
joy shall be upon their heads.

And thus have I as briefly as I could, declared
what the spiritual and internal priviledges
are, which the Saints shall be made partakers
of, in this new Jerusalem.

But now here by the way, let me adde this
word. That though I have all along spoken
of those spiritual priviledges, and perfections,
as prerogatives that shall be gloriously conferred
upon the Saints in those thousand yeers that I
have spoken of: yet let Saints know this also,
That though the heights of these spiritual glories
are reserved for that time; yet as the
time is already come, wherein Jesus Christ is
beginning to take his kingdom; and in a sense
it may be already said, That the kingdoms of our
Lord, and of his Christ: so the time is already
come, wherein these spiritual promises are to
be made good: at least these are the beginnings
of that time.

And T5v 282

And we see Those that are spiritual
do see it, and their
souls rejoyce in it: They
see it in Saints of all
ages, and Sexes, and
degrees.
it very evidently;
for upon the
Saints in general, the Spirit
is already more abundantly
poured out then
it hath been.

And this we may expect and duely look for;
That as Jesus Christ rises higher and higher,
in his other dispensations, in subduing his enemies
in this Nation, and the Kingdoms
abroad;

So he will rise higher and higher, in his spiritual
dispensations; he will more and more
pour out his Spirit upon his people.

And as the Spirit of Prayer upon some, and
the Spirit both of Prayer and Prophecy upon
others, and all the effects of the Spirit, as
knowledge, humility, love, &c. is already
poured out upon Saints, learned and unlearned,
male and femaile, old and young, very
richly, in comparison of what it was twenty
yeers since:

So before twenty, or ten, or five yeers more
pass, we shall undoubtedly They shall see
it especially that
look for it, that
long and wait for
it.
see
much more of this spiritual glory
upon the Saints then now
there is.

We shall see 1 more knowledgeledge T6r 283
among the Saints, and will be generally
2 in a more humble frame of Spirit,. laying
themselves low before We have now
great cause to rejoyce,
to see so much
of this frame as we
do already see among
the Saints.
God.
And 3 they shall have more
inflam’d affections to God, because
of all his goodness to
them. And 4 they shall
have upon their hearts a more
holy son-like fear of God. And 5 they shall
worship him more purely, more according to
his will. And 6 there shall be among all
Saints a more firm union. And 7 they shall
be enabled to act more justly and righteously.
And 8 they shall be more meek. And 9
those that are weak among them shall be more
strong. And 10 their language shall be
more pure. And 11 their minde shall be
more high and noble; I mean more heavenly,
less minding earthly vanities. And 12 they shall
be more fully swallowed up in the will of God.
And 13 singleness of heart more evidently
appear in them. And 14 corruptions of any
kinde shall less appear. And 15 their spiritual
glory shall shine forth more fully. And
16 they shall more purely use all outward injoyments,
all creature-comforts. And finally,
they shall be filled with greater joy in God and
more fully be joyful in their King; his high praises T6v 284
praises being in their mouth, and a two-
edged sword in their hand, to take vengeance
upon the heathen, &c.

I say, these things we shall see more perspicuously
and more eminently in Saints five yeers
hence then now; but ten yeers hence much more
then then; and twenty yeers hence far exceeding
that.

For these are not ordinary times, not such
times as have been during the forty two
months, wherein the Church was appointed
to be in a low condition; but these are the
Saints rising times, wherein they shall rise
higher and higher.

Therefore all ye that Let all Saints both
men and women, and
sons and daughters,
servants and handmaids
expect these
things.

are Saints, look for these
things; expect them, and
labour after them: for this
is the time wherein “ye shall”
(indeed) Hos. 6. 3. “know if ye
follow on to know the Lord.”

And therefore now let nothing satisfie you,
but this. For it is not those of ye (you well
know) that have most outwards, but those
that have most of this spiritual glory, that
shall be most happy, and most in esteem with
Jesus Christ and his Saints; and such shall not T7r 285
not want outwards, as appears in what follows.

Of the Outward and external priviledges
that Saints shall
then injoy.

I come now to declare also what the external
priviledges of the Saints shall then be. But
first I shall premise these three things.

First, That though the external priviledges
of the Saints shall then be very many, and very
great; that yet these outward priviledges
are no way to be compared with those spiritual
priviledges I have already spoken of: Neither
can the heart of a true Saint suffer any comparison
to be made between them.

And secondly, That though these outward
enjoyments are favours and blessings, which
may be lawfully desired; yet are they not desired
by Saints, in comparison of that desire
they have to injoy those spiritual priviledges already
spoken of; which they would think
themselves happy if they might now injoy,
though they had not those outward things any
more then they have had in their lowest condition.

And T7v 286

And thirdly, That to the people who are in
this frame, (and to none but such) whose
hearts are thus spiritual, and who so little regard
these things in comparison of spiritual; even
to such, will God in these times we are
speaking of, abundantly give, not onely these
spiritual injoyments and priviledges; but all
other things shall be added unto them: that so
their joy may be compleat, and nothing may
interrupt it.

And now I come to declare how comfortably,
and (if I may so say) how happily the
Saints shall live in this new world, in respect
of outwards. Concerning which, hear how
the Lord expresses himself, Isa. 60. 15. “For I
will make thee an eternal excellency, the joy
of many generations.”
It is a short, but a full
word: for speaking of the external glory that
he will confer upon his Church, he says, that
his Sion shall have as much outwardf glory, as
ever any people had: nay, he says not onely
so; but that they that excel others: he will
make them an external excellency. The outward
glory that was conferred upon Solomon,
the type of our King of peace, was very great;
but this shall excel it, and excel all kingdoms
that ever were before it; for outward things, as T8r 287
as well as spiritual. It shall be an external
excellency, and it shall be the joy of many
generations: such outward glory, and such excellency
above all others, shall be conferred upon
it, as shall be the joy, as shall glad the
hearts of all that live in those generations, or
that shall be brought forth in those times,
while these thousand yeers shall last. And
what the outward glories of it shall be, is in
part exprest in the following words: “For
brass I will bring gold, and for iron I will
bring silver, and for wood brass, and for
stones iron.”
These are the things wherein the
external glory of a land consists: and he says
withal, that they shall such the milk of the
Gentiles, and such the breasts of Kings.
Which imports that the treasures, and outward
glory of the Nations, and of the
Kings, and great men of the world, shall be
all drain’d together, and brought in to them;
they shall suck the sweetness of them, and shall
injoy them all. And thus will the Lord make
his Sion an external excellency in outward respects,
as well as in inward or spiritual respects.

But now more fully to declare what this external
glory of this new world shall be; thus:

Their T8v 288

There shall be no outward thing wanting
to the Saints, that may make their life outwardly
comfortable: for what is it that can be
desired or that heart can think of, that ever at
any time maketh the lives of people comfortable,
but the Lord hath promised that his people
shall enjoy it, in these times?

Saints shall then have
that outward blessing of
long life, and a comfortable
emjoyment of all
their relations, until
they come to a good old
age.
And first, Doth the
enjoyment of neer relations,
without losing of
them, make the life comfortable?
Are children
outward blessings, in
which men take much outward content and
delight? And is it a very desirable thing to
have our children the Lords children, to be the
blessed of the Lord? And is it a bitter thing
to lose an onely son, a sad thing to lose children
and neer relations, and is the contrary a desirable
mercy? And is long life a blessing,
and an outward favour lawful to be desired?
According to that, Psa. 91. 16. “With long
life will I satisfie him, and shew him my salvation.”

Why, all these things hath the Lord promised
to his people in these days, when these
new Heavens and new Earth shall be, as we
finde in these Scriptures. Isai. 65. 17, 18, &c. Behold U1r 289
“Behold, I create new heavens & a new earth”:
and then what follows? “I will rejoyce in Jerusalem,
and joy in my people: and the voice
of weeping shall be no more heard in her, nor
the voice of crying.”
But if they should lose
their children, & lose their relations, before they
come to a ful age, there would be mourning and
weeping: for these things usually prove sad afflictions
to the best Saints; even to Jacobs and
Davids. But they shall not lose these then:
for, vers. 20. it is said, “There shall be no more
thence an infant of days, nor an old man that
hath not filled his days: for the childe shall
die an hundred yeers old.”
So that this is
clear, No infant of days shall die; none shall
die while they are young; all shall come to a
good old age. They shall not be afflicted for
the loss of their children; for they shall live
till they be an hundred yeers old; and not an
old man shall die that hath not filled his days.
Again Zech. 8. 3, 4, &c. “Thus saith the Lord,
‘I am returned to Sion, and will dwell in the
midst of Jerusalem’
: and Jerusalem shall
be called, A city of truth, and the mountain
of the Lord of hosts, the holy mountain,”

wherein the Lord will dwell. And what follows?
“Thus saith the Lord of hosts, There
shall yet old men and old woman dwell in the U streets U1v 290
streets of Jerusalem, and every man with
his staff in his hand for multitude of days:
and the streets of the city shall be full of
boys and girls playing in the streets thereof.”

Thus shall the Saints in those days enjoy those
desirable blessings of children, and of long life:
they shall have a numerous issue; “The streets
shall be full of boys and girls”
; and old men
and old women shall live till they come to a
good old age, till they walk with a staff in their
hand for age.

But me thinks as I am spealing of these outward
blessings, I cannot too often insert this as
as caution by the way: That, to a holy heart,
these things are but secondary comforts, under-
comforts: their chief comfort consists in spirituals.

But I proceed.

In Jer. 33. the Lord speaks of the great
things he will do for his people in that day;
and vers. 9. he says, “They shall be for a name
of joy, and praise, and honour before the nations;
which shall hear of the good that he
will do unto them.”
And vers. 11. “There shall
be heard among them the voice of joy, and
the voice of gladness, and the voice of the
bridegroom, and the voice of the bride, and
the voice of them that shall say, Praise the Lord U2r 291
Lord of hosts, &c.”
Thus shall they comfortably
enjoy children, and all relations, and
praise the Lord. Nay, and to make their children
which they shall enjoy a complete blessing
and mercy to them indeed, it is said that
they shall be all holy unto God, Isa. 65. 23.
“They shall not labour in vain, nor bring forth
for trouble: for they are the seef of the
blessed of the Lord, and their off-spring with
them.”
Their children being thus blessed with
them shall be a joy unto them; whereas otherwise
they might be a grief and trouble to them.
Again, to the same purpose is that, Isa. 54. 13.
and Isa. 61. 9. “And all thy children shall be
taught of the Lord; and great shall be the
peace of thy children.”
―― “And their seed
shall be known among the Gentiles, and their
off-spring among the people. All that see
them, shall acknowledge them, that they are
the seed which the Lord hath blessed.”

Again, secondly, Is deliverance from the
noysonmmness of destroying and The noysomness
and hurtfulness of
wilde beasts, and
hurtful creatures,
shall be then taken
away.

hurtful wilde creatures, a desirable
mercy? Is it a thing
which may tend to the outward
comfort of the people
of God, to have the offensiveness
of offensive creatures taken away? This U2 also U2v 292
also hath God promised, and shall be granted
in this time to his people. And this is the
meaning of Paul, Rom. 8. 21. where speaking
of this glorious time, of the glorious liberty
of the children of God, he says, that the creature
shall also be delivered from the bondage
of corruption. And this is that which is clearly
also laid down, 11. 6, 7, 8, 9. “The
wolf also shall dwell with the lamb, and the
leopard shall lie down with the kid; and the
calf; and the young lion, and the fatling together,
and a little childe shall lead them:
and the cow and the bear shall feed, their
young ones shall lie down together: and the
lion shall eat straw like the ox; and the sucking
childe shall play one the hole of the asp,
and the weaned childe shall put his hand on
the cockatrice den. They shall not hurt nor
destroy in all my holy mountain.”
And Isa.
65. 25.
“The wolf and the lamb shall feed
together, and the lion sall eat straw like the
bullock, and dust shall be the serpents meat.
They shall not hurt nor destroy in all my holy
mountain, saith the Lord.”
Thus do these
Scriptures declare how the creatures shall be
delivered from the bondage of corruption.
For what put an enmity between some of these
creatures and Man, but Mans corruption? Beforefore U3r 293
man fell, he was Lord of them all, and
they were all in subjection to him, and offered
him no violence: But now are these creatrures
in enmity against Mankinde, and many times
they prove hurtful and destructive to men, women,
and children, by reason of that corruption
that is upon Mankinde: but when men shall be
cleansed from corruption, then this bondage
shall be taken away, and the creatures shall
appear in their primitive beauty and goodness
wherein they were created, being all in subjection,
and useful to man, and they shall be in no
case hurtful, neither one to another, or to mankinde:
the wolf shall not destroy the lamb,
nor the leopard the kid, nor the lion the calf,
nor the fatling; but they shall all feed together:
and all these shall be so far subjected to Mankinde,
as that a little childe shall lead them.
And though the sucking childe do play upon
the hole of the asp, and the weaned childe put
his hand upon the adders den, which are wont
to sting and hurt them; yet they shall then do
them no hurt at all.

But if it be objected, What, shall not the
lion destroy nor hurt any? How can that be,
since the lion uses to feed upon the prey that he
gets, and not upon the grass, as other beasts do? U3 This U3v 294
This is answered in these words, “The lion shal
eat straw like the oxe.”
Thus none of the
creatures shall be offensive any more to mankinde.
And for this cause it is said, Ezek. 34.
25.
That “Evil beasts shall cease out of the
land”
; because there shall be then no evil or
destroying beast. So that it follows in that
place, “They shall then dwell safely in the
wilderness, and sleep in the woods.”

Saints shall then
have a plentiful injoyment
of all the
fruits of the earth.
But again, thirdly, Is it an
outward mercy which conduces
to our comfortable
living, to have seasonable
weather, for the bringing forth of the fruits of
the earth? And doth it conduce to our outward
comfort, to have a plentiful injoyment of
all the fruits of the earth? All these things also
will God grant unto his people in that day:
as appears in these Scriptures; Isa. 30. 23.
“Then shall he give the rain of thy seed, that
thou shalt sow thy ground withal, and the
bread of the increase of the earth; and it
shall be fat and plenteous.”
And Joel 2. 23,
24.
“Be glad, ye children of Sion, and rejoyce
in the Lord your God; for he hath given
the former rain moderately, and he will
cause to come down for you the rain, the formermer U4r 295
rain, and the latter rain in the first
month. And the floors shall be full of
wheat, and the fats shall overflow with wine
and oyl.”
And Isa. 62. 8, 9. “I will no more
give thy corn to be meat for thine enemies,
and the sons of the stranger shall not drink
thy wine, for which thou hast laboured:
but they that have gathered it, shall eat it,
and praise the Lord; and they that have
brought it together, shall drink it in the
courts of my holiness.”
And Amos 9. 13,
14.
“Behold, the days come, saith the Lord,
that the plow-men shall overtake the reapers,
and the treader of grapes him that soweth
seed; and the mountains shall drop sweet
wine, and all the hills shall melt.”
―― “And
they shall plant vineyards, and drink the
wine thereof; and they shall make gardens,
and eat the fruit of them.”
And Mic. 4. 4.
“They shall sit every man under his vine, and
under his fig-tree, and one shall make them
afraid.”
And Jer. 31. 12. “They shall come
and sing in the height of Sion, and shall flow
together to the goodness of the Lord, for
wheat, and for wine, and for oyl, and for the
young of the flock, and of the herd, &c.”

And Ezek. 36. 30. “And I will multiply the
fruit of the tree, and the increase of the U4 field, U4v 296
field, &c.”
And Isa. 41. 18, 19. “I will open
rivers in the high places, and fountains in
the midst of the valleys; I will make the wilderness
a pool of water, and the dry land
springs of water. I will plant in the wilderness,
the Ceder, the Shittah-tree, and the
Oyl-tree. I will set in the desart, the Fir-
tree, and the Pine, and the Box-tree together.”
And Zech. 8. 12. “For the seed shall
be prosperous; the vine shall give her fruit,
and the ground shall give her increase, and
the heavens shall give their dew: and I
will cause the remnant of this people to
possess all these things.”

Thus plentifully do the Scriptures declare,
how in that time the Saints shall comfortably
enjoy all the fruit of their labours, in the
fields, and in their gardens, and their vineyards.
And that to that end, they shall have
always seasonable showers of rain, and profitable
springs of water, in all places, to water
and refresh the ground, and make it fertile, in
bringing forth of corn, and trees of all sorts,
and all desirable fruit. They shall have no
more dry and barren yeers, yeers of famine,
which have proved very uncomfortable; but so
abundantly, and so plentifully shall they have
all these things, as that the floors shall be full o U5r 297
of Wheat, and the fats shall overflow with
Wine and Oyl, and the mountains shall drop
down sweet Wine, and the hills abound with
all desirable fruits, and trees; and in stead of
the thorn, shall come up the fir-tree; and in
stead of the bryer, shall come up the Mirtle-
tree, Isa. 55. 13. What can be more desired,
as to these things? Well, but

Fourthly, Is it a comfortable They shall
then have also
flocks & herds
in abundance.

mercy, to have a plentiful increase
of flocks, and of herds,
and to enjoy them in abundance
it being the blessing wherewith God blessed
Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob of old? Why
these outward enjoyments will God graciously
give to his people in these times also; as appears,
Jer. 33. where the Lord speaking of
this time, when the Jews shall enjoy these glorious
times, v. 12, 13. the Lord says, that
“In all the places which were desolate, without
man, and without beast; there shall be
an habitation of shepherds, causing their
flocks to lie down; and the flocks shall again
pass under the hand of him that telleth
them.”
And Isa. 60. 6, 7. “The forces of the
Gentiles shall come unto thee, the multitudes
of camels shall cover thee; the dromedariesdaries U5v 298
of Midian and Epha; ―― all the
flocks of Kedar shall be gathered together
unto thee.”
And Isa. 30. 23, 24. “In that
day shall the cattel feed in large pastures;
the oxen likewise, and the young asses that
ear the ground, shall eat clean provender,
which hath been winnowed with the shovel,
and with the fan.”
And Isa. 43. 20. “The
beasts of the field shall honour me, the dragons
and the ostriches, because I give waters
in the wilderness, &c.”
And Ezek.
36. 11.
“I will multiply upon you man and
beast.”
And Isa. 61. 5. “The strangers shall
stand and feed your flocks, and the sons of
the alien shall be your plow-men, and vine-
dressers.”
And Isa. 66. 20. “They shall bring
your brethren out of all nations, upon horses
and chariots, and litters, and upon swift
beasts, unto my holy mountain Jerusalem.”

And Jer. 31. 12. it is said, “They shall come
and sing in the height of Sion, and shall
flow together to the goodness of the Lord,
for wheat, and for wine, and for wine, and for oyl, and for
the young of the flock, and of the herd.”

Thus shall they plentifully enjoy these outward
comforts of flocks and herds; and
those flocks and herds shall have large pastures;
and be fed with clean provender: and there U6r 299
there shall be such plentiful showers, and
springs, for the bringing forth of pasture, and
for the refreshing of beasts and cattle, as that
the Dragons and the Ostriches shall finde
enough in the wilderness to satisfie them; for
which they shall honour God, according to
their capacity: and such plenty of these creatures
shall there then be had, as they shall be
satisfied with the young of the flock, and of
the herd.

Again, fifthly, Is it a comfortable They shall then
have convenient
accomodations
of houses and
gardens.

outward mercy, to
have houses to inhabit, and to
have comfortable and convenient
dwelling places, it being
an uncomfortable thing to be destitute of a habitation?
This also the Lord will grant unto his
people at that time; As appears, Isa. 65. 21,
22.
“And they shall build houses, and inhabit
them; and they shall plant vineyards,
and eat the fruit of them. They shall not
build, and another inhabit; they shall not
plant, and another eat the fruit: but mine
elect shall enjoy the work of their hands.”

And Mic. 4. 4. “They shall every man sit under
his own vine, and under his own fig-
tree, and none shall make them afraid.”

Thus U6v 300

Thus shall the Saints then enjoy their
Houses and Gardens which they shall build
and plant for themselves; living comfortably,
and peaceable in them. And again, Isa. 61.
4.
“They shall build the old wastes, and raise
up the former desolations, and they shall repair
the waste cities, the desolations of many
generations.”
And Isa. 60. 10. “And the
sons of strangers shall build thy walls.”
And
Amos 9. 14. “And my people shall build the
waste cities, and inhabit them; and they
shall plant vineyards, and drink the wine
thereof; and they shall make gardens, and
eat the fruit of them.”
And Ezek. 36. 10.
“And men shall be multiplyed upon the
mountains of Israel, and the cities
shall be inhabited, and the wastes shall
be builded.”

Thus in these glorious times, shall Saints
enjoy this outward mercy mercy also. They
shall have commodious Houses and Gardens
which they shall build and make for themselves;
which they shall peaceably and comfortably
enjoy; building up those Cities and
places that have been laid waste and desolate,
and making of them convenient and
comfortable habitations to be inhabited.

But U7r 301

But sixthly, Is there any outward They shall also
have abundance
of gold,
and silver, and
brass, and iron,
and wood, in
those times.

thing which may be useful
and necessary for man and which
may conduce to his outward
comfortable being besides those
things which we have already
mentioned? It may be replied, Yes,
there are other outward things which are useful
and necessary, & which conduce to the outward
comfortable being of man; as apparel, and silver,
and gold, and other sorts of metals, which
are for covering and outward ornament for
the body, and for necessary furniture and utensils
for household-affairs; and these being wanting,
they cannot be so outwardly comfortable
as with them, but the enjoyment of them
tends to a comfortable outward subsistence.
Well, it being so, God hath promised to give
his people plentifully to enjoy all these also:
(for they shall want nothing that tends either
to their inward or outward comfort:) and
that appears, Isai. 60. 9. “They shall bring
thy sons from far,”
(it is spoken of the time
when these glorious times shall be) “and their
silver and their gold with them.”
And vers.
19. “For brass, I will bring gold; and for
iron, I will bring silver; and for wood, brass;
and for stones, iron.”
And Zech. 14. 14. And U7v 302
“And the wealth of all the heathen round
about, shall be gathered together; gold, and
silver, and apparel in great abundance.”

Those that shall be converted to the Church
shall be many; and they shall have great
wealth, which shall adde to the outward glory
of this New Jerusalem. And therefore is it
said of the New Jerusalem, Rev. 21. 24.
“That the nations of them which are saved
shall walk in the light of it, and the kings of
the earth do bring their glory and honour
into it.”
Which must needs be spoken of this
external glory their outward riches: for the
Gentiles cannot be said to bring other glory into
the New Jerusalem.

Thus we see, that they shall then also have
a plentiful enjoyment of silver, and gold, and
brass, and iron, and apparel in great abundance;
and of all the other outward mercies
which we have spoken of. So that there is no
creature-comfort, no outward blessing, which
Saints shall then want: but as the earth, which
is Psal. 24. 1. the Lords, shall be then given
to them; so also all the fulness
thereof; all that which may conduce to the
making of them fully outwardly comfortable,
as well as those inward comforts already spokenken U8r 303
of. So that it all respects, the Psal.
118. 15.
voice
of rejoycing and salvation shall be
heard in the tabernacles of the righteous.

I should now proceed to speak of other
things: but before I do, there will be one Objection,
and three Queries to be answered.

And first, some may say, It is An Objection.

true, they do expect that God will
do great things for his people; but
they expected not these outward things that
have been spoken of: For how can it be a
mercy to the Saints to enjoy these, seeing the
world, and worldly enjoyments, usually prove
a snare uncto them? And therefore the Apostle
says, 1 Tim. 6. 9. “That they that will be
rich, fall into temptation, and a snare, and
into many foolish and hurtful lusts, which
drown men in destruction and perdition.”
And
it is too evident, how the world hath choaked
the growing of grace in those hearts where eminently
it shined before they did possess so
much of the world: and since they have had
much of the world, they seem to be more
proud, and are not i that humble posture
as before; and they appear to be more
cold and formal, and can swallow those things which U8v 304
which before they condemned in others. And
it being so, though the Lord will do great
things for his people, yet it is doubtful (say
some) whether it shall be in outward respects,
which do thus usually prove snares to Saints,
and did prove so in Constantine the Great his
time, and afterward, when the godly Emperours
bestowed great outward possessions upon
the godly Bishops; then they began to decay,
and grow cold, and corrupt and loose in
their lives; which made S. Agustine utter
this expression: “Religio peperit divitias, &
filia devoravit matrem”
: that is, “Religion
brought forth riches, and the daughter hath
devoured the mother”
: whereby he imports,
that riches had proved a great snare to religious
people, and eaten out the power of godliness:
And how then shall we expect these outward
enjoyments, (which have proved and do prove
such snares) in these glorious times we are
looking for?

The Answer
to the Objection.
To which I answer, first,
That God will do great things
for his people in outwards, as
well as in spirituals, is very
clear, the Scripture being so plentiful and full in
the declaring of it.

And X1r 305

And since it is his pleasure, in these later
days, to deliver the creature from the bondage
of corruption, and to restore all these outward
things to their primitive goodness and glory,
that his people may see how good these left-
hand-mercies (if I may so term them) are,
which for their use were appointed, that so
they may be fully sensible of his goodness therein:
I say, since he hath thus appointed, and
the Scripture fully declares he will do it; why
should it be doubted?

But secondly, Whereas it is said that these
outward enjoyments do prove, and have proved
snares; let that be considered which I have
already said, how that it shall not be with
the Saints in these times, as it hath been formerly;
but that the Spirit shall be more abundantly
poured out upon Saints then it hath
been: and if thou that so objectest considerest
that, then thou wilt see, that the Spirit, being so
gloriously enjoyed, will preserve Saints from being
so snared, & overtaken with the temptations
of the world, as too many formerly have been.

And thirdly, Whereas thou sayst that many
now are snared with the world; I desire thee
to consider, first, Whether such as are so snared,
and carried away with the world from their
first love, had ever any love to the Lord Jesus X in X1v 306
in sincerity; whether they were not as the
thorny ground, or the stony ground, that never
had good rooting, never had indeed the Spirit
of the Son in them; but seemed to receive the
Word, but it was but with outward flashes of
joy. Or secondly, If they truely had the
Spirit of Jesus, whether it were not in a weak
and a lowe degree: for thou shalt finde, that
those that have a higher measure of the Spirit,
they, though they are great in the world, are as
full of life and vigour, and of fervent love to
Christ, as those that are mean; and walk as
humbly as any of them: nay, some of those
that God hath given great outward preferment
unto, and have much of the world in their possession,
do far exceed many of those Saints that
are of more inferiour rank in the world, and
go beyond them in zeal and fervencie of spirit,
and being exemplary in a holy, humble, and unspotted
conversation. Therefore, if some be
corrupt, and cold, and carnal, that have much
of these outward things, impute it not to those
outward things, (which, simply considered in
themselves, have no evil in them) but impute it
to that corrupt heart that so abuses these enjoyments.

Again, fourthly, Consider what I have already
said, viz. that the chiefest of the Saints com- X2r 307
comforts, in these times, will consist in their inward
enjoyments: and those that are truely
spiritual, and shall indeed be accounted worthy
to stand before the Lord Jesus in that day, shall
be such whose hearts are set upon desiring the
spiritual enjoyments of this Kingdom, above
all things else; and to such, these things shall
be added. But let such who more desire outward
comforts then spiritual enjoyments, (and
manifest it by their present unjust scraping of
these outward things together) know, that
they shall in that day enjoy neither the one nor
the other comfortably; as appears, Isai. 65.
13, 14, 20.
And so much in answer to this
Objection.

But secondly, It may be queried, A Querie.

Whether, when the Saints shall enjoy
all these things, they shall not
follow their several emplyments and vocations
as now they do?

To which I answer, Yes: it is An Answer
to the
Querie.

clear they shall follow several employments
as now they do; but
doubtless in a more regular, and
more excellent and comfortable way then many
now do; i.e. some shall not labour and
toyl day and night, (scarce allowing themselvesX2 selves X2v 308
any time to spend in the performance of
holy duties, or for lawful and convenient recreations)
to mainatain others that live vitiously, in
idleness, drunkenness, and other evil practices:
I say, It shall not be thus then; such idle and
profane creatures shall then have no allowance
or sufferance to live such lives as now they do.

But to the Question. That men shall then
follow their several employments and callings,
is clear in these Scriptures: Amos 9. 13. “Behold,
in that day, saith the Lord, the plowman
shall overtake the reaper, and the treader
of grapes him that soweth seed &c.”
Here
is mention of four several employments, for
several men: 1. the Plow-man, 2. the Reapers,
3. the treader of grapes, 4. the Sower
of seed. And Jer. 33. 12, 13. In that day,
in the place where it had been desolate, “there
shall be habitations of shepherds, causing
their flocks to lie down; and the flock shall
again pass under the hand of him that telleth
them.”
And Isa. 61. 5. “And strangers
shall stand and feed your flocks, and the sons
of the alien shall be your plow-men and vine-
dressers.”
Thus in these words is it clear, that
men shall then follow several employments.
Again, Isa. 62. 8 9. “I will no more give thy
corn to be meat for thine enemies, and the sons X3r 309
sons of the stranger shall no more drink thy
wine for which thou hast laboured; but they
that have gathered it shall eat it, and praise
the Lord; and they that have gathered it
together, shall drink it in the courts of my
holiness.”
Here it is clear, that labour they
shall, and each man shall enjoy the fruit of his
own labours: they shall not be unjustly deprived
of it, as now many be. And so again,
Isa. 65. 21, 22. They shall build houses, and
plant vineyards; ――“and mine elect shall long
enjoy the work of their hands.”
Mark this;
They shall long enjoy the work of their hands.
By the work of their hands, they shall purchase
estates, and they shall be long enjoyed by them
and their children: no strangers shall deprive
them of them. But now by these several Scriptures
it is clear, that several employments men
shall follow; as plowing, sowing, and planting,
and reaping, and treading the vines, keeping
and feeding flocks and herds, and building
houses, &c. But now, though the Scripture
mention not expresly the following other employments;
as Handy-craft-employments,
working in gold, and silver, and brass, and
iron, and silk, and linen, and woolen, &c. yet
is it clearly implied, that they shall use such
employments, in those Scriptures that speak of X3 their X3v 310
their building houses in those times, and of
having gold, and silver, and apparel in great
abundance, &c. So that it is clear, that Saints
shall labour in several employments in those
times. But whatever the lawful employments
be in which they labour, whether in Husbandry,
or Handy-craft-employments; strangers
shall not drink the wine, nor eat the food, nor
inhabit the houses, nor wear the apparel, for
which they have laboured: but they and their
children shall comfortably enjoy the work of
their hands. So that all of them, by their labours
and employments; not toylsom and burdensome
employments, but by their employments
which shall be as recreation to them, as
some employments are to ingenious men now;
for it is irksome to them to be always idle: I
say, All of them, by their pleasant, easie, and
well-regulated employments, shall get a plentiful
If the diligent
hand, by the blessing
of the Lord, do now
make rich, much
more shall it then.
store of all those outward
things which shall
tend to the comfortable subsistence
of them and theirs,
with which they shall have
no grief no vexation at all, but sorrow and
sighing shall flee away, and everlasting joy
shall be unto them. And so much for answer
to this Querie.

But X4r 311

But thirdly, Another Querie may A Querie.

be, How the raised Saints, that
shall come to reign with Christ on
earth, shall walk and act here in the
world?

To which I have no other answer An Answer
to the
Query.

to make but this; (having
already shown that they shall be
raised spiritual bodies) that they
shall not act with respect to their bodies, as
those other Saints that shall live and shall be
born in those times; who have not laid down
their mortal bodies, and been raised again:
for as out Saviour speaks expresly, that in the
Resurrection “They shall neither marry, nor
be given in marriage, but they shall be as the
Angels of God”
: so it shall be with them: So
that the actings and walkings, of the raised
Saints here on earth, may be much like the actings
of the Angels of God. But to declare
how they shall act more particularly, and how
and in what manner they shall reign on earth
with Christ; I dare not undertake to describe
any further; the Scripture being silent as to particulars;
and I think that enough for us to know
in these matters, which the Spirit of God thinks
enough to declare of them in Scripture. But
so much as the Scripture declares, we may (not X4 onely X4v 312
onely safely, but) as our Deut. 29.
29.

Rom. 15. 4.
duty,
search into. Therefore, so much as
I finde the Scriptures declaring,
thereof, do I here exhibit, and shall no more.

A Query.
But fourthly, Some may be apt
to enquire, Whether all creatures
shall be made use of by us then;
the sensitive creatures, as well as the vegetive?

This Querie is occasioned by that saying
of the Apostle, which we have, Rom. 8. 21.
which hath been already mentioned, where the
Apostle says, that in that day of the manifestation
of the sons of God, that then the creature
shall be delivered from the bondage of
corruption. Now will some say, Is it not a
bondage to the sensitive creatures to be killed
for the use of man? And we do not finde that
Adam in innocency made use of any of the
sensitive creatures, but of herbs, and fruits of the
trees and of the ground for food. And is it not
therefore probable, that the Saints shall do so
in the new Jerusalem-times?

An Answer
to the
Query.
To all which I answer, first,
It is cleer by what I have already
said, that the Saints shall then be
blessed, with the enjoyment of all X5r 313
all sorts of creatures in abundance, as with corn,
and Wine, and Oyl, and all the fruits of the
earth; so also with flocks and herds, and
Camels, and Asses: from whence also it is
cleer, that they shall make use of these sensitive
creatures, as well as the vegetive; for why else
should they be promised as outward blessings
to them, if they should not make use of them?
And what should they keep flocks and herds
for, if they did not use them for food? But it
is not to be doubted, but their flocks and herds
are to be food unto them, and so likewise
are their Camels and Asses, and other creatures
of that kinde, to be for other uses to man kind;
as for labouring in the ground, and carrying
burthens, and journying, and all other things
wherein men have occasion to make use of
them; As appears, Isa. 30. 23. “Thine oxen
likewise, and the young asses that ear the
ground, shall eat clean provender, &c.”
And
Isa. 66. 20. “And they shall bring your brethren
out of all Nations, upon Horses, and in
Chariots, and in Litters, and upon swift beasts,
&c.”
And by this, in mans making use of all
these creatures, it will be manifested that man
is Lord of them all; in that they shall be all
subject to him, and be useful for him.

But X5v 314

But secondly, To answer the ground of the
Objection, thus: I see no reason why any
should conclude, that mans making use of the
creatures in a reasonable and a moderate manner,
is that bondage of corruption that Paul
speaks of: For it is cleer, that it is no burthen
to the creatures to be in subjection to man, and
to serve man, (when men are not unmerciful
to them) as we may see by the readiness of
some creatures, (as it were by a natural instinct)
to serve man willingly. But if any
thing (in or about mans using the creatures)
may be said to be a part of the bondage of
corruption, it is in regard of mens unmerciful
dealing with many creatures, in laying more
burthen upon them then they can well bear,
and putting of them to do more then they can
well do; but this bondage will then be removed
from them.

But thirdly, What most properly may be
said to be the bondage of corruption that now
is upon the creatures, I have already spoken of;
and that is that enmity which is in many creatures
each to other, and to mankinde; or that
hurtfulness that is in them: and this they shall
be delivered from in that day. And that this is X6r 315
is the genuine sense and meaning of the Apostle,
when he says that the creatures shall be
delivered from the bondage of corruption, in
that glorious time of the manifestation of the
sons of God, is cleer: my ground is this, Because
I finde the Scripture declaring that in
that day this enmity and hurtfulness shall be
removed from them; as appears in those places
I have already quoted, viz. Isa. 11. 6, 7,
8, 9.
And Isa. 65. 25. And this is the main
(if not the onely) thing in which (the Scripture
declares that) the changed condition of
the creatures in that day shall appear; and nowhere
it is said, that the creature shall not then
be for the use and service of man; but the
contrary is cleer.

But fourthly, That some creatures are killed
for the use of man, what bondage is it for
them? For what other burthen is it for one
creature to be killed, then for another creature
to die a natural death? Is it not a silly thing to
conceive, that a violent death should be worse
to them then another death is, because it is so to
man? seeing these creatures that are not reasonable,
the thoughts of death are not terrible
to them, as to man they be; for they fear it
not, nor know not what it is, in regard they are X6v 316
are not rational? Doubtless it were a weak
thing to conceive, that this kinde of death
should be more burdensome to them then a natural
death, and consequently to think this to
be the bondage of corruption spoken of by the
Apostle.

But fifthly, As to that of Adam’s eating
fruit in Innocencie, Who can say that Adam
in Innocencie did eat onely herbs and fruit? For
though there be no mention of his eating flesh,
yet might he not eat flesh, though the Scripture
be silent in the mentioning of it? But if it
should be granted, that Adam, continuing but
a little while in innocencie, did not feed upon
flesh, but upon herbs and fruits at that time;
Doth it therefore follow, that if he had continued
longer in innocencie, that he would not
have eaten flesh at any time? Was he at all
forbidden to eat flesh? Would it have been a
sin to eat flesh? We know that all creatures
were made for his use, and put in subjection to
him: and we know, that of his two eldest
sons, the one was a tiller of the ground, and
the other was a keeper of sheep. And why
was Abel a keeper of sheep, if they were not
of use unto them for food, as well as the fruit
of the ground? But doubtless the sheep which
Abel kept, were of use for food unto them.

Thus X7r 317

Thus is there nothing of force in that supposition
that Adam did eat no flesh in Innocencie:
Neither may it at all be argued, that these
creatures shall not be made use of in this time of
the restitution of all things. But it remains
clear, as the Scripture declares it, that in that
time the Saints shall have a comfortable use of
all creatures, in a more pure manner then ever.
And thus much in answer to this Querie.

And thus having shewn, as briefly as I could,
what the glorious condition of this New Jerusalem
shall be, both with respect to its internal
and external glory, which is to continue
for a thousand yeers: I shall
now come to shew (as far as A declaration of
what is to follow
after the thousand
yeers are expired.

it is revealed unto me from
the Scriptures) what shall
follow after this thousand
yeers are finished. In which I shall be very
brief: for the Scripture is but brief in speaking
of these things; they being things that are very
far off: But doubtless more may be revealed of
them before that time come; but for the present
thus the Scripture declares:

That after these thousand yeers are expired,
Satan (which, as we have shewed, during this thou- X7v 318
thousand yeers, must be bound, and shut up
in the bottomless pit) must be loosed again
for a little season: and this appears, Rev. 20.
2, 3.
where it is said, that he was shut up for
a thousand yeers; “and after that, he must be
loosed for a little season”
: and being loosed,
we shall see what work he does in the world,
vers. 8, 9. “And he shall go out to deceive the
nations which are in the four quarters of
the earth, Gog and Magog, to gather them
together to battel; the number of whom is
as the sand of the sea. And they went up
on the breadth of the earth, and compassed
the camp of the Saints about, and the beloved
citie; and fire came down from God
out of heaven, and devoured them.”

Thus it is declared what work Satan is
to do after he is loosed; viz. He will go up
and down again in the world among the Nations
that are in the four quarters of the earth,
that is, those of the Nations that are unbelievers,
(that are said to be without the holy City;
being none of them, but being subjected to
them, and put under them;) and of these
there will be in the whole world at that time a
very great number: for although all Nations
shall be converted to Christ, yet all persons in
all Nations shall not; but many of them shall be X8r 319
be those that are said to be without the holy
City, Rev. 22. 15. “For without are dogs,
and sorcerers, and whoremongers, and murderers,
and idolaters, and whosoever loveth
and maketh a lye.”
And these shall Satan, after
he is loosed, go up and down among, and
deceive them; gathering them together to battel,
perswading them to joyn all their forces together,
and once again to make a desperate attempt
against the Saints: but in so doing, says
the text, he will deceive them; (for they shall
be drawn to their own destruction:) and such
fools will the devil make of them in deceiving
of them, (As he did Eve) that he will (it’s
likely) perswade them to believe that they shall
by their power overcome the Saints: and as he
perswaded Eve to believe that in eating the forbidden
fruit they should be as gods, knowing
good and evil; so he will perswade these, that
in making war they shall overcome the Saints,
though Jesus Christ be with them. Thus this
old deceiver and lyer shall deceive the unconverted
miserable people among the Nations of
the world; who, during all the time of the
thousand yeers, will be quiet, and never dare to
attempt any such thing: and yet then, they
shall gather togetnher against the Saints, and
think to overcome them: but when they shall attempt X8v 320
attempt to do it, the Saints shall then have no
need of swords nor spears to defend themselves
against that brunt, that one assault: for the
text says, Fire shall come down from God out
of heaven, and devour all these wicked men.

Thus is declared what will be done after Satan
is loosed: and what his reward for this
work shall be, is declared, vers. 10. “And the
devil that deceived the nations, was cast
alive into the lake of fire and brimstone,
where the beast and the false prophet are,
and shall be tormented day and night for
ever.”

And now comes to be declared, what shall
follow immediately upon this; and that follows
in vers. 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. “And I
saw a great white throne, and him that sate
upon it, from whose face the earth and the
heaven fled away, and there was found no
place for them. And I saw the dead, small
and great, stand before God: and the books
were opened, and another book was opened,
which is the book of life; and the dead were
judged out of those things which were written
in the books, according to their works.
And the sea gave up the dead which were in
it, and death and hell delivered up the dead which Y1r 321
which were in them; and they were judged
every man according to their works: and
death and hell were cast into the lake of fire.
This is the second death: and whosoever
was not found written in the book of life,
was cast into the lake of fire.”

In these verses is declared, that immediately
upon the ruining of all the wicked of the
Nations, the last and general day of judgement
is to follow: When comes the Resurrection
of all, both just and unjust. I say, the last
and general day of judgement, and resurrection
of all; for in this twentieth chapter of the
Revelation, it is cleer, that here is a mention
made of two Resurrections, and the one to be
a thousand yeers before the other: and the first
is treated of in the 4, 5, and 6 verses; and is
there called the “First Resurrection:”
and the second is laid down in
these verses; where it is said, that the Heavens
and the earth are then to to be annihilated, to flie
away at the presence of the Lord, who upon his
white throne of righteousness, after these thousand
yeers are finished, is to appear, and to
judge all the dead, small and great; who are
to stand before him, being all raised out of the
Graves, and out of the Sea, and all places
where the dead have been laid; and to be Y judged Y1v 322
judged righteously, according to the Gospel,
and according to their works: and they being so
judged, it will follow, that whosoever is not
found written in the book of life, shall be cast
into a lake of fire. And this general day of
judgement here treated of, is also treated of
in several other Scriptures; as in Mat. 25. 31,
32, &c.
Where out Saviour thus describes it,
and says, that in that day he shall sit upon
the throne of his glory, and before him shall
be gathered all Nations, and he shall separate
them one from another, as a shepherd divideth
his Sheep from the Goats: and he shall set the
Sheep on his right hand, but the Goats on
the left. “Then shall the King say unto them
on his right hand, Come ye blessed of my
Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for
you, from the foundation of the world;
for I was, &c.”
“And then shall he say also
unto them on the left hand, Depart
from me, ye cursed, into everlasting fire,
prepared for the devil and his angels:
for, &c.”
“And these shall go away into
everlasting punishment, but the righteous
into life eternal.”

Thus in this Scripture, is this general day
of the final judging of all spoken of also;
wherein to every one is to be rendred accordingding Y2r 323
to his works. Again, another Scripture
to this purpose, is that in the first of
the Corinthians, at the fifteenth chapter
;
where Paul more largely discourses of the
doctrine of the Resurrection, in some particulars
of it, then it is any where else in
Scripture treated of; where in the first
part of the chapter, he makes it his work
to prove the certainty of the Resurrection
of the body, against those Pharisaical
spirits that denyed it: And having proved
the Resurrection, by many undenyable
and unanswerable Arguments, he comes to
declare, at the twenty third verse, and so on,
in what order the Resurrection shall be; he
having before said that all shall be raised,
“But” (says he, it shall be) “every man in
his own order; Christ the first fruits,
and afterward they that are Christs, at
his coming.”

Here is the Order of the Resurrection.
Christ the first fruits: Well, Christ was
to be raised first in order of time, and
that was done already: Christ was raised
when the Apostle writ this Epistle:
But who are to be raised next? The Apostle
tells us, It must be they that are
Christs. And when must they be raised? Y2 The Y2v 324
The Apostle answers, At his coming. “Afterward
they that are Christs, at his
coming.”
This is the first Resurrection,
wherein the Saints must at the coming of
Christ be raised, to reign with him, (spoken
of Revel. 20. 4.) But then the general
Resurrection, and the last great day, he
speaks of in vers. 24, 25, and 28. Where
he says, “Then cometh the end, when he
shall have delivered up the kingdom to
God, even the Father; when he shall
have put down all rule, and all authority,
and power; for he must reign till
he hath put all enemies under his feet:
the last enemie that shall be destroyed is
death. And twhen all things shall be subdued
unto him, then shall the Son also
himself be subject unto him that put all
things under him; that God may be all
in all.”

Here he declares, that Jesus Christ being
come, and having received his kingdome,
and his Saints being raised at his coming
(to reign with him) that after his
coming, and reigning, and ruling, and
putting all enemies under his feet, and death
it self: “Then cometh the end, when he
shall deliver up the kingdom to his father:ther, Y3r 325
and the Son also himself shall be
subject unto him that put all things under
him, that God may be all in all.”

That is, there shall be a cessation of the administration
wherein God commits all things
to be done by the Son: And then, when
the time of Christs kingdom on earth is expired,
God shall be all in all, after this last
general Resurrection, when death it self
shall be destroyed. And the Apostle gives a
further description of that general Resurrection,
at vers. 51, 52, &c. “Behold, I shew
you a mystery: we shall not all die, but we
shall all be changed, in a moment, in the
twinkling of an eye, at the last trump:
for the trumpet shall sound, and the dead
shall be raised incorruptible; and we shall
be changed: for this corruption must put on
incorruption, and this mortal must put on
immortality: so when this corruptible shall
have put on incorruption, and this mortal
shall have put on immortality; Then shall be
brought to pass the saying that is written,
Death is swallowed up in victory: O death,
where is thy sting? O grave, where is thy
victory?”

In these verses the Apostle cleerly speaks of
the last general judgement: for he says, that the Y3 Saints Y3v 326
Saints shall not all Die, but shall all in a moment
be changed, and the dead shall be raised
incorruptible; and this he says shall be at the
last trump; and that demonstrates it to be the
last day that the Apostle is speaking of, because
he says it shall be at the last trump; for
there is a trump which must sound before this,
of which the Apostle speaks, 1 Thes. 4. 16.
where he speaks of the raising of the dead in
Christ, who must rise first; even of the first
Resurrection, when the Saints must rise to
reign with Christ. Now the Apostle calling
this the last trump, it is cleer he speaks here of
the last Resurrection: and again its cleer by
this also, because he says, that at this time,
“Death shall be swallowed up in victory”; And
that “then shall be brought to pass that saying,
‘O death, where is thy sting? O grave,
where is thy victory?’”
That is, then the victory
shall be gotten over death; death shall
be no more an overcomer; it shall destroy no
more, but be destroyed it self. And this is the
last enemy that shall be destroyed; As Rev.
20. 14.
and 1 Cor. 15. 26. Thus is it cleer, that
in these verses Paul speaks of the last general
Resurrection. I have the rather mentioned
and opened these Scriptures that speak of the
last general Resurrection, that there might not be Y4r 327
be a confounding of the first Resurrection
with the last; and that the one might not be
taken for the other, as is very common. And
thus have I briefly shewn, as far as from the
Scripture appears to me, what is to be done
upon earth, after the finishiong of the thousand
yeers of the reign of Jesus Christ and his
Saints on earth.

And now having laid down this general description
or discovery of the new Jerusalem,
both in the internal and external glory of it,
and of what things are to precede it, and to
succeed it; I shall conclude all with that saying
of the Psalmist, Psal. 111. 2, 3. “The
works of the Lord are great, sought out of
all them that have pleasure therein. His
work is honourable and glorious, and his
righteousness endureth for ever.”

And now might I come to a large Application
of all; which is applicable several ways:
but desiring to be brief therein, I have included
all in these following Verses.

X4Y4 Y4v Y5r

Unto the Court of Parliament,
who are
Supreme, in England, Ireland,
and elsewhere;

These Poems humbly are addrest,

Which placed are before the rest.

Who knew, Grace Senators, when first of all

In Parliament to sit you had a Call,

What great designes you were appointed
to?

What world-amazing acts you had to do?

None but Jebovah, doubtless, then could tell,

Who knew his own holy Decree full well;

And therefore did betimes to you appear,

And fill you with his holy Spirit and fear:

And Y5v

And then, his Purposes to bring to pass,

The Bill for non-dissolving of you was

Confirmed so, as not to be repeal’d,

To bring about his holy Will reveal’d

So long ago, to Daniel, when he writ,

That to ’stroy the Horn, the Judgement should sit.

And now, you see, you were the Instruments

To bring about Jehovah’s high Intents;

Which were, his People to defend and save

From all their foes; and therfore pow’r he gave

You then, and strength, his enemies to withstand,

That did oppress the Saints with a high hand.

But they are overcome, and shall no more
O’ercome the Saints, as they did heretofore:

For now the Judgement hath the Horn destroy’d,

And all that Crew that were by him employ’d:

And now the time’s expir’d wherein the Beast

Should overcome the Saints: his wo’s increast.

Now Jesus Christ doth on Mount Sion stand,

And there his Saints do wait on his Command:

So that henceforth overcome all they shall

That up against them rise, and make them fall.

And now, ye that in Parliament have bin

The happie Instruments of this great King,

What cause have you in him for to rejoyce,

That guided were to make so good a choice,

To Y6r

To cleave unto this Cause, and to forsake

The other Party; not for to partake

With them, in sins or punishments, but to

Wait on the Lord, his blessed Will to do.

But now, know this, If any of you did

Aim at your selves, and walk in paths crooked;

And in that place of Judicature sitting,

Pretending one, did mean another thing;

And if your labour, care, and onely aim,

Have been to serve your selves, and get a name;

The fruit’s but temporary that y’ave had,

And soon will moulder, perish, quail, and fade.

And when you come to die, what good will’t do,

When that your Consciences shall accuse you,

That you unfaithful and deceitful do

Prove to the Trust that repos’d in you?

For though accounts to man you never make,

Yet unto God you shall, who them will take:

And then, though all your heaps of gold you would

Give up, to clear your selves, yet never should

You be releas’d, when Death doth once you call

Before the great Jehovah’s Tribunal.

Your wisdom it would be, betimes, therefore,

For peace to seek, and for to clear your score:

For now’s the time, if ever it be done,

Before your life’s expir’d, and glass is run.

You Y6v

You know the way Zacheus took,

That’s written in the blessed Book.

But now I’ve done with you, within this Court,

Whose ways have not been of a good report;

If that among you any such there be:

For I can none accuse; all may be free,

For any thing that I can prove, or lay

Unto the charge of any there this day.

And yet there may be many,

Though I do not know any.

Now of the Wise, this will be accepted;

For why? such counsel never breaks the head.

And as for you who in that Senate sit,

Whose consciences before the Lord acquit

You fully do, from ill reports abroad,

And clear you from deceitfulness and fraud;

Who walked have in the sincerity

Of your own hearts, and have in equity

And justice acted in the things which you

Have been intrusted and employ’d to do:

Ev’n you, who have the Lord before your eyes

Still set; and ever have, in all your ways,

His work and will endeavoured to do;

His Sions welfare being dear to you.

For doubtless, in that Court there are and have

Been always some, both holy, wise, and grave;

Some Y7r

Some that where chosen, faithful, and called,

Unto the King of Saints, Jesus their Head:

And these the happie instruments chiefly

Have been, to do the will of God: I say,

It’s Saints that have the little Horn destroy’d,

And those he left behinde have so annoy’d:

For others of themselves this could not do,

Who lov’d the horn, and his oppressions too:

And so the Oracle divine doth say,

That it is Saints that must the Horn kill, slay;

It’s Saints that must the honour have alone,

The written vengeance for to bring upon

The Heathen folk, and punishments also

On Kings, Princes, and Nobles, on a row:

In Saints the Spirit chiefly mov’d; that did

This work effect, though others that were led

By self-ends, did therein their aid afford;

But Saints their eyes were in it on the Lord.

Therefore to you, O Saints, that in that Court

Of Parliament did sit, here’s your comfort;

Your labours by the Lord have blessed bin,

And counsols prospered by him your King.

And is that all? Nay, Blessed you shall still

Be of the Lord, who blessings on you will

Abundantly pour out, as he hath done,

If in his ways you still walk and go on.

And Y7v

And now what doth remain? but that you do

Go on to carry on his work, and to

Give up your selves to him in holiness,

And wait on him, in truth and faithfulness;

Approving of your selves still in his sight,

And so to shine in holiness full bright.

And though men shall you slander and condemn,

Yet fear you not; God will not judge as men.

Do you rejoyce in him, and be assur’d

You shall be ever saved by the Lord:

And honour also you shall have of him;

For, those that honour him, he honours them.

Great love also, he will shew unto you;

Who loves all those, that purely love him do.

And you to sing new songs of thanks and praise,

Henceforth shall have great cause, even all your
days.

Unto Y8r

Unto the Armies faithful
Leaders, and
Unto the Faithful under
their command,

In the three Nations, that called are

To wait upon the Lamb in this his War.

O Happie, Blessed ones, consider you

What Honour ’tis that you are call’d unto;

In that not onely of the Common good

You have been Instruments, but that you stood

Upon Mount Sion with the Lamb, and did

At his command go forth, and eke were led

By him against his enemies and foes,

Their power, rage, and fury to oppose:

And not in vain; for why? he made them all

Before his presence among you to fall.

For when in 1645Sixteen hundred fourty five,

The time was come his Saints for to revive,

Who Y8v

Who were before overcome by the Beast,

And lay as dead, then being unreleast,

He then you called forth, and in you made

His Witnesses to live, who as dead laid;

But then were rais’d, and on their feet did stand,

And opposed the Beast by a strong hand.

And is this all you have been call’d to do?

Not so; but to destroy the Horn also;

Yea, and all those that do remain the Whore

For to support, as the Horn did before.

And now, as happie instruments you have

Been for to do the work of Christ, to save

His People from the range of enemies:

Even so henceforth it doth remain likewise

That you follow the Lamb in ev’ry place,

And still expect his presence and his grace.

And if to other Kingdoms he you call,

Fear not; for all that oppose him shall fall

Before his presence among you; and then

His glory shall among the sons of men

Most gloriously appear, and shine before

The World; and many then shall hate the Whore.

Therefore, ye sons of Zion, who rais’d are

Against the sons of Greece, both neer and far,

And are as Bowes and Arrows in Gods hand;

Fear not to do what he doth you command:

Fear Z1r

Fear not to go where e’er he doth you call;

For in your hand his work still proper stall.

And now look unto him in all you do,

To fill you with his holy Spirit, that so

You may not onely use in his service

the double-edged sword of his Justice,

His foes for to destroy; but that you may

Use the sword of the Spirit, that is to say,

The Word of God, which mighty is alone,

The Holds of sin and Satan to cast down;

That by the publishing of the Gospel,

You may also honour your Lord, as well

As Bby inflicting Justice on them who

Despise the offers of his grace, and do

Implacably remain, and desperate,

And ways of truth and purity do hate.

And Oh that as the Lamb you follow do,

Your garments may be white and clean, and you

May shine in spotless glory, having on

The garments of Christs righteousness alone!

And Oh that in the sight of God and men,

Your walkings might be pure and spotless! then

Much honour, praise, and glory would you bring

To him who is your Saviour and your King;

Who doth on his white horse before you go,

When you in white garments do him follow.

Z Say Z1v

Say I, O that you did so! Nay, I

Do also bless the Lord, for that this day

So much of him appearing in you is,

Unto the joy and comfort of all his.

I mean, in you that faithful are, to whom

My speech I did direct; whom God doth own,

And whom he doth guide, counsel, and direct,

Love, honour, save, and bless, and still protect.

In you his holy Spirit appear doth,

In ways of holiness you leading forth:

So that the solace of your hearts it is,

To walk with God in truth and righteousness.

But though you have attained much herein,

Yet O that your might higher rise! and bring

More praise to God, and joy to Saints, and so

You greater joy of heart would be in you.

Unto Z2r

Unto those people of the
Lord that do
In Babylon abide, unto
their wo:

And do not yet return,

But at the Truth do spurn.

Consider, Sirs, what you have done, and do,

And think how sad, how sad it is that you

Should any help unto the Beast afford,

And should oppose the servants of the Lord.

Hear now the call of God, and Come you out

Of Babylon; O come, O come about!

Lest that abiding there, of her sins you

Partake, and of her punishments also.

The word is giv’n, you must come out, and you

Must reward her, as she hath done; and do

Z2 Double Z2v

Double to her what she hath done, that she

Be’ng drunk with blood, with blood may filled be.

Is this the word, and yet are you so sad,

Because the Beast his helpers lowe are laid?

Would you not have the little Horn destroy’d,

Who hath the Saints of God so much annoy’d?

Remember how you did long since complain

To God against his cruelties, and fain

Would live in peace and quietness; but he

Opposed that, and would not let it be:

But War against the Saints did make, that so

He might them all destroy and overthrow.

But now he is destroy’d himself; and as

He did delight in blood, ev’n so blood was

Giv’n him to drink: are you, ev’n you so far

From singing songs of praise, as that you are

Offended at this thing? as if you were

Of Rome her ruine unwilling to hear.

O let it not of you, of you be said!

But now do you remember how you’ve pray’d

Against the Beast, the Whore, and all the Crew

Of their adherents that support them do:

And give not all the world just cause to say,

You are not as you were the other day;

But that whereas you did both pray and fight

Against that wicked Crew with all your might,

You Z3r

You now oppose all the Saints in the Land,

Who do unto those first Principles stand,

Which were, for to oppose King, Queen, and all

That did support the Whore, that down must fall:

Which they do still pursue unto the end,

And wholly unto that then counsels tend.

But if you will now shew your selves to be

The sons of Sion, then let all men see

That you repent of your evils, in that

You Camels swallow’d have, and at a Gnat

Have strained, when with foes you have joyned,

And true Saints have oppos’d, because they did

Not close with you in ev’ry circumstance

And thing that was of lesser consequence.

But if you do persist herein, surely

You shall be made ashamed in that day

When God shall justly judge between you and

His other faithful people in the Land;

Who always have desir’d your happiness,

And eke also your liberty and peace,

If peaceably you would have lived in

The place or Nation where you have bin.

(But those that have been medling peace to break,

Have themselves into trouble put their neck.)

But now, if that henceforth you shall no more

Support the Beast, nor helpers of the Whore,

But Z3v

But hearts and hands shall joyn with them that do

Oppose the enemies of Christ, and do

Give up themselves to wait upon the Lord,

And him to serve according to his word;

Then upon you shall mercy be, and peace,

And all the Israel of God, these days.

Finis.

Post- Z4r

Postscript.

Having often referred the Reader in
this book, unto that intitled, The
Resurrection of the Witnesses
; I shall
here desire the Reader to taker notice, That
in the last line of pag. 81. in that Book, he
is, for “The reign of Phocas the Emperour,”
to reade “the reign of Arcadius and Honorius
the Emperours”
: There being in that Book
a mistake of the Emperours name, by reason
of a trusting to memory, and neglecting to
consult the history about it; but no mistake
of the time: for that’s most evident, That
in the yeer 0404404 Innocentius being made Bishop
of Rome, he then first usurped the Papal
power, and advanced the See of Rome
above all other, and would have it to be
judged by none. And presently upon this,
began the Saints to be persecuted, and deprived
of their liberties: For Innocentius
was the first that drove the Novations out
of Rome, and deprived them of many
Churches: as witnesses Socrates ( lib. 7. ch. 8.) And Z4v
And those that were Novations were the
most truly religious people in those times,
as appears by the several testimonies Historians
give of them: I will cite but one expression
that Socrates hath concerning them.
( lib. 4. chap. 9.) “The Arrians abhorred
them”
, says he, “because they loved intirely such
as embraced the Faith of one substance.”
Those
that embraced the Faith of one substance,
were they that believed the Son of God to
be very God, and of one substance with the
Father; and these the Novations loved intirely,
says Socrates. In many other things
they are by Historians discovered to be truly
religious. And these, and all that purely
professed the truths of Christ, from this
yeer 0404404 began to be persecuted and troden
under foor by the Popish crew.

Thus much I thought good here to insert,
to correct that mistake in the first impression
of those books. There are two or three other
faults escaped in printing but they bein
not material, I shall not trouble the
Reader with the mention of them.

Finis.